Home

PowerFlex 20-COMM-D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual

1. TIP Information for PowerFlex 750 Series drives has been added to this manual where it is applicable Adding the Scanner to the I O Configuration Configuring the I O 4 3 To establish communication between the controller and adapter over the network you must first add the ControlLogix controller and its scanner to the I O configuration This procedure is similar for all RSLogix 5000 versions 1 Start RSLogix 5000 software 2 Select File gt New to display the New Controller screen New Controller Allen Bradley 1756163 16 X ConlrolLogix5563 Controller Redundancy Enabled 16_Example_using_ 20COMMD Example showing how to control PowerFlex 70 drive with a 20 COMM D DeviceNet adapter using RSLogx 5000 v16 software 175647 7 Slot Chassis 0 emen CARS Logix 5000 Projects Browse a Choose the appropriate choices for the fields in the screen to match your application b Click OK The RSLogix 5000 window reappears with the treeview in the left pane 3 In the treeview right click the I O Configuration folder and choose New Module The Select Module screen appears 4 Expand the Communications group to display all o
2. Data Table Address Description N9 0 Logic Status see Appendix D N9 1 Speed Feedback N9 2 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 310 Data Out A1 LSW N9 3 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 310 Data Out A1 MSW N9 4 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 311 Data Out A2 LSW N9 5 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 311 Data Out A2 MSW N9 6 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 312 Data Out B1 LSW N9 7 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 312 Data Out B1 MSW N9 8 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 313 Data Out B2 LSW N9 9 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 313 Data Out B2 MSW N9 10 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 314 Data Out C1 LSW N9 11 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 314 Data Out C1 MSW N9 12 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 315 Data Out C2 LSW N9 13 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 315 Data Out C2 MSW N9 14 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 316 Data Out D1 LSW N9 15 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 316 Data Out D1 MSW N9 16 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 317 Data Out D2 LSW N9 17 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 317 Data Out D2 MSW N10 0 Logic Command see Appendix D N10 1 Speed Reference N10 2 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 300 Data In A1 LSW N10 3 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 300 Data In A1 MSW
3. Logic Ref Fdbk Datalinks 16 bit User Configured Settings M 16 bit MIR Size in Bytes Par 13 Par 25 Par 26 Input Output DPI I O Cfg M S Input M S Output v v 4 4 0 0001 0 0001 0 0001 8 8 0 0011 0 0011 0 0011 v v vv 12 12 00111 00111 00111 v v 16 16 0 1111 01111 01111 v v 20 20 1111 11111 11111 Table 41 Drives with 16 bit Reference Feedback and 32 bit Datalinks These products include the following e PowerFlex 700 drives with vector control PowerFlex Digital DC drives e PowerFlex 700L drives with 700 control Logic Ref Fdbk Datalinks 32 bit User Configured Settings 16 bit mittee heal Size Bytes Par 13 Par 25 Par 26 Input Output DPI I O Cfg M S Input M S Output v v 4 4 0 0001 0 0001 0 0001 v v v 12 12 0 0011 0 0011 0 0011 v v vv 20 20 00111 00111 00111 v v 28 28 01111 0 1111 0 1111 v v 36 36 144 11111 1 1111 Table 4 J Drives with 32 bit Reference Feedback and 32 bit Datalinks These products include the following e PowerFlex 7005 drives with Phase or Phase Il control PowerFlex 753 drives e PowerFlex 700L drives with 7005 control e PowerFlex 755 drives Logic Ref Fdbk Datalinks 32 bit User Configured Settings 32 bit alis lon Size in Bytes Par 13
4. Value Address Hex Dec Description N30 0 0101 257 TXID 01 Command 01 execute N30 1 0024 36 Port 00 Size 36 bytes 9 N30 2 4C01 19457 Service 4C Set_Attribute_Single Address 01 Node N30 3 0093 147 Class 93 Parameter Object N30 4 0000 0 Instance Class Attributes drive N30 5 0000 0 Attribute 0 Parameter Value N30 6 008D 141 Parameter Number Written To 141 Accel Time 2 N30 7 oF 111 Parameter Value Written LSW 11 1 seconds N30 8 00000 9 Parameter Value Written MSW 0 N30 9 008F 143 Parameter Number Written To 143 Decel Time 2 N30 10 00DE 2 222 Parameter Value Written LSW 22 2 seconds N30 11 00002 9 Parameter Value Written MSW 0 N30 12 0069 105 Parameter Number Written To 105 Preset Speed 5 N30 13 0140 2 333 Parameter Value Written LSW 33 3 seconds N30 14 00000 0 Parameter Value Written MSW 0 N30 15 006A 106 Parameter Number Written To 106 Preset Speed 6 N30 16 01BC 444 Parameter Value Written LSW 44 4 seconds N30 17 00000 9 Parameter Value Written MSW 0 N30 18 006B 107 Parameter Number Written To 107 Preset Speed 7 N30 19 022B 2 555 Parameter Value Written LSW 55 5 seconds N30 20 00000 9 Parameter Value Written MSW 0 1 n RSLogix 5 software leading zeros are not displayed in data file addresses For example 0024 in address N30 1 is shown as
5. Data Table Address Description N9 0 1771 SDN Scanner Status Word see its User Manual for bit definitions N9 1 Logic Status see Appendix D N9 2 Speed Feedback N9 3 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 310 Data Out A1 N9 4 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 311 Data Out A2 N9 5 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 312 Data Out B1 N9 6 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 313 Data Out B2 N9 7 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 314 Data Out C1 N9 8 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 315 Data Out C2 N9 9 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 316 Data Out D1 N9 10 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 317 Data Out D2 N10 0 1771 SDN Scanner Command Word see its User Manual for bit definitions N10 1 Logic Command see Appendix D N10 2 Speed Reference N10 3 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 300 Data In A1 N10 4 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 301 Data In A2 N10 5 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 302 Data In B1 N10 6 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 303 Data In B2 N10 7 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 304 Data In C1 N10 8 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 305 Data In C2 N10 9 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 306 Data In D1 N10 10 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 307 Data In D2 PowerFlex 700 Drives with Vector Control and PowerFlex 7001 Drives with 700 Control Using the
6. Topic Page Understanding the Status Indicators 7 1 PORT Status Indicator 7 2 MOD Status Indicator 7 2 NET A Status Indicator 7 3 Viewing Adapter Diagnostic Items 7 4 Viewing and Clearing Events 7 6 The adapter has three status indicators They can be viewed on the adapter or through the drive cover Location on drive may vary fo Allen Bradley Item Status Indicator Description J Page PORT DPI Connection Status 7 2 Adapter Status 7 2 DeviceNet Status 7 3 only on drive cover Not used for DeviceNet 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 7 2 Troubleshooting PORT Status Indicator This red green bicolor LED indicates the status of the adapter s connection to the drive as shown in the table below Status Cause Off The adapter is not powered or is not properly connected to the drive Corrective Action e Securely connect the adapter to the drive using the Internal Interface ribbon cable e Apply power to the drive or adapter if mounted in a DPI External Comms Kit Flashing Red The adapter is not receiving a ping message e Verify that cables are securely connected and not damaged Replace from the drive cables if necessary e Cycle power to the drive or adapter if mounted in a DPI External Comms Kit Steady Re
7. 4 Logic Command Image 1 Reference LL Reference Write 2 DatalinkIn 4 Data In A1 3 Datalink In A2 Data In A2 L 4 Datalink In B1 Data In B1 5 Datalink In B2 4 Data In B2 6 Datalink In C1 3 Data In C1 7 DatalinkIn C2 Data In C2 8 Datalink In D1 Opt 1 0 Data In D1 9 Datalink In D2 m Board Data In D2 Outputs Input 0 Word Image 1 Pad Word Read 2 Logic Status Logic Status 3 Feedback Feedback 4 Datalink OutA1 Data Out A1 m 5 Datalink Out A2 Data Out A2 6 Datalink Out B1 Data Out B1 Datalink Out B2 Data Out B2 8 Datalink Out C1 Data Out C1 9 Datalink Out C2 Data Out C2 10 Datalink OutD1 Opt I O Data Out D1 11 Datalink OutD2 4 Board Data Out D2 Inputs M Message e Message Message Handler Buffer Handler Required by ControlLogix May may not be required by other types of controllers Configuring the Adapter to Use the Optional I O Data Using the Adapter in a DPI External Comms Kit 20 XCOMM DC BASE 8 3 The data from the I O Board is loaded into the Datalink word starting with bit 0 of Datalink D1 and concluding with bit 14 Bit 15 of Datalink D1 is reserved as an input valid Status flag When the input data is valid bit 15 1 For example for the 20 XCOMM IO OPT1 the digital inputs and digital outputs are mapped as shown in Figure 8 4 and Figure 8 5 respectively Figure 8
8. SLC 500 Data Program Data Description Table Address Description Table Address Drive Ready N9 0 0 Status Ready B3 1 0 Drive Active N9 0 1 Status Active B3 1 1 Actual Direction N9 0 3 Status Forward B3 1 3 Actual Direction XIC N9 0 3 Status Reverse B3 1 4 Drive Faulted N9 0 7 Status Faulted B3 1 7 Drive At Speed N9 0 8 Status At Speed B3 1 8 Speed Feedback N9 1 Speed Feedback N20 1 Table 5 V Program and SLC 500 Data Table Address Descriptions for Example Logic Command Reference Ladder Logic Program Program Data SLC 500 Data Description Table Address Description Table Address Command Stop B3 20 0 Drive Stop N10 0 0 Command Start B3 20 1 Drive Start N10 0 1 Command Jog B3 20 2 Drive Jog N10 0 2 Command Clear Faults B3 20 3 Drive Clear Faults N10 0 3 Command Forward Reverse B3 20 4 Drive Forward N10 0 4 Command Forward Reverse B3 20 4 Drive Reverse N10 0 5 Speed Reference N30 1 Speed Reference N10 1 Important In addition to the Run mode for the processor the scanner also has its own Run mode To change the scanner mode from IDLE to RUN set Bit O in data table address O e 0 where e the scanner slot number For this example we set Bit O in data table address O 1 0 An example ladder logic program that uses these descriptive controller data table addresses and passes their data to the descriptive program data table addresses is shown in Figure 5 20 and Figu
9. Service Code 9 Class Instance 2 Attribute Source Element Source Length Example Value CIP Generic Parameter Write 10 Hex f Hex 140 Dec 1 Hex Accel_Time_1 9 2 4 Description Used to access the Parameter Object in the adapter This service is used to write a parameter value Code for the requested service Class ID for the DPI Parameter Object Instance number is the same as parameter number Attribute number for the Parameter Value attribute Name of the tag for any service data to be sent from the scanner or bridge to the adapter drive Number of bytes of service data to be sent in the message Communication Tab Example Value Description Path 9 My_DeviceNet_Bridge The path is the route that the message will follow Tag Tab Example Value Description Name Single_Write_Message The name for the message 1 The default setting for Service Type is Custom enabling entry of a Service Code not available from the Service Type pull down menu When choosing a Service Type other than Custom from the pull down menu an appropriate Hex value is automatically assigned to the Service Code box which is dimmed unavailable 8 Only drive parameters Port 0 can be written to using Parameter Object Class code To write to a parameter of a peripheral in another port use DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 see page 6 10 9 Click Browse to find
10. Using Explicit Messaging 6 7 ControlLogix Controller Formatting a Message to Read a Single Parameter Using RSLogix 5000 Software Any Version Figure 6 5 Get Attribute Single Message Configuration Screens Configuration Communication Tag Path Message Configuration Single_Read_Message Message Configuration Single Read Message Configuration Communication Tag Name Message Configuration Single Read Message Single Read Message DeviceNet Bridge 2 1 Configuration Communication Tag Message Type CIP Generic Service Type Service Code Instance 3 Get Attribute Single xi Class 933 Attribute 3 Hex Heu Destination Dutput Current New Tag Enable Enable Waiting Eror Code Eror Path Eror Text Stat Extended Error Code OK Cancel The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to configure a message to read a single parameter Configuration Tab Example Value Description Message Type CIP Generic Used to access the Parameter Object in the adapter Service 1 Get Attribute Single This service is used to read a parameter value Service Code 1 Code for the requested service Class 93 Hex Class ID for the DPI Parameter Object Instance 2 3 Dec Instance number is the same as parameter numbe
11. 5 25 When using these products which contain DINT 32 bit format data types you will read from and write to the LSW data table address in the controller Table 5 PLC 5 Data Table Addresses for PowerFlex 700 Drives with Vector Control PowerFlex 700L Drives with 700 Control Data Table Address Description N9 0 1771 SDN Scanner Status Word see its User Manual for bit definitions N9 1 Logic Status see Appendix D N9 2 Speed Feedback N9 3 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 310 Data Out A1 LSW N9 4 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 310 Data Out A1 MSW N9 5 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 311 Data Out A2 LSW N9 6 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 311 Data Out A2 MSW N9 7 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 312 Data Out B1 LSW N9 8 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 312 Data Out B1 MSW N9 9 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 313 Data Out B2 LSW N9 10 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 313 Data Out B2 MSW N9 11 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 314 Data Out C1 LSW N9 12 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 314 Data Out C1 MSW N9 13 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 315 Data Out C2 LSW N9 14 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 315 Data Out C2 MSW N9 15 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 316 Data Out D1 LSW N9 16 Valu
12. POL l Accelerating My DeviceNet Bridge POL l Decelerating My DeviceNet Bridge POL l Alarm My DeviceNet Bridge POL l Faulted My DeviceNet Bridge POL l AtSpeed My DeviceNet Bridge POL l LocallDO DeviceNet Bridge 1 POL l LocallD1 My DeviceNet Bridge POL l LocallD2 DeviceNet Bridge NOT POL l SpdReflD My DeviceNet POL I SpdReflD1 My DeviceNet Bridge POL I SpdReflD2 DeviceNet Bridge POL l SpdReflD3 My DeviceNet Bridge POL l Feedback My DeviceNet Bridge POL l AccelTimel My DeviceNet Bridge POL l DecelTimet My DeviceNet Bridge POL 1 INT My DeviceNet Bridge POL l StopBrkModeA INT My DeviceNet Bridge POL l PresetSpeedt INT My DeviceNet Bridge POL l PresetSpeed2 INT My DeviceNet Bridge POL l PresetSpeed3 INT My DeviceNet Bridge POL l PresetSpeed4 INT My DeviceNet Bridge POL 0 1 AB 0079 03 PowerFlex 70 EC My DeviceNet Bridge POL D Stop BOOL My_DeviceNet_Bridge_NO1_POL_O Start BOOL My_DeviceNet_Bridge_NO1_POL_OJog BOOL My_DeviceNet_Bridge_NO1_POL_O ClearFault BOOL My_DeviceNet_Bridge_N01_POL_O Forward BOOL My_DeviceNet_Bridge_NO1_POL_O Reverse BOOL My_DeviceNet_Bridge_NO1_POL_O LocalControl BOOL My_DeviceNet_Bridge_NO1_POL_O MOPInc BOOL My DeviceNet Bridge N01 POL O Accell BOOL My_DeviceNet_Bridge_NO1_POL_O Accel2 BOOL My De
13. INT 15 Scallered Read Request 0 1 INT Parameter Number decimal Scallered Read Request 1 0 INT Pad Word always zero Scattered Read Request 2 0 INT Pad Word always zero Scattered Read Request 3 3 INT Parameter Number decimal Scattered Read Requesi 4 0 INT Pad Word always zero Scatlered Read Request 5 0 INT Pad Word always zero Scallered Read Request 6 INT Parameter Number decimal Scallered Read Request 7 0 INT Pad Word always zero Scaltered Read Request 8 0 INT Pad Word always zero Scaltered Read Request 9 12 INT Parameter Number decimal Scattered Read Request 10 0 INT Pad Word always zero Scatlered Read Request 11 INT Pad Word always zero Scattered Read_Request 12 17 INT Parameter Number decimal Scallered Read Request 13 o INT Pad Word always zero Scallered Read Request 14 INT Pad Word always zero ControlLogix Controller Example Scattered Read Response Data The Scattered Read Request message reads the multiple parameters and returns their values to the destination tag Scattered Read Response Figure 6 15 shows the parameter values Figure 6 15 Example Scattered Read Response Data Scattered Response INT 15 Scaltered Read Response 0 1 INT Parameter Number decimal Scallered Read Response 1 325 INT Parameter Value LSW Scaltlered Read Response 2 o INT Parameter Value MSW Scattered_Read_Response 3
14. Downloading the EDS File from Rockwell Automation Website a Go to the website http www rockwellautomation com resources eds On the web page in the Electronic Data Sheets EDS section click the link All Other EDS Files The Find EDS File search screen appears From the Network pull down menu choose the type of network for this example DeviceNet From the Device Type pull down menu choose AC Drive In the Keyword entry field enter the type of PowerFlex drive for this example PowerFlex 70EC noting that this field is space sensitive Click Search Because of many EDS files this search may take several minutes On the EDS File Search Results screen in the Details amp Download column click the Download link for the EDS file that corresponds to the drive Click Save on the File Download dialog box to save the EDS file to an appropriate location on your computer Launch the EDS Hardware Installation Tool by clicking the Microsoft Windows Start button and selecting Programs gt Rockwell Software gt RSLinx Tools gt EDS Hardware Installation Tool Follow the screen prompts to add the EDS file for use with your project Configuring the 4 25 j Reboot the computer and repeat steps 1 through 7 at the beginning of this subsection The Unrecognized Device icon in the RSNetWorx for DeviceNet graph view window in step 7 should have been replaced by a drive icon for this example
15. ER Control Block BT11 0 Data File N9 0 Length 62 Continuous NO Setup Screen Drive and Adapter Parameter Settings The following drive and adapter settings were used for the example ladder logic program in this section Device Parameter Value Description PowerFlex 90 Speed Ref A Sel 22 DPI Port 5 Assigns 20 COMM D to be used for the Reference 70 EC Drive 399 Data In A1 140 Points to Par 140 Accel Time 1 301 Data In A2 142 Points to Par 142 Decel Time 1 302 Data In B1 100 Points to Par 100 Jog Speed 303 Data In B2 155 Points to Par 155 Stop Mode A 304 Data In C1 101 Points to Par 101 Preset Speed 1 305 Data In C2 102 Points to Par 102 Preset Speed 2 306 Data In D1 103 Points to Par 103 Preset Speed 3 307 Data In D2 104 Points to Par 104 Preset Speed 4 310 Data Out A1 140 Points to Par 140 Accel Time 1 311 Data Out A2 142 Points to Par 142 Decel Time 1 312 Data Out B1 100 Points to Par 100 Jog Speed 313 Data Out B2 155 Points to Par 155 Stop Mode A 314 Data OutC1 101 Points to Par 101 Preset Speed 1 315 Data Out C2 102 Points to Par 102 Preset Speed 2 316 Data Out D1 103 Points to Par 103 Preset Speed 3 317 Data Out D2 104 Points to Par 104 Preset Speed 4 20 COMN D 03
16. Group 0 Module 0 HER gt gt Control Block BT12 0 Data File N30 0 Length 64 Continuous No Setup Screen lt Move Source 0 0 lt Dest N30 70 257 lt BT12 0 CMP BT12 1 BTR E A Comparison 3 Block Transfer Read EN DN Expression 30 70 lt gt N30 0 EN Module Type 1771 SDN DeviceNet Scanner Module Rack 000 DN 5 Group 0 Module 0 CERD Control Block BT12 1 Data File N30 70 Length 64 Continuous No Setup Screen lt PLC 5 Controller Example to Read a Single Parameter A read message is used to read a single parameter This read message example reads the value of parameter 003 Output Current in a PowerFlex 7 Class drive Table 6 H Example Single Read Request Data Value Address Hex Dec Description N30 0 0101 257 TXID 01 Command 01 execute N30 1 0008 8 Port 00 Size 08 bytes N30 2 0 01 3585 Service OE Get_Attribute_Single Address 01 Node N30 3 0093 147 Class 93 Parameter Object N30 4 0003 3 Instance Parameter 3 N30 5 0009 9 Attribute 9 Parameter Value 1 in RSLogix 5 software leading zeros are not displayed in data file addresses For example 0008 in address N30 1 is shown as 8 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 6 20 Using Explicit Messaging Figure 6 21 Example Single Read Request Data File File N30 hex 9 0 0 0 0 0 0 Radix He
17. Peer to Peer Hierarchy An adapter that is configured for a peer to peer hierarchy can exchange data with a device on the network that is not a scanner This type of hierarchy can be set up so that a scanner configures or transmits data to one PowerFlex 7 Class drive which then sends the same configuration or data to other PowerFlex 7 Class drives on the network To use a peer to peer hierarchy you configure one adapter to transmit data 2 or 4 words and one or more adapters to receive the data Ping A message that is sent by a DPI product to its peripheral devices They use the ping to gather data about the product including whether it can receive messages and whether they can log in for control Glossary G 7 Polled I O Data Exchange A device that is configured for polling I O data exchange sends data immediately after it receives a request for the data For example an adapter receives a Logic Command from the scanner and then sends back the Logic Status of the connected PowerFlex drive PowerFlex 7 Class Architecture Class Drives The Allen Bradley PowerFlex 7 Class family of drives supports DPI and at the time of publication includes the PowerFlex 70 PowerFlex 700 PowerFlex 700H PowerFlex 700S PowerFlex 700L and PowerFlex 7000 PowerFlex 750 Series Architecture Class Drives The Allen Bradley PowerFlex 750 Series of drives supports DPI and at the time of publication includes the PowerFlex 753 and PowerFlex 755 dri
18. PowerFlex HIM Connected Components Workbench software version 1 02 or later DriveExplorer software version 2 01 or later DriveExecutive software version 3 01 or later 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P Installing the Adapter 2 3 Setting the Data Rate Switch Set the adapter Data Rate switch Figure 2 2 by rotating the switch to the desired setting Figure 2 2 Setting Adapter Data Rate Switch 0 Setting Auto Description Sets the adapter to the data rate used by other network devices Another device on the network must be set to a data rate 125K 250K 500K Sets the adapter to the respective data rate PGM default The adapter uses the value stored in Parameter 05 DN Rate Cfg for the data rate See Setting the Data Rate on page 3 3 Also the adapter uses the value stored in Parameter 03 DN Addr Cfg for the node address See Setting the Node Address on page 3 3 The Data Rate switch setting can be verified by viewing Parameter 06 DN Rate Act or Diagnostic Device Item number 29 page 7 5 with any of the following drive configuration tools PowerFlex HIM Connected Components Workbench software version 1 02 or later DriveExplorer software version 2 01 or later DriveExecutive software version 3 01 or later 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 2 4 I
19. 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P Parameter No Name and Description 06 DN Rate Act Displays the actual DeviceNet data rate used by the adapter 07 Ref Fdbk Size Displays the size of the Reference Feedback The drive determines the size of the Reference Feedback 08 Datalink Size Displays the size of each Datalink word The drive determines the size of Datalinks 09 Reset Module set to 1 Reset Module Restores the adapter to Ready after the command has been performed adapter 10 Comm Action if the adapter detects that I O communication has been disrupted This setting is effective only if I O that controls the drive is transmitted through the adapter When communication is re established the network again disconnected cable No action if set to 0 Ready Resets the adapter if its factory default settings if set to 2 Set Defaults This parameter is a command It will be reset to 0 Sets the action that the adapter and drive will take the drive will automatically receive commands over Details Values 0 125 kbps 1 250 kbps 2 500 kbps Type Read Only Values 0 16 bit 1 32 bit Type Read Only Values 0 16 bit 1 32 bit Type Read Only Default 0 Ready Values 0 Ready 1 Reset Module 2 Set Defaults Type Read Write Reset Required No ATTENTION Risk of injury or e
20. 24 2 For PowerFlex 7005 or PowerFlex 750 Series drives if some of the parameters being written to are floating point REAL data types see the Communications section in Chapter 1 of the PowerFlex 700S AC Drives Phase II Control Reference Manual publication PFLEX RM003 on how to manipulate REAL data into two 16 bit registers 9 The maximum number of bytes that can be entered is 120 78 Hex which represents 19 parameters The number of required bytes always includes 2 for the Class 2 for the Instance 2 for the Attribute 2 for each parameter being written to and 4 for each parameter value 2 bytes for the Least Slgnificant Word and 2 bytes for the Most Significant Word For this example where 5 parameters are being written to a value of 36 bytes is required Figure 6 27 Example Scattered Write Request Data File i File N30 hex 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 6 26 Using Explicit Messaging 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P Table 6 0 Example Scattered Write Response Data Value Address Hex Dec Description N30 70 0101 257 TXID 01 Status 01 successful N30 71 001E 30 Port 00 Size 30 bytes N30 72 Ccco1 13311 Service CC successful Address 01 Node N30 73 008D 141 Parameter Number verification N30 74 0000 0 Pad Word 0 successful or Er
21. Table 5 Q SLC 500 Data Table Addresses for PowerFlex 7005 Drives Phase Control Data Table Address Description N9 0 Logic Status see Appendix D N9 1 Not Used N9 2 Speed Feedback LSW N9 3 Speed Feedback MSW N9 4 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 724 725 Data Out A1 LSW N9 5 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 724 725 Data Out A1 MSW N9 6 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 726 727 Data Out A2 LSW N9 7 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 726 727 Data Out A2 MSW N9 8 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 728 729 Data Out B1 LSW N9 9 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 728 729 Data Out B1 MSW N9 10 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 730 731 Data Out B2 LSW N9 11 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 730 731 Data Out B2 MSW N9 12 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 732 733 Data Out C1 LSW N9 13 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 732 733 Data Out C1 MSW N9 14 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 734 735 Data Out C2 LSW N9 15 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 734 735 Data Out C2 MSW N9 16 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 736 737 Data Out D1 LSW N9 17 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 736 737 Data Out D1 MSW N9 18 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 738 739 Data Out D2 LSW N9 19 Value of parameter assigned to Parame
22. 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P Downloading the EDS File from Rockwell Automation Website a Go to the website http www rockwellautomation com resources eds On the web page in the Electronic Data Sheets EDS section click the link All Other EDS Files The Find EDS Files search screen appears From the Network pull down menu choose the type of network for this example DeviceNet From the Device Type pull down menu choose AC Drive In the Keyword entry field enter the type of PowerFlex drive for this example PowerFlex 70EC noting that this field is space sensitive Click Search Because of many EDS files this search may take several minutes On the EDS File Search Results screen in the Details amp Download column click the Download link for the EDS file that corresponds to the drive Click Save on the File Download dialog box to save the EDS file to an appropriate location on your computer Launch the EDS Hardware Installation Tool by clicking the Microsoft Windows Start button and selecting Programs gt Rockwell Software gt RSLinx Tools gt EDS Hardware Installation Tool Follow the screen prompts to add the EDS file for use with your project Reboot the computer and repeat steps 1 through 7 at the beginning of this subsection The Unrecognized Device icon in the RSNetWorx for DeviceNet graph view window in step 7 should have been
23. Length 86 mm 3 39 inches Width 78 5 mm 3 09 inches Weight 85 g 3 oz 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 2 Specifications Environmental Temperature Operating 10 50 14 122 F Storage 40 85 C 40 185 F Relative Humidity 5 95 non condensing Atmosphere Important The adapter must not be installed in an area where the ambient atmosphere contains volatile or corrosive gas vapors or dust If the adapter is not going to be installed for a period of time it must be stored in an area where it will not be exposed to a corrosive atmosphere Regulatory Compliance Certification Specification UL UL508C cUL CSA C22 2 No 14 M91 CE EN50178 and EN61800 3 CTick EN61800 3 NOTE This is a product of category C2 according to IEC 61800 3 In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case supplementary mitigation measures may be required 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P About Parameter Numbers Parameter List Appendix B Adapter Parameters This appendix provides information about the adapter parameters Topic Page About Parameter Numbers B 1 Parameter List B 1 The parameters in the adapter are numbered consecutively However depending on which configuration tool you use they may have different numbers Configuration Tool Numbering Scheme e HIM The a
24. Maximum Freq which has a default value of 130 Hz For these drives default scaling is 0 15123 which is equal to 0 60 0 Hz This is based on the formula shown below Reference Feedback scaling is limited by drive parameter 82 Maximum Speed If the default value of 60 Hz for parameter 82 Maximum Speed is changed the speed Reference Feedback scaling also changes To determine Reference Feedback scaling use the following formula Parameter 82 Parameter 55 32767 Scaling Using drive parameter 82 and 55 default values speed Reference Feedback scaling is 60 Hz 130 Hz 32767 15123 Therefore 0 15123 0 60 0 Hz If parameter 82 Maximum Speed is changed to 90 Hz then 90 Hz 130 Hz 32767 22685 Therefore 0 22685 0 90 0 Hz A graphic representation of this Reference Feedback scaling is shown below 130 Hz 90 Hz 60 Hz 0 15123 22685 32767 Par 55 Maximum Freq Scaling Parameter 82 Parameter 55 32767 For PowerFlex 70 drives with enhanced control firmware 2 xxx or later or PowerFlex 700 drives with vector control firmware 3 xxx or later drive parameter 298 DPI Ref Select was added to simplify scaling for the speed Reference Feedback When drive parameter 298 DPI Ref Select is set to its default 0 Max Freq the speed Reference Feedback scaling is as shown above However when parameter 298 DPI Ref Select is set to 1 M
25. Switches to set the node address See Setting the Node Address Switches on page 2 2 5 Data Rate Switch Switch to set the DeviceNet data rate at which the adapter communicates See Setting the Data Rate Switch on page 2 3 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 1 2 Getting Started Features 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P The features of the adapter include the following Typical mounting in a PowerFlex 7 Class drive The 20 COMM D Series B adapter firmware revision 2 xxx or later can also be installed in a DPI External Comms Kit and used with the kit s optional I O board See Chapter 8 Using the Adapter in a DPI External Comms Kit 20 XCOMM DC BASE for more information DPI External Comms Kit Compatibility 20 COMM D Adapter Operation With Firmware DPI External Comms Kit Optional I O Board Series Revision 20 XCOMM DC BASE 20 XCOMM IO OPT1 A 1xxx No No 2 XXX No No B 1xxx No No 2 XXX Yes Yes Captive screws to secure and ground the adapter to the drive or when mounted in a DPI External Comms Kit to the kit s metal enclosure Compatibility with various configuration tools to configure the adapter and connected host drive including the following tools PowerFlex HIM Human Interface Module on the drive if available Connected Components Workbench software version 1 02 or later DriveExplorer softw
26. Using Explicit Messaging 6 23 Value Address Hex Dec Description N30 0 0101 257 TXID 01 Command 01 execute N30 1 0024 136 Port 00 Size 36 bytes N30 2 4B01 19201 Service 4B Get Attribute Single Address 01 Node N30 3 0093 147 Class 93 DPI Parameter Object N30 4 0000 0 Instance Class Attributes drive N30 5 0000 0 Attribute 0 Parameter Value N30 6 0001 1 Parameter Number Read 1 Output Freq N30 7 0000 0 Pad Word 0 always zero N30 8 0000 0 Pad Word 0 always zero N30 9 0003 3 Parameter Number Read 3 Output Current N30 10 0000 0 Pad Word 0 always zero N30 11 0000 0 Pad Word 0 always zero N30 12 0006 6 Parameter Number Read 6 Output Voltage N30 13 0000 0 Pad Word 0 always zero N30 14 0000 0 Pad Word 0 always zero N30 15 000C 12 Parameter Number Read 12 DC Bus Current N30 16 0000 0 Pad Word 0 always zero N30 17 0000 0 Pad Word 0 always zero N30 18 0011 17 Parameter Number Read 17 Analog In2 Value N30 19 0000 0 Pad Word 0 always zero N30 20 0000 0 Pad Word 0 always zero 1 in RSLogix 5 software leading zeros are not displayed in data file addresses For example 0024 in address N30 1 is shown as 24 2 The maximum number of bytes that can be entered is 120 78 Hex which represents 19 parameters The number of required bytes always includes 2 for the Class 2
27. 0 values for data This does not command a stop 3 Hold Last The drive continues in its present state 4 Send Fit Cfg The drive is sent the data that you set in the fault configuration parameters Parameters 15 FIt Cfg Logic through 24 Flt Cfg D2 In 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 3 12 Configuring the Adapter Resetting the Adapter 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P Port 5 Device Port 5 Device 20 COMM D 20 COMM D Parameter 10 Parameter 11 Comm Fit Action Idle Fit Action Fault Fault Changes to these parameters take effect immediately A reset is not required If communication is disrupted and then is re established the drive will automatically take commands from the network again Setting the Fault Configuration Parameters When setting Parameter 10 Comm Action or 11 Idle Action to Send Fit Cfg the values in the following parameters are sent to the drive after an I O communication fault and or idle fault occurs You must set these parameters to values required by your application Parameter Description 15 Flt Cfg Logic A 16 bit value sent to the drive for Logic Command 16 Fit Cfg Ref A 32 bit value 0 4294967295 sent to the drive as a Reference or Datalink 17 Flt Cfg x1 In Important If the drive uses a 16 bit Reference or 16 bit Datalinks the most t
28. 11101 xxi 16 16 16 16and0 16and0 11110 XXXX1 16 16 16 16 and 0 16 and 11111 xxxi 20 20 20 20and0 20and0 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P Master Slave I O Configuration E 3 Table E B Host Products with 32 bit Reference Feedback and Datalinks Allocation Number of Bytes Data Size sent from the Controller to the Adapter M SInput M S Output PollOnly COSOnly Cyclic Only Poll amp COS amp Cyclic 00000 XxxxO 00001 XxxxO 00010 xxxxO 8 00011 XxxxO 16 00100 xxxxO 8 00101 XxxxO 16 00110 XXxxO 16 00111 XXXX0 24 01000 xxxxO 8 01001 XxxxO 16 01010 XXxxO 16 01011 XXXX0 24 01100 XXXX0 16 01101 XXXX0 24 01110 XXXX0 24 01111 XXXX0 32 10000 XXXX0 8 10001 XXXX0 16 10010 XXxxO 16 10011 XXXX0 24 10100 XxxxO 16 10101 XXXX0 24 10110 XXXX0 24 10111 XXXX0 32 11000 XxxxO 16 11001 XxxxO 24 11011 XXXX0 32 11100 XXXX0 24 11101 XXXX0 32 11110 XXXX0 32 11111 XXXX0 40 00000 xood 0 0 0 0 and 0 00001 xood 8 8 8 8 and0 8 and0 00010 xood 8 8 8 8 and0 8 and0 00011 XXXX1 16 16 16 16 and 0 16 and 0 00100 xood 8 8 8 8 0 8 and 0 00101 xxt 16 16 16 16and0 16and0 00110 XXXX1 16 16 16 16 and 0 16 and 00111 XXXX1 24 24 24 24 and 0 24 and 0 01000 xood 8 8 8 8 0 8 and 0 01001 XXXX1 16 16 16
29. 2 To perform this command the value must switch from 0 to 1 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P D 4 Logic Command Status Words Logic Status Word Logic Bits 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 Status Description Active 0 Not Active 1 Active Running 0 Not Running 1 Running Command 0 Reverse Direction 1 Forward Actual Direction 0 Reverse 1 Forward Accel 0 Not Accelerating 1 Accelerating Decel 0 Not Decelerating 1 Decelerating Jogging 0 Not Jogging 1 Jogging Fault 0 No Fault Par 323 324 325 1 Fault X Alarm 0 No Alarm Par 326 327 328 1 Alarm X Flash Mode 0 Not in Flash Mode 1 In Flash Mode X Run Ready 0 Not Ready to Run Par 156 1 Ready to Run x At Limit 0 0 Not At Limit Par 304 1 At Limit X Tach Loss Sw 0 Not Tach Loss Sw 1 Tach Loss Sw x At Zero Spd 0 Not At Zero Speed 1 At Zero Speed X At Setpt Spd 0 Not At Setpoint Speed 1 At Setpoint Speed x Enable 0 Not Enabled 1 Enabled 1 See Parameter 304 Limit Status in the PowerFlex 7005 drive User Manual for a description of the limit status conditions 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P Logic Command Status Words D 5 PowerFlex 750 Series Drives Important When using a 20 COMM D adapter with a PowerFlex 750 Series driv
30. 8 Datalink In D1 8 Datalink Out D1 9 Datalink In D2 9 Datalink Out D2 Table 5 E PLC 5 or SLC 500 Controller I O Image for Drives with 16 bit Reference Feedback and 32 bit Datalinks These products include the following e PowerFlex 700 drives with vector control e PowerFlex 700L drives with 700 control e PowerFlex Digital DC drives Word Output I O Word Input I O 0 Logic Command 0 Logic Status 1 Reference 1 Feedback 2 Datalink In A1 LSW 2 Datalink Out A1 LSW 3 Datalink In A1 MSW 3 Datalink Out A1 MSW 4 Datalink In A2 LSW 4 Datalink Out A2 LSW 5 Datalink In A2 MSW 5 Datalink Out A2 MSW 6 Datalink In B1 LSW 6 Datalink Out B1 LSW 7 Datalink In B1 MSW 7 Datalink Out B1 MSW 8 Datalink In B2 LSW 8 Datalink Out B2 LSW 9 Datalink In B2 MSW 9 Datalink Out B2 MSW 10 Datalink In C1 LSW 10 Datalink Out C1 LSW 11 Datalink In C1 MSW 11 Datalink Out C1 MSW 12 Datalink In C2 LSW 12 Datalink Out C2 LSW 13 Datalink In C2 MSW 13 Datalink Out C2 MSW 14 Datalink In D1 LSW 14 Datalink Out D1 LSW 15 Datalink In D1 MSW 15 Datalink Out D1 MSW 16 Datalink In D2 LSW 16 Datalink Out D2 LSW 17 Datalink In D2 MSW 17 Datalink Out D2 MSW 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 5 6 Using the I O Table 5 F PLC 5 or SLC 500 Controller I O Image for Drives
31. Both I O and explicit messages can be transmitted over the network A DeviceNet network can support a maximum of 64 devices Each device is assigned a unique node address and transmits data on the network at the same data rate A cable is used to connect devices on the network It contains both the signal and power wires Devices can be connected to the network with drop lines in a daisy chain connection or a combination of the two General information about DeviceNet and the DeviceNet specification are maintained by the Open DeviceNet Vendor s Association ODVA ODVA is online at http www odva org DPI Drive Peripheral Interface A second generation peripheral communication interface used by various Allen Bradley drives and power products such as PowerFlex 7 Class drives It is a functional enhancement to SCANport DPI Peripheral A device that provides an interface between DPI and a network or user Peripheral devices are also referred to as adapters or modules The 20 COMM D adapter 1203 USB or 1203 SSS converter and PowerFlex 7 Class HIMs 20 HIM xxx are examples of DPI peripherals DPI Product A device that uses the DPI communication interface to communicate with one or more peripheral devices For example a motor drive such as a PowerFlex 7 Class drive is a DPI product In this manual a DPI product is also referred to as drive or host DriveExplorer Software A tool for monitoring and c
32. Datalink In B2 MSW Datalink Out B2 MSW 6 Datalink In C1 LSW 6 Datalink Out C1 LSW Datalink In C1 MSW Datalink Out C1 MSW 7 Datalink In C2 LSW 7 Datalink Out C2 LSW Datalink In C2 MSW Datalink Out C2 MSW 8 Datalink In D1 LSW 8 Datalink Out D1 LSW Datalink In D1 MSW Datalink Out D1 MSW 9 Datalink In D2 LSW 9 Datalink Out D2 LSW PLC 5 or SLC 500 Controller Image The I O image for these controllers changes depending on the size of the drive s Reference Feedback and Datalinks and the number of Datalinks used Table 5 D Table 5 E and Table 5 show the I O image when using Datalink In D2 MSW Datalink Out D2 MSW various PowerFlex 7 Class drives and all Datalinks enabled Using the I O 5 5 Table 5 0 PLC 5 or SLC 500 Controller I O Image for Drives with 16 bit Reference Feedback and 16 bit Datalinks These products include the following e PowerFlex 70 drives with standard or enhanced control SMC Flex smart motor controllers e PowerFlex 700 drives with standard control e SMC 50 smart motor controllers e PowerFlex 700H drives Word Output I O Word Input I O 0 Logic Command 0 Logic Status 1 Reference 1 Feedback 2 Datalink In A1 2 Datalink Out A1 3 Datalink In A2 3 Datalink Out A2 4 Datalink In B1 4 Datalink Out B1 5 Datalink In B2 5 Datalink Out B2 6 Datalink In C1 6 Datalink Out C1 7 Datalink In C2 7 Datalink Out C2
33. For example parameter 3 Output Current in a PowerFlex 70 EC drive is a 32 bit parameter When using a drive that has 32 bit Datalinks PowerFlex 700 VC PowerFlex 700S and PowerFlex 750 Series drives only one drive Datalink parameter is required to transfer any parameter Using the 5 35 Understanding SLC 500 Controller Data Table Addresses Because the SLC 500 controller is a 16 bit platform and is used with the 32 bit 20 COMM D adapter the data will be transposed from the least significant word LSW to the most significant word MSW in the controller When the I O was configured Chapter 4 two available default memory addresses M1 1 x for input data and MO 1 x for output data were used However because memory addresses cannot be used to display real data COP instructions will be used in this example to convert these addresses to N data table addresses With this conversion the M1 1 0 address will become N9 0 and the 1 0 address will become N10 0 Figure 5 18 shows an example ladder logic program to convert memory addresses to N data table addresses Figure 5 18 SLC 500 Example Ladder Logic Program to Convert Memory Addresses COP Copy File Source 1 1 0 Dest N9 0 Length 10 le Addresses COP Copy File Source N10 0 Dest M0 1 0 Length 10 TIP In the ladder logic COP instructions the number following the colon in the M1 and MO addresses is the sl
34. G 1 Index C cables DeviceNet 2 7 DPI Internal Interface 2 4 2 5 CAN Controller Area Network G 1 Change of State COS configuring adapter for 3 10 definition G 1 CIP Common Industrial Protocol G 1 class G 2 Comm Action parameter B 2 commissioning the adapter 2 10 communication module see adapter compatible products 1 3 components of the adapter 1 1 configuration tools 3 1 Connected Components Workbench software adapter configuration tool 1 4 definition website G 2 connecting adapter to the drive 2 4 network 2 7 Connection object C 3 ControlFLASH software G 2 controller G 2 ControlLogix controller configuring the I O 4 2 explicit messaging 6 4 using the I O 5 12 COS Fdbk Change parameter 5 COS Status Mask parameter B 5 COS see Change of State COS Cyc Interval parameter B 5 Cyclic configuring adapter for 3 10 definition G 2 D data exchange Change of State COS 3 10 G 1 Cyclic 3 10 G 2 Polled 3 10 G 7 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P Index 2 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P data rate definition G 2 setting with parameter 3 3 setting with switch 2 3 Datalink Size parameter B 2 Datalinks definition G 3 in I O image 5 2 using 5 9 using Datalink D to send optional I O Board data 8 2 DeviceNet 5 pin linear plug 2 7 cable 2 7 connector on adapter 1 1 data rates
35. N10 4 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 301 Data In A2 LSW N10 5 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 301 Data In A2 MSW N10 6 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 302 Data In B1 LSW N10 7 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 302 Data In B1 MSW N10 8 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 303 Data In B2 LSW N10 9 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 303 Data In B2 MSW N10 10 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 304 Data In C1 LSW N10 11 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 304 Data In C1 MSW N10 12 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 305 Data In C2 LSW N10 13 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 305 Data In C2 MSW N10 14 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 306 Data In D1 LSW N10 15 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 306 Data In D1 MSW N10 16 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 307 Data In D2 LSW N10 17 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 307 Data In D2 MSW 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 5 38 Using the I O PowerFlex 700S PowerFlex 700L with 700S Control and PowerFlex 750 Series and PowerFlex Digital DC Drives When using any of these drives which contain both DINT 32 bit format and REAL floating point format data types you will always read from and write to the LSW data table address in the controller first Then if the data value exceeds 16 bits the remaining value will be in the MSW data table address
36. Reply Timeout Ethernet v 149 Who Active 10 61 Octal 3 Assign a name for the processor 4 In the list select the appropriate processor for this example 1747 L552C 5 05 5 Choose the appropriate choices for the fields in the screen to match your application 6 Click OK The RSLogix 500 project window reappears Using the 5 33 7 In the project treeview right click IO Configuration and choose Open to display the I O Configuration screen 1 0 Configuration Racks Current Cards Available 174644 4SlotRack gt Filter z 2 120 Rack Not Installed X Read IO Config 1 Any Spt Discrete Input Module J Any 16pt Discrete Input Module Any 32pt Discrete Input Module Any 8pt Discrete Output Module Any 16pt Discrete Output Module Any 32pt Discrete Output Module Series 1500 Resolver Module Series 1561 Resolver Module Description 5 05 CPU 32K Mem 05501 Series C FF 0 1747 L552C Read IO Configration from Online Processor Driver Route Processor Node T CIP Path 16 12 49 48 46 57 49 46 4 52 Decimal EtherNetIP c64 Octal Last Configured EtherNetIP Reply Timeout i ne Cancel Read I0 Config Help Node 524 CIP Path 15 12 43 48 46 57 43 46 43 48 v 8 Onthe I O Configuration screen click Read IO Config to display the Read IO Configuration from Online Processor
37. Slot 3 is selected b Click Apply 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 4 10 Configuring the I O 11 Click the Scanlist tab to begin the drive I O configuration The Available Devices box shows devices that are presently on the DeviceNet network but are not yet configured The Scanlist box shows devices that are presently on the DeviceNet network and are configured gt TIP The Automap on Add box is checked by default and allows RSNetWorx for DeviceNet software to automatically map the drive I O into the scanner in the next available registers The mapping is based on the minimum I O requirements 4 bytes for input and 4 bytes for output that the scanner obtains from the drive EDS file a For this example uncheck the Automap on Add box b Select the PowerFlex 70 EC drive in the Available Devices box c Click gt to move the PowerFlex 70 EC drive to the Scanlist box tx 1756 DNB General Module Scaniist input Output ADR Summary Available Devices Scaniist Box Node Active Mo gt El Setting Activates deactivates the scanlist in the 1756 DNB scanner for the selected device For this example keep the box checked Device Type Vendor Product Code Major Revision 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P These Electronic Key category check boxes select how specific the devic
38. configuring the adapter for 3 12 definition G 4 faulted node recovery G 4 faults see events features 1 2 firmware revision P 1 update guidelines 3 14 Cfg A1 D2 In parameters B 4 Cfg Logic parameter B 4 Cfg Ref parameter B 4 G grounding the adapter 2 6 H heartbeat rate G 4 HIM Human Interface Module accessing parameters with 3 2 definition G 5 LCD model 3 2 LED model 3 2 hold last configuring the adapter for 3 11 definition G 5 I O about 5 1 configuring for ControlLogix controller 4 2 PLC 5 controller 4 20 SLC 500 controller 4 31 configuring the adapter for 3 4 definition G 5 understanding the I O image 5 2 using with ControlLogix controller 5 12 PLC 5 controller 5 19 SLC 500 controller 5 32 I O Board option in DPI External Comms Kit configuring adapter to use optional I O data 8 3 understanding the I O image 8 2 using Datalink D to send I O data 8 2 viewing optional I O diagnostic data 8 4 Identity object C 2 idle action G 5 Idle Action parameter B 3 installation applying power to the adapter 2 8 commissioning the adapter 2 10 connecting to the drive 2 4 network 2 7 preparing for 2 1 Internal Interface cables connecting to the adapter 2 5 drive 2 5 illustration 2 5 Index 3 L LCD HIM 3 2 LED HIM 3 2 LEDs see status indicators or name of indicator Logic Command Status bit definitions for PowerFlex 70 700 700H and 700L with 70
39. e 9303 4DTSOIENE DriveTools SP Suite includes DriveExecutive and DriveObserver software e 9303 ADTE2SOIENE DriveExecutive software upgrade to DriveTools SP Suite adds DriveObserver software DriveExecutive software updates patches and so forth can be obtained at http www ab com support abdrives webupdate software html It is highly recommended that you periodically check for and install the latest update C Controller configuration tool such as RSLogix 5 RSLogix 500 RSLogix 5000 software 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P Getting Started 1 5 A computer connection to the DeviceNet network via a communication card such as 1784 PCD 1784 PCID 1784 PCIDS or 1770 KFD Safety Precautions Please read the following safety precautions carefully gt ATTENTION Risk of injury or death exists PowerFlex drive may contain high voltages that can cause injury or death Remove all power from the PowerFlex drive and then verify power has been discharged before installing or removing an adapter ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists Only personnel familiar with drive and power products and the associated machinery should plan or implement the installation start up configuration and subsequent maintenance of the product using an adapter Failure to comply may result in injury and or equipment damage ATTENTION Risk of equipment damage
40. running various Windows operating systems Information about RSNetWorx for DeviceNet software can be found at http www software rockwell com rsnetworx 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 6 8 Glossary 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P Scanner A scanner is a separate module of a multi module controller or a built in component of a single module controller that provides communication with adapters connected to a network See also Controller Status Indicators LEDs that are used to report the status of the adapter network and drive They are on the adapter and can be viewed on the front cover of the drive when the drive is powered Type 0 Type 1 Type 2 Control When transmitting I O the adapter can use different types of messages for control The Type 0 Type 1 and Type 2 events help Allen Bradley personnel identify the type of messages that an adapter is using UCMM UnConnected Message Manager UCMM provides a method to create connections between DeviceNet devices UDDT User Defined Data Type A structure data type that you define during the development of an application for example to convert 32 bit REAL parameter data for written and read values to correctly display them in human readable format Update The process of updating firmware in a device The adapter and its connected PowerFlex 7 Class host drive and its peripherals can b
41. to determine whether the drive uses 16 bit or 32 bit words for Datalinks Rules for Using Datalinks e Each set of Datalink parameters in a PowerFlex drive can be used by only one adapter If more than one adapter is connected to a single drive multiple adapters cannot use the same Datalink e Parameter settings in the drive determine the data passed through the Datalink mechanism See the documentation for your drive e When you use a Datalink to change a value the value is not written to the Nonvolatile Storage NVS memory The value is stored in volatile memory and lost when the drive loses power Thus use Datalinks when you need to change a value of a parameter frequently Datalink Scaling PowerFlex 70 700 700H Drives and PowerFlex 700L Drives with 700 Control Datalink scaling is not automatic and uses whole numbers INTs or DINTs See the drive documentation to determine the unit resolution for the associated parameter Datalink For example PowerFlex 700VC drive parameter 3 Output Current has a 0 1 unit resolution Because Datalink scaling uses whole numbers the Output Current value is multiplied by 10 in the adapter and then sent over the network Suppose the actual Output Current value is 35 5 amps Reading the associated parameter Datalink received by the controller the value would be 355 By using ladder logic divide the value by 10 in the controller to get the correct scaling See the drive documentation to determin
42. 12 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 898 Data In B2 MSW N10 13 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 899 Data In C1 LSW N10 14 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 899 Data In C1 MSW N10 15 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 900 Data In C2 LSW N10 16 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 900 Data In C2 MSW N10 17 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 901 Data In D1 LSW N10 18 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 901 Data In D1 MSW N10 19 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 902 Data In D2 LSW N10 20 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 902 Data In D2 MSW Using the Table 54 PLC 5 Data Table Addresses for PowerFlex Digital DC Drives Data Table Address Description N9 0 Logic Status see Appendix D N9 1 Speed Feedback LSW N9 2 Speed Feedback MSW N9 3 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 618 Data Out A1 LSW N9 4 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 618 Data Out A1 MSW N9 5 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 619 Data Out A2 LSW N9 6 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 619 Data Out A2 MSW N9 7 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 620 Data Out B1 LSW N9 8 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 620 Data Out B1 MSW N9 9 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 621 Data Out B2 LSW N9 10 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 621
43. 16and0 16and0 01010 XXXX1 16 16 16 16 and 0 16 and 01011 XXXX1 24 24 24 24 and 0 24 and 0 01100 XXXX1 16 16 16 16 and 0 16 and 01101 XXXX1 24 24 24 24 and 0 24 and 0 01110 XXXX1 24 24 24 24 and 0 24 and 0 01111 xxi 32 32 32 32and0 32 10000 xood 8 8 8 8 and0 8 and 0 10001 xxt 16 16 16 16and0 16and0 10010 XXXX1 16 16 16 16 and 0 16 and 10011 XXXX1 24 24 24 24 and 0 24 and 0 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 4 Master Slave I O Configuration M S Output Parameter Configurations 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P Table Host Products with 32 bit Reference Feedback and Datalinks Continued Allocation Number of Bytes Data Size sent from the Controller to the Adapter M S Input M S Output Poll Only COS Only Cyclic Only Poll amp COS Poll amp Cyclic 10100 XXXX1 16 16 16 16and0 16and0 10101 XXXX1 24 24 24 24 and 0 24 and 0 10110 XXXX1 24 24 24 24 and 0 24 and 0 10111 xxxx 32 32 32 32and0 32 11000 xxt 16 16 16 16and0 16and0 11001 XXXX1 24 24 24 24 and 0 24 and 0 11011 xxt 32 32 32 32and0 32 11100 xxxx1 24 24 24 24 and 0 24 and 0 11101 xxi 32 32 32 32and0 32and0 11110 xxxx1 32 32 32 32 0 32 11111 XXXX1 40 40 40 40and0 40 Parameter 26 M S Output has the following five configurable bits Figure E 2 Parame
44. 22 2 Sec 105 Preset Speed 5 33 3 Hz 106 Preset Speed 6 44 4 Hz 107 Preset Speed 7 55 5 Hz Figure 6 18 shows the parameter values Figure 6 18 Example Scattered Write Request Data Name Value Data Type Description Scalttered Write Request 4 INT 15 Scattered Write Request 0 141 INT Parameter Number decimal Scattered Request 1 111 INT Parameter Value LSW Scattered write Request 2 o INT Parameter Value MSW Scattered Write Request 3 143 INT Parameter Number decimal Scattered Write Request 4 222 INT Parameter Value LSW Scattered Write Request 5 o INT Parameter Value MSW Scattered Write Request 5 105 INT Parameter Number decimal Scattered Request 7 333 INT Parameter Value LSW Scattered Write Request 8 0 INT Parameter Value MSW Scattered Write Request 3 106 INT Parameter Number decimal Scattered Write Request 10 444 INT Parameter Value LSW Scattered Write Riequest 11 0 INT Parameter Value MSW Scattered Write Riequest 12 107 INT Parameter Number decimal Scattered Write Request 13 555 INT Parameter Value LSW Scattered Write Riequest 14 0 INT Parameter Value MSW ControlLogix Controller Example Scattered Write Response Data The results of the message appear in the destination tag named Scattered Write Response Figure 6 19 Values of 0 indicate no errors occurred Figure 6 19 Example Scattered Write Response Dat
45. 3 INT Parameter Number decimal Scatlered Read Response 4 14 INT Parameter Value LSW Scaltered Read Response 5 INT Parameter Value MSW Scallered Read Response 5 6 INT Parameter Number decimal Scallered Read Response 7 1187 INT Parameter Value LSW Read Response 8 9 INT Parameter Value MSW Scallered Read Response 3 12 INT Parameter Number decimal Scattered Read Response 10 3232 INT Parameter Value LSW Scallered Read Response 11 o INT Parameter Value MSW Scattered Read Response 12 17 INT Parameter Number decimal Scattered_Read_Response 13 2318 INT Parameter Value LSW Scattered Read Response 14 o INT Parameter Value MSW In this message example the parameters have the following values PowerFlex 7 Class Drive Parameter Read Value 1 Output Freq 32 5 Hz 3 Output Current 0 01 Amp 6 Output Voltage 118 7V AC 12 DC Bus Voltage 329 2V DC 17 Analog In2 Value 8 318 mA 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 6 16 Using Explicit Messaging 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P Write Multiple Parameters ControlLogix Controller Example Ladder Logic Program to Write Multiple Parameters Using RSLogix 5000 Software Any Version A Scattered Write message is used to write to multiple parameters This write message example writes the following values to these five paramet
46. 311 are set to 10 Datalink 1 Out will contain the least significant word LSW and Datalink A2 Out will contain the most significant word MSW 32 bit data is stored in binary as follows MSW 2 through 216 LSW 215 through 2 In this example the parameter 10 Elapsed Run Time value of 6553 9 Hrs is read as 6553 9 in Datalink A1 Out Parameter 310 and Datalink A2 Out Parameter 311 Datalink Word Parameter Data Hex A1 Out LSW 10 0003 A2 Out MSW 10 0001 Conversion Example Parameter 010 Elapsed Run Time 6553 9 Hrs MSW 0001 hex 0001 binary 26 65536 LSW 0003hex 3 Engineering Value 65536 3 65539 Parameter 10 Displayed Value 6553 9 Hrs Example Ladder Logic Program Information Using the I O 5 11 Regardless of the Datalink combination Datalink x1 Out will always contain the LSW and Datalink x2 Out will always contain the MSW In the following example the PowerFlex 70 drive parameter 242 Power Up Marker contains a value of 88 4541 hours Datalink Word Parameter Data Hex A2 Out MSW 242 000D B1 Out LSW 242 7F3D Conversion Example Parameter 242 Power Up Marker 88 4541 hours MSW 000Dhex 1101pinary 21 2 8 216 851968 LSW 7F3Dhex 32573 Engineering Value 851968 32573 884541 Parameter 242 Displayed Value 88 4541 Hrs The example ladder logic programs in the sections of this chapter are intended for and operate P
47. 716 Data In C1 MSW N10 15 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 717 718 Data In C2 LSW N10 16 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 717 718 Data In C2 MSW N10 17 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 719 720 Data In D1 LSW N10 18 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 719 720 Data In D1 MSW N10 19 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 721 722 Data In D2 LSW N10 20 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 721 722 Data In D2 MSW 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P Using the Table 5 PLC 5 Data Table Addresses for PowerFlex 7005 Drives with Phase II Control PowerFlex 700L Drives with 700S Control 5 27 Data Table Address Description N9 0 1771 SDN Scanner Status Word see its User Manual for bit definitions N9 1 Logic Status see Appendix D N9 2 Not Used N9 3 Speed Feedback LSW N9 4 Speed Feedback MSW N9 5 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 660 DPI Data Out A1 LSW N9 6 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 660 DPI Data Out A1 MSW N9 7 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 661 DPI Data Out A2 LSW N9 8 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 661 DPI Data Out A2 MSW N9 9 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 662 DPI Data Out B1 LSW N9 10 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 662 DPI Data Out B1 MSW N9 11 Va
48. B2 MSW N10 13 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 655 DPI Data In C1 LSW N10 14 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 655 DPI Data In C1 MSW N10 15 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 656 DPI Data In C2 LSW N10 16 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 656 DPI Data In C2 MSW N10 17 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 657 DPI Data In D1 LSW N10 18 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 657 DPI Data In D1 MSW N10 19 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 658 DPI Data In D2 LSW N10 20 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 658 DPI Data In D2 MSW 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 5 28 Using the I O 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P Table 5 K PLC 5 Data Table Addresses for PowerFlex 750 Series Drives Data Table Address Description N9 0 1771 SDN Scanner Status Word see its User Manual for bit definitions N9 1 Logic Status see Appendix D N9 2 Not Used N9 3 Speed Feedback LSW N9 4 Speed Feedback MSW N9 5 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 905 Data Out A1 LSW N9 6 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 905 Data Out A1 MSW N9 7 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 906 Data Out A2 LSW N9 8 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 906 Data Out A2 MSW N9 9 Value of para
49. B3 20 N10 1 Jj E y zm 1 1 Command Jog DriveJog B3 20 N10 1 i C x e 2 2 2 Command Clear Faults Drive Clear Faults B3 20 N10 1 JE f zi 2 3 3 B3 20 N10 1 JE cs 3E M 4 4 B3 20 N10 1 Mt ae 4 5 SpeedReferee MOV Move Source N30 2 0 lt Dest N10 2 0 lt 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 5 32 Using the I O SLC 500 Controller Example Creating an RSLogix 500 Project Version 7 20 or Later 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P To transmit read and write data between the controller and drive you must create discrete I O instructions in the controller for Logic Command Status Reference Feedback and Datalinks Also COP instructions must be included in the ladder logic program to convert the default memory addresses in Configuring the I O Chapter 4 to data table addresses 1 Start RSLogix 500 software The RSLogix 500 window appears 2 Select File gt New to display the Select Processor Type screen Select Processor Type Processor EXAMPLE 1747 1553 5 05 05501 Series 1747 L552B C 5705 Series 1747 L551B C 5 05 Series 1747 1553 5705 1747 1552 5405 1747 1551 5405 1747 1553 5405 1747 1552 5405 1747 1551 5405 1747 L543C 5 04 1747 L542C 5 04 1747 L541C 5 04 1747 1543 5 04 1747 15426 5 04 Series Series Series Communication settings Driver Processor Node
50. BYTE 8 bit integer 011 WORD 16 bit integer 100 DWORD 32 bit integer 101 TCHAR 8 bit not unicode or 16 bits unicode 110 REAL 32 bit floating point value 111 Use bits 16 17 18 3 Sign Type 0 Unsigned 1 Signed 4 Hidden 0 Visible 1 Hidden 5 Not a Link Sink 0 Parameter can sink a link 1 Parameter cannot sink a link 6 Not Recallable 0 Recallable from NVS 1 Not Recallable from NVS 7 ENUM 0 No ENUM text 1 ENUM text 8 Writable 0 Read only 1 Read write 9 Not Writable When Enabled 0 Writable when enabled for example drive running 1 Not writable when enabled 10 Instance 0 Parameter value is not a Reference to another parameter 1 Parameter value refers to another parameter 11 Reserved Must be zero 12 Decimal Place Bit 0 Number of digits to the right of the decimal point 13 Decimal Place Bit 1 0000 0 14 Decimal Place Bit 2 1111 15 15 Decimal Place Bit 3 16 Extended Data Type Bit 1 Right bit is least significant bit 16 ki eee ol SOR d array of Boolean n 18 Extended Data Bit 3 010 Reserved y 011 Reserved 100 Reserved 101 Reserved 110 Reserved 111 Reserved 19 Parameter Exists Used to mark parameters that are not available to network tools 20 Not Used Reserved 21 Formula Links Indicates the Formula Data is derived from other parameters 22 Access Level Bit 1 A 3 bit field used to control access to parameter data 23 Acces
51. Control the connected drive via the adapter by using I O e Monitor or configure the drive using explicit messages Chapter 2 Installing the Adapter This chapter provides instructions for installing the adapter in a PowerFlex 7 Class drive The 20 COMM D Series B adapter firmware revision 2 xxx or later can also be installed in a DPI External Comms Kit In this case see Chapter 8 or the 20 XCOMM DC BASE Installation Instructions publication 20COMM INOOI supplied with the kit Topic Page Preparing for an Installation 2 1 Setting the Node Address Switches 2 2 Setting the Data Rate Switch 2 3 Connecting the Adapter to the Drive 2 4 Connecting the Adapter to the Network 2 7 Applying Power 2 8 Commissioning the Adapter 2 10 Preparing for an Installation Before installing the adapter do the following e Read the DeviceNet Media Design and Installation Guide publication DNET UM072 e Read the DeviceNet Starter Kit User Manual publication DNET UMO003 e Verify that you have all required equipment See Required Equipment on page 1 3 ATTENTION Risk of equipment damage exists The adapter AN contains electrostatic discharge ESD sensitive parts that can be damaged if you do not follow ESD control procedures Static control precautions are required when handling the adapter If you are unfamiliar with static control procedures see Guarding Against Electrostatic Damage publicati
52. DPI product and does not change the Reference value Class Attributes Not supported Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access Data Type Description 1 Get Bad Flag BOOL If set to 1 then attribute 4 may contain invalid data 0 good 1 bad 2 Get Direction BOOL Direction of data transfer 0 Producer Register drive to network 1 Consumer Register network to drive 3 Get Size UINT Size of register data in bits 4 Conditional Data ARRAY of BITS __ Data to be transferred 1 For this attribute the Access Rule is Get if Direction 0 The Access Rule is Set if Direction 1 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P Important Setting a Register object attribute can only be done through a connection with a non zero expected packet rate EPR This feature prevents accidental control of a DPI device Parameter Object DeviceNet Objects C 5 Class Code Hexadecimal Decimal OxOF 15 Important This object is not supported when the adapter is used with a PowerFlex 750 Series drive Services Service Code Implemented for Service Name Class Instance 0x01 No Yes Get Attributes All 0x05 Yes No Reset Ox0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single 0x15 Yes No Restore Request 0x16 Yes No Save Request 0x4B No Yes Get_Enum_String Instances The number of instances depends on the number of paramete
53. Datalink In B1 Drive Output Image 5 1 INT Datalink In B2 Drive Output Image 5 200 INT Datalink In C1 Drive Output Image 7 300 INT Datalink In C2 Drive Output Image 8 400 INT Datalink In D1 Drive Output Image S 500 INT Datalink In D2 Creating Ladder Logic with Descriptive Tags Using RSLogix 5000 Software Version 13 00 or Later If the DeviceNet Tag Generator was used in Chapter 4 to automatically create descriptive controller tags for the entire I O image these tags can be used to directly control and monitor the drive without creating any ladder logic program However if you intend to use Human Machine Interface devices PanelView and so forth to operate the drive and view its status you will need to create descriptive Program tags Figure 5 9 and a ladder logic program that will pass the Controller tag data to the Program tags gt TIP If the descriptive controller tags created by the DeviceNet Tag Generator are not properly named the correct EDS file may not have been used The DeviceNet Tag Generator will only create correct tag names if the EDS file being used is downloaded from the website see Downloading the EDS File from Rockwell Automation Website on page 4 8 not created from the network Figure 5 9 ControlLogix Descriptive Program Tags for Example Ladder Logic Program Name Decimal Command Forward Reverse Decimal Command Jog Decimal Command Start Decimal Command Stop Decimal
54. DeviceNet Scanner Allen Bradley My DeviceNet Scanner Input Size Output Size Status Size Slot 3 ii 2 s Electronic Keying Compatible Keying x Open Module Properties Cancel Help 9 Edit the following Box Name Setting A name to identify the DeviceNet scanner Description Optional description of the DeviceNet scanner Node The node address of the DeviceNet scanner Slot The slot of the DeviceNet scanner in the rack Revision The minor revision of the firmware in the DeviceNet scanner You already set the major revision by selecting the scanner series in step 7 Electronic Keying Compatible Keying The Compatible Keying setting for Electronic Keying ensures the physical module is consistent with the software configuration before the controller and scanner make a connection Therefore be sure that you have set the correct revision in this screen See the online Help for additional information on this and other Electronic Keying settings Input Size The size of the input data for the DeviceNet scanner We recommend using the default value of 124 Output Size The size of the output data for the DeviceNet scanner We recommend using the default value of 123 Status Size The size of the status data for the DeviceNet scanner We recommend using the default value of 32 Open Module Properties 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapt
55. EN Message Control Scattered Read Message CDND CER2 gt TIP The MOV Move and COP Copy instructions are required to convert the data into the necessary data types and to align the data into a usable display format 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 6 14 Using Explicit Messaging ControlLogix Controller Formatting a Message to Read Multiple Parameters Using RSLogix 5000 Software Any Version Figure 6 13 Scattered Read Message Configuration Screens Message Configuration Scattered_Read_Message Configuration Communication Tag Name Configuration Communication Tag Scattered_Read_Message Message Configuration Scattered_Read_Message Path My DeviceNet Bridge 2 1 Message Configuration Scattered Read Message Configuration Communication Tag Service Type Service Code Instance 0 Enable Emor Code CIP Generic Custom Hex Class Attribute Enable Waiting Q Stat Extended Eror Code Eror Path Eror Text Source Element Source Length 31 Destination Done zi Scattered Read Rec v Bytes Scattered_Read_Re v New Tag Done Length 29 Timed Out Cancel The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to configure a message to read m
56. False 1 True Bit 1 Supports ENUMs Bit 2 Supports scaling Bit 3 Supports scaling links Bit 4 Read only Bit 5 Monitor Bit 6 Extended precision scaling 5 Get Data Type USINT 1 WORD 16 bit 2 UINT 16 bit 3 INT 16 bit 5 SINT 6 DINT 8 USINT 9 UDINT 11 REAL 23 SHORT STRING 24 BYTE 25 DWORD 6 Get Data Size USINT 3 7 Get Parameter Name String SHORT STRING 8 Get Units String SHORT STRING 9 Get Help String SHORT STRING Null string 10 Get Minimum Value e 3 11 Get Maximum Value 2 3 12 Get Default Value e 3 13 Get Scaling Multiplier UINT 3 14 Get Scaling Divisor UINT 3 15 Get Scaling Base UINT 3 16 Get Scaling Offset UINT 3 17 Get Multiplier Link UINT 3 18 Get Divisor Link UINT 3 19 Get Base Link UINT 3 20 Get Offset Link UINT 3 21 Get Decimal Precision USINT 3 2 3 4 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 1 Access rule is defined in Bit 4 of instance attribute 4 0 Get Set 1 Get Specified in descriptor data type and data size Value varies based on parameter instance Refer to the DeviceNet specification for a description of the link path DeviceNet Objects C 7 Parameter Group Object Class Code Hexadecimal Decimal 0x10 16 Important This object is not supported when the adapter is used with a PowerFlex 750 Series drive Services Service C
57. Input XXXX XXXX XXX1 1111 26 M S Output XXXX XXXX XXX1 1111 2 Reset the adapter see Resetting the Adapter on page 3 12 or power cycle the drive The drive speed reference and Datalink parameter values and the adapter setup parameters for this example are shown below Drive Parameter 90 Speed Ref A Sel Setting 1 22 DPI Port 5 Configuring the I O 4 21 300 Data In A1 301 Data In A2 302 Data In B1 303 Data In B2 304 Data In C1 305 Data In C2 140 Accel Time 1 142 Decel Time 1 100 Jog Speed 155 Stop Mode A 101 Preset Speed 1 102 Preset Speed 2 306 Data In D1 103 Preset Speed 3 307 Data In D2 104 Preset Speed 4 310 Data Out A1 140 Accel Time 1 311 Data Out A2 142 Decel Time 1 312 Data Out B1 100 Jog Speed 313 Data Out B2 155 Stop Mode A 314 Data Out C1 101 Preset Speed 1 315 Data Out C2 102 Preset Speed 2 316 Data Out D1 103 Preset Speed 3 317 Data Out D2 104 Preset Speed 4 1 Since the PowerFlex 70 EC drive uses 16 bit Datalinks two contiguous Datalinks for example Data Out A1 A2 are required when assigning a 32 bit parameter such as Parameter 003 Output Current For drives with 32 bit Datalinks only one Datalink is required Use RSNetWorx for DeviceNet to Configure and Save the to the Control
58. MSW N10 0 Logic Command see Appendix D N10 1 Not Used N10 2 Speed Reference LSW N10 3 Speed Reference MSW N10 4 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 651 DPI Data In A1 LSW N10 5 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 651 DPI Data In A1 MSW N10 6 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 652 DPI Data In A2 LSW N10 7 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 652 DPI Data In A2 MSW N10 8 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 653 DPI Data In B1 LSW N10 9 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 653 DPI Data In B1 MSW N10 10 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 654 DPI Data In B2 LSW N10 11 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 654 DPI Data In B2 MSW N10 12 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 655 DPI Data In C1 LSW N10 13 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 655 DPI Data In C1 MSW N10 14 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 656 DPI Data In C2 LSW N10 15 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 656 DPI Data In C2 MSW N10 16 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 657 DPI Data In D1 LSW N10 17 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 657 DPI Data In D1 MSW N10 18 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 658 DPI Data In D2 LSW N10 19 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 658 DPI Data In D2 MSW 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 5 40 Using the I O 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P Table 5 5 SLC 500 Dat
59. MSW N10 15 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 616 Data In D1 LSW N10 16 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 616 Data In D1 MSW N10 17 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 617 Data In D2 LSW N10 18 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 617 Data In D2 MSW 5 29 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 5 30 Using the I O 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P With any drive you can use the controller data table addresses to directly control and monitor the drive without creating any ladder logic program However if you intend to use Human Machine Interface devices PanelView and so forth to operate the drive and view its status you will need to create descriptive controller data table addresses Table 5 M and Table 5 N and a ladder logic program that will pass that data to the data table addresses used for messaging Table 5 M PLC 5 and Program Data Table Address Descriptions for Example Logic Status Feedback Ladder Logic Program PLC 5 Data Program Data Description Table Address Description Table Address Drive Ready N9 1 0 Status Ready B3 1 0 Drive Active N9 1 1 Status Active B3 1 1 Actual Direction N9 1 8 Status Forward B3 1 8 Actual Direction XIC N9 1 3 Status Reverse B3 1 4 Drive Faulted N9 1 7 Status Faulted B3 1 7 Drive At Speed N9 1 8 Status At Speed B3 1 8 Speed Feedback N9 2 Speed Feedback N20 2
60. N30 71 is shown as 2 For PowerFlex 7005 or PowerFlex 750 Series drives if some of the parameters being read are floating point REAL data types see the Communications section in Chapter 1 of the PowerFlex 7005 AC Drives Phase Control Reference Manual publication PFLEX RMO003 on how to manipulate REAL data into a proper Float tag Figure 6 47 Example Scattered Read COP Response Data File Data File N30 hex N30 90 0 100 0 FFFF FFFF 7FFF 0 1 384 0 3 9 CA7 0 11 207E 0 1 1000 1910 210 FFFF N30 70 Radix Hex BCD xi 6 4144 DDFS FEFF FFFF Y Eis Columns 10 Desc Response Data for Explicit Message N30 Properties Usage SLC 500 Controller Example COP Message to Write Multiple Parameters A scattered write message is used to write values to multiple parameters Values for up to 8 parameters can be written This write message example writes the following values to these five parameters PowerFlex 7 Class Drive Parameter 141 Accel Time 2 Write Value 11 1 Sec 143 Decel Time 2 22 2 Sec 105 Preset Speed 5 33 3 Hz 106 Preset Speed 6 444 Hz 107 Preset Speed 7 55 5 Hz Using Explicit Messaging 6 43 Table 6 V Example Scattered Write COP Request Data Value Address Hex Dec Description N30
61. No Alarm Par 1380 1 Alarm x Fault 0 No Fault Par 1351 1 Fault X At Speed 0 Not At Reference 1 At Reference Local Control 000 Port 0 TB 001 Port 1 010 Port 2 011 Port 3 100 Port 4 101 Port 5 110 Reserved 111 No Local 1 See Owners in drive User Manual for further information 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P Reference Source 0000 Spd Ref A Auto Par 44 0001 Spd Ref B Auto Par 48 0010 Preset Spd 2 Auto 0011 Preset Spd 3 Auto 0100 Preset Spd 4 Auto 0101 Preset Spd 5 Auto 0110 Preset Spd 6 Auto 0111 Preset Spd 7 Auto 1000 Term Blk Manual 1001 DPI 1 Manual 1010 DPI 2 Manual 1011 DPI 3 Manual 1100 DPI 4 Manual 1101 DPI 5 Manual 1110 Reserved 1111 Ref M S Input Parameter Configurations Appendix E Master Slave I O Configuration This appendix lists possible I O configurations with corresponding M S Input and M S Output parameter settings and the required data size allocations for all data exchange methods except Polled The required data size allocation tables for the Polled data exchange method are listed below Polled Data Exchange Method Tables Controller Table 4 A Table 4 B or Table 4 C ControlLogix Table 4 E Table 4 F or Table 4 G PLC 5 Table 4 H Table 4 1 or Table 4 J SLC 500 Param
62. Preset Speed 1 305 Data In C2 102 Points to Par 102 Preset Speed 2 306 Data In D1 103 Points to Par 103 Preset Speed 3 307 Data In D2 104 Points to Par 104 Preset Speed 4 310 Data Out A1 140 Points to Par 140 Accel Time 1 311 Data Out A2 142 Points to Par 142 Decel Time 1 312 Data Out B1 100 Points to Par 100 Jog Speed 313 Data Out B2 155 Points to Par 155 Stop Mode A 314 Data Out C1 101 Points to Par 101 Preset Speed 1 315 Data Out C2 102 Points to Par 102 Preset Speed 2 316 Data Out D1 103 Points to Par 103 Preset Speed 3 317 Data Out D2 104 Points to Par 104 Preset Speed 4 4 15 TIP Data In parameters are inputs into the drive that come from controller outputs for example data to write to a drive parameter Data Out parameters are outputs from the drive that go to controller inputs for example data to read a drive parameter In the RSNetWorx for DeviceNet graph view window right click the PowerFlex 70 EC drive icon and choose Properties to display the drive s properties screen 25 PowerFlex 70 240V 4 24 General Parameters 1 0 Data EDS Fie PowerFlex 70 EC 240 4 24 PowerFlex 70 EC 240 4 24 Description Address 1 Device Identity Primary Vendor Rockwell Automation Allen Bradley 1 Type DPI to DeviceNet 121 Device PowerFlex 70 EC 240v 4 24 818 Cat
63. Reserved 01111 Reserved 10000 Man Port 0 10001 Man Port 1 10010 Man Port 2 10011 Man Port 3 10100 Man Port 4 10101 Man Port 5 10110 Man Port 6 10111 Reserved 11000 Reserved 11001 Reserved 11010 Reserved 11011 Reserved 11100 Reserved 11101 Man Port 13 Emb ENET 11110 Man Port 14 Drive Logix 11111 Alternate Man Ref Sel 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P Reserved PowerFlex Digital DC Drives Logic Command Word Logic Command Status Words D 7 Logic Bits 15 14 13 12 11 1109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Command Description Stop 0 Not Stop 1 Stop X Start 0 Not Start 1 Start x Jog 0 Not Jog Par 266 1 X Clear Faults 0 Not Clear Faults 1 Clear Faults X x Direction 00 No Command 01 Forward Command 10 Reverse Command 11 Hold Direction Control Local Control 0 No Local Control 1 Local Control MOP Increment 0 Not Increment 1 Increment X X Accel Rate 00 No Command 01 Use Accel Rate 1 Par 660 10 Use Accel Rate 2 Par 24 11 Use Present Time X Decel Rate 00 No Command 01 Use Decel Rate 1 Par 662 10 Use Decel Rate 2 Par 32 11 Use Present Time Reference Select 000 No Command 001 Ref 1 Spd Ref A Par 44 010 Ref 2 Spd Ref B Par 48 011 Ref 3 Preset
64. Spd 3 Par 156 100 Ref 4 Preset Spd 4 Par 157 101 Ref 5 Preset Spd 5 Par 158 110 Ref 6 Preset Spd 6 Par 159 111 Ref 7 Preset Spd 7 Par 160 MOP Decrement 0 Not Decrement 1 Decrement 0 Stop condition logic 0 must first be present before 1 Start condition will start the drive The Start command acts as momentary Start command A 1 will start the drive but returning to 0 will not stop the drive This Start will not function if a digital input parameters 133 144 is programmed for 2 Wire Control option 5 Run 6 Run Forward or 7 Run Reverse 9 This Reference Select will not function if a digital input parameters 133 144 is programmed for Speed Sel 1 2 or 3 option 17 18 or 19 Note that Reference Select is Exclusive Ownership see drive User Manual for more information 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 8 Logic Command Status Words Logic Status Word Logic Bits 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Status Description Ready 0 Not Ready Par 1403 1 Ready X Active 0 Not Active Running 1 Active X Command 0 Reverse Direction 1 Forward X Actual Direction 0 Reverse 1 Forward X Accel 0 Not Accelerating 1 Accelerating X Decel 0 Not Decelerating 1 Decelerating x Alarm 0
65. Speed Feedback Decimal _ Speed_Reference Decimal Eg Status Active Decimal Status At Speed Decimal Status Faulkted Decimal Status Forward Decimal Status Ready Decimal Status Reverse Decimal 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P Using the 5 17 An example ladder logic program that uses the automatically created descriptive Controller tags and passes their data to the user defined Program tags is shown in Figure 5 10 and Figure 5 11 Note that the prefix for the drive Controller tags is determined by the name assigned when configuring the I O Chapter 4 Figure 5 10 ControlLogix Example Ladder Logic Program with Descriptive Controller Tags for Logic Status Feedback My_DeviceNet_Bridge_NO1_POL_I Ready Status_Ready My_DeviceNet_Bridge_NO1_POL_ Active Status_Active JE My DeviceNet Bridge NO1 POL l ActualDir Status Forward 1E My_DeviceNet_Bridge_N01_POL_l ActualDir Status_Reverse My_DeviceNet_Bridge_NO1_POL_ Faulted Status_Faulted My_DeviceNet_Bridge_N01_POL_ AtSpeed Status_At_Speed MOV Move Source My DeviceNet Bridge NO1 POL l Feedback O Dest Speed_Feedback O Figure 5 11 ControlLogix Example Ladder Logic Program with Descriptive Controller Tags for Logic Command Reference Command_Stop My_DeviceNet_Bridge_N01_POL_O Stop JE Command_Start My DeviceNet Bridge NO1 POL O Start ane Command_Jog My_Dev
66. Strobed T Change of State Cyclic Input Size Bytes 9 r Input Size Polled Dutput Size Input Size 4 i Bytes Heartbeat Rate Output Size 4 z Bytes PollRate Ever Scan Cancel Restore 1 0 Sizes Select the type of data exchange Polled Change of State and or Cyclic For this example we selected and recommend Polled 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 4 28 Configuring the I O For the Input Size and Output Size boxes use the pull down menus to choose the number of bytes that are required for your I O The size will depend on the drive s Reference Feedback and the number of Datalinks used in your I O enabled with adapter Parameter 13 DPI I O Cfg and the selected data exchange method A 16 bit word is two bytes and a 32 bit word is four bytes For this example an Input Size of 20 and an Output Size of 20 are used Important Make sure that the bits for Parameters 25 M S Input and 26 M S Output are set to match Parameter 13 DPI I O Cfg See Setting a Master Slave Hierarchy Scanner to Drive Communication on page 3 5 for details Table 4 E Table 4 F or Table 4 G list the number of bytes required for the Input Size and Output Size boxes for specific I O configurations and only the Polled data exchange method For Input Sizes and Output Sizes for other data exchange methods and specific I O configurations see the tabl
67. access the adapter to view and edit its parameters The following tools can be used to access the adapter parameters Tool PowerFlex 7 Class HIM See page 3 2 Connected Components Workbench software version 1 02 or later http www ab com support abdrives webupdate software html or online help installed with the software DriveExplorer software version 2 01 or later http Avww ab com drives driveexplorer or DriveExplorer online help installed with the software DriveExecutive software version 3 01 or later http Avww ab com drives drivetools or DriveExecutive online help installed with the software 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 3 2 Configuring the Adapter Using the PowerFlex 7 Class If your drive has either an LED or LCD HIM Human Interface Module it HIM to Access Parameters can be used to access parameters in the adapter as shown below We recommend that you read through the steps for your HIM before performing the sequence For additional information see the drive documentation or the PowerFlex 7 Class HIM Quick Reference publication 20HIM QRO01 Using an LED HIM Step Example Screens 1 Press the key and then the Device Sel key to display the Device Screen 2 Press the or key to scroll to the adapter Letters represent files in the drive and numbers represent 5 LIL ports The adapter is usually connected to p
68. adapter provides many options for configuring and using I O including the following e Configuring the size of I O by enabling or disabling the Logic Command Reference and Datalinks e Setting a Master Slave hierarchy or a Peer to Peer hierarchy e Using a Change of State Cyclic or Polled data exchange method Chapter 3 Configuring the Adapter and Chapter 4 Configuring the I O discuss how to configure the adapter and controller on the network for these options The defines the different options This chapter discusses how to use I O after you have configured the adapter and controller 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 5 2 Using the I O Understanding the I O Image The terms input and output are defined from the controller s point of 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P view Therefore output I O is data that is produced by the controller and consumed by the adapter Input I O is status data that is produced by the adapter and consumed as input by the controller The I O image will vary based on the following e Size either 16 bit or 32 bit of the Reference Feedback words and Datalink words used by the drive To determine the size of the Reference Feedback and Datalinks view adapter Parameters 07 Ref Fdbk Size and 08 Datalink Size For information to access parameters see Using the PowerFlex 7 Class HIM to Access Parameters on
69. as a set of objects that all represent the same kind of system component A class is a generalization of an object All objects in a class are identical in form and behavior but may contain different attribute values Connected Components Workbench Software The recommended tool for monitoring and configuring Allen Bradley products and network communication adapters It can be used on computers running various Microsoft operating systems You can obtain a free copy of Connect Components Workbench software at http www ab com support abdrives webupdate software html ControlFLASH A free software tool used to electronically update firmware of Allen Bradley products and network communication adapters ControlFLASH software is downloaded automatically when the firmware revision file for the product being updated is downloaded from the Allen Bradley updates website to your computer Controller A controller also called programmable logic controller is a solid state control system that has a user programmable memory for storage of instructions to implement specific functions such as I O control logic timing counting report generation communication arithmetic and data file manipulation A controller consists of a central processor input output interface and memory See also Scanner Cyclic I O Data Exchange A device configured for Cyclic I O data exchange transmits data at a user configured interval This type of exchange
70. bit integer the tag Data Type field must be set to INT When using a PowerFlex 7005 drive Output Current is a floating point number requiring the Data Type field to be set to REAL when creating the controller tag See the drive documentation to determine the size of the parameter and its data type 16 bit or 32 bit integer or REAL 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 6 6 Using Explicit Messaging 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P ControlLogix Controller Example Ladder Logic Program to Read a Single Parameter Using RSLogix 5000 Software Any Version A Get Attribute Single message is used to read a single parameter This read message example reads the value of parameter 003 Output Current in a PowerFlex 7 Class drive See DPI Parameter Object on page C 13 Class Code 0x93 for parameter numbering Important See Table 6 A on page 6 2 for limitations of PowerFlex 7 Class and PowerFlex 750 Series drives when using DPI Parameter Class code 0x93 for explicit messaging Table 6 C Example Controller Tags to Read a Single Parameter Operand Controller Tags for Single Read Message Data Type XIC Execute_Single_Read_Message BOOL MSG Single_Read_Message MESSAGE Figure 6 4 Example Ladder Logic to Read a Single Parameter Execute Single Read Message MSG JE Message CEN Message Control Single Read Message CDN gt FHCER2
71. eaten C 3 Register Object iso ees eet ONU ET id C 4 Parameter Object eer REED VERDE I tei e e e C 5 Parameter Group Object o ccecce ecer rrendiet niee e enn ene e eens C 7 PCCC ODJect Sty ets hands rag lianas DUST UV QURE M C 8 DPI Device Object m ririt SERS PPLE Se See S C 11 DPI Parameter Object re ute EUER PNA E A EE C 13 DPI Fault Object a iso deep eem RR e e E ou Me ees C 17 DPI Alarm Objects eom bI aint BS ates Saheb Get ghee ees C 19 DPI Diagnostic tte wea ine Eine SE aw Ern ana C 21 DPE Time Object i eet ER ead Ube ee adele RENE C 22 Logic Command Status Words PowerFlex 70 700 700H and 700L with 700 Control 5 D 1 PowerFlex 7005 Phase II Control 700L with 700S Control Drives D 3 PowerFlex 750 Senes Drives coari por sao ERa E eee A ER a D 5 PowerFlex Digital DC Drives 0 0 0 eee een eens D 7 Master Slave I O Configuration M S Input Parameter Configurations 0 0 0 2 cece e E 1 M S Output Parameter Configurations 0 0 eee cence eee E 4 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P iv Table of Contents 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P Conventions Used in This Manual Preface About This Manual Topic Page Additional Resources P 2 Rockwell Automation Support P 2 Conventio
72. for all CMDs EXT_STS USINT Extended status not used for all CMDs ARRAY of CMD FNC specific parameters PCCC_ ARRAY of CMD FNC specific result data params USINT results USINT The adapter supports the following PCCC command types CMD FNC Description 0x06 10 03 Identify host and some status OxO0F 0x67 PLC 5 typed write Ox0F 0x68 PLC 5 typed read Ox0F 0x95 Encapsulate other protocol Ox0F 0 2 SLC 500 protected typed read with 3 address fields Ox0F OxAA SLC 500 protected typed write with address fields OxOF 10x00 Word range read Ox0F 0x01 range write For more information regarding PCCC commands see DF1 Protocol and Command Set Manual publication 1770 6 5 16 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P C 10 DeviceNet Objects N Files N File Description N41 This N file lets you read and write control I O messages You can write control I O messages only when all of the following conditions are true e The adapter is not receiving I O from a scanner For example there is no scanner on the network the scanner is in idle program mode the scanner is faulted or the adapter is not mapped to the scanner e The adapter is not receiving Peer I O from another adapter e The value of N42 3 is set to a non zero value Write Read N41 0 Logic Command Word Logic Status Word N41 1 Reference least significant word Feed
73. injury or death Remove power from the drive and then verify power has been discharged before installing or removing the adapter Remove power from the network and drive Use static control precautions Connect one end of a DeviceNet cable to the network We recommend DeviceNet Thin cable with an outside diameter of 6 9 mm 0 27 in Important Maximum cable length depends on the data rate For details see Data Rate in the Glossary Route the other end of the DeviceNet cable through the bottom of the drive Figure 2 4 and connect its wires to the 5 pin linear plug shipped with the adapter See Figure 2 5 for wiring details Figure 2 5 Connecting the 5 Pin Linear Plug to the DeviceNet Cable Terminal Color Signal Function 5 Red V Power Supply 4 White CAN H Signal High 3 Bare SHIELD Shield 2 Blue CAN_L Signal Low 1 Black V Common Insert the DeviceNet cable plug into the mating adapter connector and secure it with the two screws Verify that the colors of the wires on the plug match the color codes on the connector 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 2 8 Installing the Adapter Applying Power ATTENTION Risk of equipment damage injury or death exists Unpredictable operation may occur if you fail to verify that parameter settings are compatible with your application Verify that settings are compatible with your appli
74. must first be present before a 1 1 Jog 2 condition will jog the drive A transition to 0 will stop the drive 9 To perform this command the value must switch from 0 to 1 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P D 6 Logic Command Status Words Logic Bits Logic Status Word 31 15 14 13 12 Command x Run Ready Description 0 Not Ready to Run Par 933 1 Ready to Run Active 0 Not Active 1 Active Command Direction 0 Reverse 1 Forward Actual Direction 0 Reverse 1 Forward Accelerating 0 Not Accelerating 1 Accelerating Decelerating 0 Not Decelerating 1 Decelerating Alarm 0 No Alarm Par 959 and 960 1 Alarm Fault 0 No Fault Par 952 and 953 1 Fault At Setpt Spd 0 Not at Setpoint Speed 1 At Setpoint Speed Manual 0 Manual Mode Not Active 1 Manual Mode Active Spd Ref ID 0 Spd Ref ID 1 Spd Ref ID 2 Spd Ref ID 3 Spd Ref ID 4 00000 Reserved 00001 Auto Ref A Par 545 00010 Auto Ref B Par 550 00011 Auto Preset Speed 3 Par 573 00100 Auto Preset Speed 4 Par 574 00101 Auto Preset Speed 5 Par 575 00110 Auto Preset Speed 6 Par 576 00111 Auto Preset Speed 7 Par 577 01000 Reserved 01001 Reserved 01010 Reserved 01011 Reserved 01100 Reserved 01101 Reserved 01110
75. new name 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 4 2 Configuring the I O ControlLogix Controller Example gt 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 8 Click OK The Configure Drivers screen reappears with the new driver in the Configured Drivers list Configure Drivers Available Driver Types DeviceNet Drivers 1784 PCD PCIDS 1770 KFD SDNPT drivers v Add New Configured Drivers Name and Description Status DeviceNet MAC ID 62 Baud Rate 1 25k RUNNING Running 9 Click Close to close the Configure Drivers screen 10 Keep RSLinx running and verify that your computer recognizes the drive a Select Communications gt RSWho b In the menu tree click next to the DeviceNet driver After the adapter is configured the connected drive and adapter will be a single node on the network This section provides the steps needed to configure a simple DeviceNet network see Figure 4 1 In our example we will configure a ControlLogix controller with 1756 DNB scanner to communicate with a drive using Logic Command Status Reference Feedback and 16 Datalinks 8 to read and 8 to write over the network Figure 4 1 Example ControlLogix Controller DeviceNet Network Node 62 Node 1 Computer with Node 0 PowerFlex 70 Drive with DeviceNet Connection ControlLogix Controller 20 COMM D Adapter with 1756 DNB Scanner
76. of status data produced by the adapter and consumed by the controller PowerFlex 750 Series drives have a 32 bit Logic Command Status but when using a 20 COMM D adapter only the first 16 bits can be used This manual contains the bit definitions for most compatible products available at the time of publication in Appendix D Logic Command Status Words For other products see their documentation Using Reference Feedback The Reference is produced by the controller and consumed by the adapter The Feedback is produced by the adapter and consumed by the controller The size of the Reference Feedback is determined by the drive and can be displayed with adapter Parameter 07 Ref Fdbk Size Size Valid Values 16 bit 92768 32767 32 bit 2147483648 2147483647 When the Reference and Feedback are enabled and a ControlLogix controller is used specific controller tags are automatically created sized 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P Using the I O 5 7 16 bit or 32 bit and placed in the I O image If the DeviceNet Tag Generator was used the generic non descriptive tag names were replaced with descriptive tag names PowerFlex 70 700 700H and PowerFlex 700L Drives with 700 Control The Reference Feedback value is a scaled engineering value it is not in Hertz or RPM The Reference uses a 32767 scale The 32767 endpoint of the scale is equal to the value of drive parameter 55
77. or Cyclic For this example we selected and recommend Polled For the Input Size and Output Size boxes use the pull down menus to choose the number of bytes that are required for your I O The size will depend on the drive s Reference Feedback and the number of Datalinks used in your I O enabled with adapter Parameter 13 DPI I O Cfg and the selected data exchange method A 16 bit word is two bytes and a 32 bit word is four bytes For this example an Input Size of 20 and an Output Size of 20 are used Important Make sure that the bits for Parameters 25 M S Input and 26 M S Output are set to match Parameter 13 DPI I O Cfg See Setting a Master Slave Hierarchy Scanner to Drive Communication on page 3 5 for details Table 4 H Table 4 I or Table 4 J list the number of bytes required for the Input Size and Output Size boxes for specific I O configurations and only the Polled data exchange method For Input Sizes and Output Sizes for other data exchange methods and specific I O configurations see the tables in Appendix E Table 4 H Drives with 16 bit Reference Feedback and 16 bit Datalinks These products include the following e PowerFlex 70 drives with standard or enhanced control e PowerFlex 700 drives with standard control e PowerFlex 700H drives Configuring the I O 4 39 e SMC Flex smart motor controllers e SMC 50 smart motor controllers
78. the icon for a PowerFlex 70 EC drive 8 Inthe graph view window right click the 1771 SDN icon and choose Properties to display its properties screen 2 1771 SDN Scanner Module General Module Scaniist Input Output Summary i 1771 SDN Scanner Module Name fi 771 5DN Scanner Module Address 0 i Device Identity Primary Vendor Rockwell Automation Allen Bradley 1 Type Communication Adapter 12 Device 1771 SDN Scanner Module 5 1771 SDN Scanner Module 3 004 9 Click the Module tab to display the Scanner Configuration Applet screen 10 Click Upload to upload the 1771 SDN configuration to the RSNetWorx for DeviceNet project The 1771 SDN Module Tab screen appears 1771 SDN Scanner Module General Module Scanist Input Output Summary Channel A Upload from Scanner Interscan Delay 10 3 msec Download to Scanner Bacood Pol Rato 2 Modue Defauts 1771 SDN 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 4 26 Configuring the I O 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P Edit the following Box Setting Channel Selects the scanner channel to which the DeviceNet network is connected For this example Channel A is selected Interscan Sets the scanner time delay between consecutive I O scans on the Delay network For this example we recommend using the default setting of 10 mi
79. the kit e PowerFlex 750 Series drive see the 20 750 20COMM and 20 750 20COMM F1 Communication Carrier Cards Installation Instructions publication 750COM INOO1 supplied with the card 4 Apply power to the adapter Chapter 2 a Verify that the adapter is installed correctly Installing the Adapter The adapter receives power from the drive b Apply power to the drive The status indicators should be green If they flash red there is a problem See Chapter 7 Troubleshooting c Configure and verify key drive parameters 5 Configure the adapter for your application Chapter 3 Set adapter parameters for the following functions as required by Configuring the Adapter your application e Node address and data rate when Data Rate switch is set to O configuration e Change of State Cyclic or Polled I O data exchange Master Slave or Peer to Peer hierarchy e Fault actions 6 Configure the controller to communicate with the adapter Chapter 4 T Configuring the Use configuration tools such as RSNetWorx for DeviceNet software and RSLogix software to configure the master on the network to recognize the adapter and drive 7 Create a ladder logic program Chapter 5 Use a controller configuration tool such as RSLogix software to using the HO create a ladder logic program that enables you to do the Chapter 6 following Using Explicit Messaging 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P
80. the path or type in the name of the device listed in the I O Configuration folder 4 n this example Accel Time 1 is a 16 bit integer parameter requiring the tag Data Type field to be set to INT when creating the controller tag If the parameter being written to is a 32 bit integer the tag Data Type field must be set to DINT Also the Source Length field on the Message Configuration screen must correspond to the selected Data Type in bytes for example 4 bytes for a DINT or a REAL When using a PowerFlex 7008 drive Accel Time 1 is a floating point number requiring the Data Type field to be set to REAL when creating the controller tag See the drive documentation to determine the size of the parameter and its data type 16 bit or 32 bit integer or REAL 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 6 10 Using Explicit Messaging 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P ControlLogix Controller Example Ladder Logic Program to Write a Single Parameter Using RSLogix 5000 Software Any Version A Set Attribute Single message is used to write to a single parameter This write message example writes a value to parameter 140 Accel Time 1 in a PowerFlex 7 Class drive See DPI Parameter Object on page C 13 Class Code 0x93 for parameter numbering Important See Table 6 A on page 6 2 for limitations of PowerFlex 7 Class and PowerFlex 750 Series drives when using D
81. to the appropriate setting For this example the default setting of Block Xfer 62 and its corresponding N files are used 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 4 30 Configuring the I O 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 13 Click AutoMap to map the drive input image to the 1771 SDN scanner as shown in this example below 1771 SDN Scanner Module TIP If your RSLogix 5 project requires a different starting Word word 32 bit than the default value of 0 for the drive input image set the Start Word field to the appropriate value 14 Click the Output tab to display the output registers for the 1771 SDN scanner Important If your RSLogix 5 project requires a different memory selection than the default setting for the drive output image set the Memory field to the appropriate setting For this example the default setting of Block Xfer 62 and its corresponding N files are used 15 Click AutoMap to map the drive output image to the 1771 SDN scanner as shown in this example below p 1771 SDN Scanner Module TIP If your RSLogix 5 project requires a different starting Word word 32 bit than the default value of 0 for the drive output image set the Start Word field to the appropriate value Configuring the I O 4 31 16 Click OK If the Scanner Configuration Applet appears and asks to download these settings to the 1771 SDN scann
82. use the adapter in a DPI External Comms Kit 20 XCOMM DC BASE The adapter is typically installed in the internal communication slot on the PowerFlex 7 Class drive However an externally mounted adapter may be desired when e The PowerFlex drive is already connected to an existing network such as Remote I O and a second network is desired for a DriveExplorer or DriveExecutive software tool data collection and so forth e The PowerFlex drive is remotely located next to some I O devices that also need to be networked The DPI External Comms Kit has an option slot for general purpose network I O that a controller can use Both the drive and I O devices are handled as one node on the network to reduce the network node count Topic Page Installing the Adapter 8 1 Board Option 20 XCOMM IO OPT1 8 2 Understanding the I O Image Drive I O Option 8 2 Configuring the Adapter to Use the Optional I O Data 8 3 Viewing Optional Diagnostic Items 8 4 Installing the Adapter The adapter can be installed in a DPI External Comms Kit Figure 8 1 Mounting and Connecting the Adapter Comms Kit Comms Kit Enclosure Cover Enclosure Base with adapter mounted inside 15 24 cm 6 in Internal Interface Cable connects power supply board in enclosure base to adapter For more information see the DPI External Communications Kit Installation Instructions publication 20COMM INOOI 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adap
83. 0 0101 257 TXID 01 Command 01 execute N30 1 0024 36 Port 00 Size 36 bytes 9 N30 2 4C01 19457 Service 4C Set Attribute Single Address 01 Node N30 3 0093 147 Class 93 DPI Parameter Object N30 4 0000 0 Instance Class Attributes drive N30 5 0000 0 Attribute 0 Parameter Value N30 6 008D 141 Parameter Number Written To 141 Accel Time 2 N30 7 ooeF 2 111 Parameter Value Written LSW 11 1 seconds N30 8 00000 o Parameter Value Written MSW 0 N30 9 008F 143 Parameter Number Written To 143 Decel Time 2 N30 10 00DE 2 222 Parameter Value Written LSW 22 2 seconds N30 11 00000 9 Parameter Value Written MSW 0 N30 12 0069 105 Parameter Number Written To 105 Preset Speed 5 N30 13 0140 2 333 Parameter Value Written LSW 33 3 seconds N30 14 00000 9 Parameter Value Written MSW 0 N30 15 006A 106 Parameter Number Written To 106 Preset Speed 6 N30 16 01BC 2 444 Parameter Value Written LSW 44 4 seconds N30 17 00000 lo Parameter Value Written MSW 0 N30 18 006B 107 Parameter Number Written To 107 Preset Speed 7 N30 19 0228 2 555 Parameter Value Written LSW 55 5 seconds N30 20 00007 o Parameter Value Written MSW 0 1 In RSLogix 5 software leading zeros are not displayed in data file addresses For example 0024 in address N30 1 is shown as 24 For PowerFlex 7005 or PowerFlex 750 Series drives if some of t
84. 0 Control drives D 1 PowerFlex 7005 Phase Il Control and 700L with 700S Control drives D 3 PowerFlex 750 Series drives D 5 PowerFlex Digital DC drives D 7 definition G 5 in I O image for ControlLogix controller 5 2 PLC 5 and SLC 500 controllers 5 4 using 5 6 M MAC ID see node address manual conventions P 1 related documentation P 2 website P 2 Master Slave hierarchy communications E 1 configuring adapter for 3 5 definition G 6 mechanical dimensions A 1 messages see explicit messaging or MOD status indicator locating 7 1 troubleshooting with 7 2 mounting the adapter 2 6 M S Input parameter B 4 M S Input parameter configurations 3 5 E 1 M S Output parameter B 5 M S Output parameter configurations 3 5 E 4 N NET A status indicator locating 7 1 troubleshooting with 7 3 NET B status indicator not used 7 1 network cable 2 7 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P Index 4 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P node address definition G 6 setting with parameter 3 3 setting with switches 2 2 Nonvolatile Storage NVS definition G 6 in adapter 3 1 in drive 5 9 0 objects definition G 6 list of C 1 to C 22 ODVA DeviceNet specification G 3 P Parameter Group object C 7 Parameter object 5 parameters accessing 3 1 convention P 1 list of B 1 to B 7 numbering scheme B 1 restoring to
85. 01 DPI 5 Manual 1110 DPI 6 Manual 1111 Jog Ref Logic Command Status Words D 3 PowerFlex 7005 Phase Logic Command Word Control and 700L with 7005 Control Drives Logic Bits 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Command Description Normal Stop 0 Not Normal Stop 1 Normal Stop X Start 0 0 Not Start 1 Start X Jog 1 0 Not Jog using Jog Speed 1 Par 29 1 Jog using Jog Speed 1 Par 29 X Clear Fault 2 0 Not Clear Fault 1 Clear Fault X x Unipolar Direction 00 No Command 01 Forward Command 10 Reverse Command 11 Hold Direction Control X Reserved x Jog 2 0 Not Jog using Jog Speed 2 Par 39 1 using Jog Speed 2 Par 39 X Current Limit Stop 0 Not Current Limit Stop 1 Current Limit Stop X Coast Stop 0 Not Coast to Stop 1 Coast to Stop X Reserved X Reserved X Spd Ref Sel0 Spd Ref Sell zie xX P 14 13 12 x Spd Ref Sel2 0 0 Spd Ref A Par 27 0 0 1 Spd Ref B Par 28 0 1 0 Preset 2 Par 15 0 1 1 Preset 3 Par 16 1 0 0 Preset 4 Par 17 1 0 1 Preset 5 Par 18 1 1 0 Preset 6 Par 19 1 1 1 Preset 7 20 X Reserved 1 A Not Stop condition logic bit 0 0 logic bit 8 0 and logic bit 9 0 must first be present before a 1 Start condition will start the drive
86. 02G EN P 4 About This Manual Notes 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P Components Getting Started Chapter 1 The adapter is intended for installation into a PowerFlex 7 Class drive and is used for network communication The 20 COMM D Series B adapter firmware revision 2 xxx or later can also be installed in an External DPI Comms Kit 20 XCOMM DC BASE For PowerFlex 750 Series drives we recommend using the 20 750 DNET DeviceNet option module instead of the 20 COMM D adapter However this manual does include information on using the 20 COMM D adapter with PowerFlex 750 Series drives but there are operating limitations For details see Compatible Products on page 1 3 Topic Page Components EN Features 1 2 Compatible Products 1 3 Required Equipment 1 3 Safety Precautions 1 5 Quick Start 1 6 Item Part Description Status Indicators Three status indicators that indicate the status of the DPI adapter and network connection See Chapter 7 Troubleshooting DP Connector A 20 pin single row shrouded male header An Internal Interface cable is connected to this connector and a connector on the drive DeviceNet Connector A 5 pin connector to which a 5 pin linear plug supplied with adapter can be connected for the DeviceNet network cable Node Address Switches
87. 03 Output Current In this example Output Current is a 32 bit parameter For PowerFlex 700S drives Output Current is a floating point number To manipulate REAL data into a proper Float tag see the Communications section in Chapter 1 of the PowerFlex 700S AC Drives Phase II Control Reference Manual publication PFLEX RMO003 Figure 6 31 Example Read Single Response Data File i Data File N13 dec Radix Decimal E Symbol Columns 10 Desc N13 Properties Usage Help SLC 500 Controller Example Ladder Logic Program to Write a Single Parameter Using Read Write Parameter Service A Write Parameter message is used to write to a single parameter This write message example writes a value to parameter 140 Accel Time 1 in a PowerFlex 7 Class drive Figure 6 32 Example Ladder Logic to Write a Single Parameter EET SingeWrteMessage 0 B3 0 DEM 4 DeviceNet Explicit Message EN 1 Control Block N140 DN 5 Control Block Length 70 ER 5 Setup Screen lt Important If the explicit message single write must be written continuously use the Generic Set Attribute Single service and attribute A 10 decimal see page 6 33 This writes to RAM not NVS EEPROM memory This example single write message using Class code F writes to NVS Over time continuous writes will exceed the EEPROM life cycle and cause the drive to malfunction 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User M
88. 1 2 Drive Diagnostic Item 2 0x4800 0x4BFF 18432 19455 DPI Port 2 4 19456 20479 DPI Port 3 16384 Class Attributes Adapter 0x5000 0x53FF 20480 21503 DPI Port 4 16385 Adapter Diagnostic Item1 0x5400 0x57FF 21504 22527 DPI Port 5 0x5800 0x5BFF 22528 23551 Port 6 Class Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Data Type Description 1 Get Class Revision WORD 1 2 Get Number of Instances WORD Number of diagnostic items in the device 3 Get ENUM Offset WORD DPI ENUM object instance offset Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 0 Get Full All STRUCT of Information BOOL 32 Descriptor see page C 15 CONTAINER Value CONTAINER Minimum value CONTAINER Maximum value CONTAINER Default value WORD Pad Word WORD Pad Word STRING 4 Units e g Amp Hz UINT Multiplier 2 UINT Divisor UINT Base 2 INT Offset 2 DWORD Link source of the value 0 no link STRING 16 Always zero 0 Parameter name 1 Get Set Value Various Diagnostic item value A CONTAINER is a 32 bit block of data that contains the data type used by a value If signed the value is sign extended Padding is used in the CONTAINER to ensure that it is always 32 bits This value is used in the formulas used to convert the value between display units and internal units See Formulas for Converting on page C 16 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User M
89. 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 7 4 Troubleshooting Viewing Adapter Diagnostic Items 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P If you encounter unexpected communications problems the adapter s diagnostic items may help you or Rockwell Automation personnel troubleshoot the problem Adapter diagnostic items can be viewed with any of these drive configuration tools LCD PowerFlex 7 Class HIM Diagnostics Device Items Connected Components Workbench software version 1 02 or later DriveExplorer software version 2 01 or later DriveExecutive software version 3 01 or later Using the HIM to View Adapter Diagnostic Items Step 1 Example Screen Access parameters in the adapter See Using the PowerFlex 7 Class HIM to Access Parameters Menu 32 Parameter Press the GD key to scroll to Diagnostics Device Select Press the Enter key to display the Diagnostics menu in the adapter Device Item 3 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to enter the Device Items option Reference Press the GD key to scroll through the items Table 7 A Adapter Diagnostic Items No Name Description 1 Common Logic Cmd The present value of the Common Logic Command being transmitted to the drive by this adapter 2 Prod Logic Cmd The present value of the Product Logic Comman
90. 4 I O Board Option Digital Input Mapping Datalink Out D1 Word Bit 1514131211109 876543210 HK HK Status ING INI Figure 8 5 Board Option Digital Output Mapping Datalink In D1 Word Bit 15 14 13 1211109 8 76 5432 10 L QUTI OUT2 Important On power up or reset the outputs will be in a non activated state To configure the adapter to use the optional I O Board Parameters 13 DPI I O Cfg 25 M S Input and 26 M S Output must be set To send input output data from the optional I O board to the network do the following e Turn on bit 4 1xxxx in Parameter 25 M S Input e Turn on bit 4 1xxxx in Parameter 26 M S Output e Turn off bit 4 in Parameter 13 DPI I O Cfg Setting the Datalink D bit 4 in the M S Input and M S Output parameters directs the communication adapter to send Datalink D back to the controller Turning off bit 4 in the DPI I O Cfg parameter directs the communication adapter to not send Datalink D data back to the drive For more information on I O Messaging and Configuring Datalinks see Chapter 5 Using the I O If the I O Board Fault Action Jumper JMP1 is set to the Fault Configurable position Parameter 23 FIt Cfg D1 In is used to set the states of the outputs when the I O Board takes its Fault Action For details on settin
91. 55 Stop Mode A 304 Data In C1 101 Points to Par 101 Preset Speed 1 305 Data In C2 102 Points to Par 102 Preset Speed 2 306 Data In D1 103 Points to Par 103 Preset Speed 3 307 Data In D2 104 Points to Par 104 Preset Speed 4 310 Data Out A1 140 Points to Par 140 Accel Time 1 311 Data Out A2 142 Points to Par 142 Decel Time 1 312 Data Out B1 100 Points to Par 100 Jog Speed 313 Data Out B2 155 Points to Par 155 Stop Mode 314 Data Out C1 101 Points to Par 101 Preset Speed 1 315 Data Out C2 102 Points to Par 102 Preset Speed 2 316 Data Out D1 103 Points to Par 103 Preset Speed 3 317 Data Out D2 104 Points to Par 104 Preset Speed 4 03 DN Addr Cfg 2 Node address for the adapter 13 DPI I O Cfg xxx1 1111 Enables Cmd Ref and Datalinks A D 25 M S Input xxx1 1111 Configures the I O Data to be transferred from the controller on the network to the drive 26 M S Output xxx1 1111 Configures the I O Data to be transferred from the drive to the controller on the network TIP Data In parameters are inputs into the drive that come from controller outputs for example data to write to a drive parameter Data Out parameters are outputs from the drive that go to controller inputs for example data to read a drive parameter 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P Using t
92. 6385 Adapter Component 1 0x5400 0x57FF 21504 22527 DPI Port 5 0x5800 0x5BFF 22528 23551 Port 6 Class Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Data Type Description 0 Get Family Code BYTE 0x00 DPI Peripheral 0x30 PowerFlex 70 0x34 PowerFlex 700H 0x38 0x39 or Ox3A PowerFlex 700 0x40 PowerFlex 7000 0x48 0x49 or 0x4A PowerFlex 7005 0x5A SMC Flex 0x68 0x69 or 0x6A PowerFlex 700VC OxFF HIM 1 Get Family Text STRING 16 Text identifying the device 2 Set Language Code BYTE 0 English 1 French 2 Spanish 3 Italian 4 German 5 Japanese 6 Portuguese 7 Mandarin Chinese 8 Russian 9 Dutch 3 Get Product Series BYTE 1 A 2 B 4 Get Number of Components BYTE Number of components for example main control board I O boards in the device 5 Set User Definable Text STRING 16 Text identifying the device with a user supplied name 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P C 12 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P DeviceNet Objects Attribute ID Access Rule Data Type Description 6 Get Status Text STRING 12 Text describing the status of the device 7 Get Configuration Code BYTE Identification of variations 8 Get Configuration Text STRING 16 Text identifying a variation of a family device 9 Get Brand Code WO
93. 71 418 4 slots PLC 5 40E 1 Slot 0 0 0 0 0 3 IV Show 4 0 Rows 1B 4 0 Scanner Sa _ 2 Ethemeb 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 5 20 Using the I O 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P In the Chassis Type column set the chassis type to match the chassis being used For this example the 1771 A1B 4 slots is selected In the I O Channel column right click the Local cell and choose Display Chassis to display the Chassis configuration screen i Chassis Chassis_1 Rack 0 Group 0 DER Attached to PLC EXAMPLE o Chi P ties 3 0 3 0 0 assis Properties In the Module Type column right click the cell that corresponds with the slot row in which the 1771 SDN scanner physically resides for this example Slot 0 and choose Insert Module to display the Edit Module screen In the Edit Module screen select 1771 SDN DeviceNet Scanner Module Click OK The 1771 SDN scanner should now appear in the Module Type column in the appropriate slot row as shown in the example below Chassis Chassis 1 Rack 0 Group 0 BEE Attached to PLC EXAMPLE Slot R G S C Module Type 1 0 Points Description DeviceNet Scanner Module Display Module Delete Module ls Chassis Properties Right click the 1771 SDN cell and choose Display Module to display the Enter Module Addresses s
94. 9 3 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 618 Data Out A1 LSW N9 4 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 618 Data Out A1 MSW N9 5 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 619 Data Out A2 LSW N9 6 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 619 Data Out A2 MSW N9 7 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 620 Data Out B1 LSW N9 8 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 620 Data Out B1 MSW N9 9 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 621 Data Out B2 LSW N9 10 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 621 Data Out B2 MSW N9 11 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 622 Data Out C1 LSW N9 12 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 622 Data Out C1 MSW N9 13 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 623 Data Out C2 LSW N9 14 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 623 Data Out C2 MSW N9 15 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 624 Data Out D1 LSW N9 16 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 624 Data Out D1 MSW N9 17 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 625 Data Out D2 LSW N9 18 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 625 Data Out D2 MSW N10 0 Logic Command see Appendix D N10 1 Speed Reference LSW N10 2 Speed Reference MSW N10 3 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 610 Data In A1 LSW N10 4 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 610 Data In A1 MSW N10 5 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 611 Data In A2 LSW N10 6 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 611 Data In A2 MSW N10 7 Value of pa
95. A 1 example network for ControlLogix controller 4 2 PLC 5 controller 4 20 SLC 500 controller 4 31 network definition G 3 objects list of C 1 to C 22 specification G 3 diagnostic items 7 4 dimensions A 1 DN Active Cfg parameter B 3 DN Addr Act parameter B 1 DN Addr Cfg parameter B 1 DN Rate Act parameter B 2 DN Rate Cfg parameter B 1 DPI connector on adapter 1 1 data rates A 1 definition G 3 Internal Interface cable 2 4 2 5 peripheral G 3 products 1 3 G 3 DPI Alarm object C 19 DPI Data Rate parameter B 1 DPI Device object C 11 DPI Diagnostic object C 21 DPI External Comms Kit using adapter in 8 1 DPI Fault object C 17 DPI I O Act parameter B 3 DPI I O Cfg parameter B 3 DPI Parameter object C 13 DPI Port parameter B 1 DPI Time object C 22 DriveExecutive software adapter configuration tool 1 4 3 1 definition website G 4 DriveExplorer software adapter configuration tool 1 4 3 1 definition website G 3 drives see PowerFlex drives DriveTools SP software G 4 E EDS Electronic Data Sheet files G 4 EEPROM see Nonvolatile Storage NVS environmental specifications A 2 equipment required 1 3 events clearing viewing 7 6 list of 7 7 explicit messaging about 6 2 configuring for ControlLogix controller 6 4 PLC 5 controller 6 19 SLC 500 controller 6 27 definition G 4 performing 6 3 F fault action configuring the adapter for 3 11 definition G 4 fault configuration
96. Automap on Add Upload from Scanner Download to Scanner Edit 1 0 Parameters OK e lt lt Node Active Blectronic Key Device Type Vendor Product Code Major Revision ja Box Setting Node Active Activates deactivates the scanlist in the 1747 SDN scanner for the selected device For this example keep the box checked Device Type These Electronic Key category check boxes select how specific the Vendor device in the scanlist must be for the 1747 SDN scanner to match _ its compatibility for operation The more boxes that are checked Product Code the more specific the device must be to operate For this example Major Revision keep the default boxes Device Type Vendor and Product Code checked 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 4 38 Configuring the I O 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P d Click Edit I O Parameters to display the Edit I O Parameters screen for the PowerFlex 70 EC drive used in this example Edit 1 0 Parameters 01 PowerFlex 70 EC 240 4 24 2X Strobed Change of State 7 Cyclic Input Size Bytes r Input Size N Polled Output Size Input Size 20 E Bytes Heartbeat Rate 4 mac Output Size 20 z Bytes PollRate Evey Scan Cancel Restore 1 0 Sizes Select the type of data exchange Polled Change of State and
97. CCC Instances Supports Instance 1 Class Attributes Not supported Instance Attributes Not supported Message Structure for Execute PCCC Request Response Name Data Type Description Name Data Type Description Length USINT Length of requestor ID Length USINT Length of requestor ID Vendor Vendor number of requestor Vendor Vendor number of requestor Serial UDINT ASA serial number of requestor Serial UDINT ASA serial number of requestor Number Number Other Product Identifier of user task etc on the Other Product Identifier of user task etc on the requestor Specific requestor Specific CMD USINT Command byte CMD USINT Command byte STS USINT 0 STS USINT Status byte TNSW UINT Transport word TNSW UINT Transport word Same value as the request FNC USINT Function code not used for all CMDs EXT_STS USINT Extended status not used for all CMDs PCCC_ ARRAY of CMD FNC specific parameters PCCC_ ARRAY of CMD FNC specific result data params USINT results USINT 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P DeviceNet Objects C 9 Message Structure for Execute Local PCCC Request Response Name Data Type Description Name Data Type Description CMD USINT Command byte CMD USINT Command byte STS USINT 0 STS USINT Status byte TNSW UINT Transport word TNSW UINT Transport word Same value as the request FNC USINT Function code not used
98. DN Addr Cfg 2 Node address for the adapter Adapter 13 DPI I O Cfg xxx1 1111 Enables Cmd Ref and Datalinks A D 25 M S Input xxx1 1111 Configures the I O Data to be transferred from the controller on the network to the drive 26 M S Output xxx1 1111 Configures the I O Data to be transferred from the drive to the controller on the network TIP Data In parameters are inputs into the drive that come from controller outputs for example data to write to a drive parameter Data Out parameters are outputs from the drive that go to controller inputs for example data to read a drive parameter Using the I O 5 23 TIP When using a drive that has 16 bit Datalinks PowerFlex 70 PowerFlex 700 and PowerFlex 700H drives to transfer a 32 bit parameter two contiguous drive Datalink parameters for example Data Out A1 A2 B1 B2 and so forth are required To determine if a parameter is a 32 bit parameter see the Parameter section in the drive documentation and look for a 97 symbol in the No column All parameters in PowerFlex 700 Series B drives are 32 bit parameters For example parameter 3 Output Current in a PowerFlex 70 EC drive is a 32 bit parameter When using a drive that has 32 bit Datalinks PowerFlex 700 VC PowerFlex 700S and PowerFlex 750 Series drives only one drive Datalink parameter is required to transfer any parameter Understanding PLC 5 Controller Data Table Addresses Because the PLC 5 controlle
99. Data Out B2 MSW N9 11 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 622 Data Out C1 LSW N9 12 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 622 Data Out C1 MSW N9 13 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 623 Data Out C2 LSW N9 14 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 623 Data Out C2 MSW N9 15 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 624 Data Out D1 LSW N9 16 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 624 Data Out D1 MSW N9 17 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 625 Data Out D2 LSW N9 18 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 625 Data Out D2 MSW N10 0 Logic Command see Appendix D N10 1 Speed Reference LSW N10 2 Speed Reference MSW N10 3 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 610 Data In A1 LSW N10 4 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 610 Data In A1 MSW N10 5 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 611 Data In A2 LSW N10 6 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 611 Data In A2 MSW N10 7 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 612 Data In B1 LSW N10 8 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 612 Data In B1 MSW N10 9 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 613 Data In B2 LSW N10 10 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 613 Data In B2 MSW N10 11 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 614 Data In C1 LSW N10 12 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 614 Data In C1 MSW N10 13 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 615 Data In C2 LSW N10 14 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 615 Data In C2
100. Datalink D2 Out 23 Field Flash Cnt The number of times the firmware in the adapter has been updated 24 DPI Rx Errors The present value of the DPI Receive error counter 25 DPI Tx Errors The present value of the DPI Transmit error counter 26 DN Rx Errors The number of receive errors reported by the DeviceNet hardware 27 DN Tx Errors The number of transmit errors reported by the DeviceNet hardware 28 DN Image Size The size of I O image on the DeviceNet network 29 Data Rate SW The present value of the adapter data rate switch 30 Node Address SW The present value of the adapter node address switches 31 OPT Status The operating status of the optional I O board in the DPI External Comms Kit For the meanings of the individual bits see Viewing Optional I O Diagnostic Items on page 8 4 32 OPT RX Errors Number of optional I O board receive errors 33 OPT FW Version Firmware version of optional I O board in DPI External Comms Kit 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 7 6 Troubleshooting Viewing and Clearing The adapter has an event queue to record significant events that occur in the Events operation of the adapter When such an event occurs an entry is put into the event queue You can view the event queue with any of these drive configuration tools LCD PowerFlex 7 Class HIM Connected Components Workbench software version 1 02 or later DriveExplorer software version 2 01
101. EEPROM memory which retains the parameter value even after the drive is power cycled Important When set to 9 the EEPROM may quickly exceed its life cycle and cause the drive to malfunction Setting the data file address value to A Hex will write the parameter value to temporary memory which deletes the parameter value after the drive is power cycled When frequent write messages are required we recommend using the A setting In this example Accel Time 1 is a 16 bit integer parameter The most significant word MSW is not used For PowerFlex 700S or PowerFlex 750 Series drives Accel Time 1 is a floating point number To manipulate REAL data into two 16 bit registers see the Communications section in Chapter 1 of the PowerFlex 700S AC Drives Phase II Control Reference Manual publication PFLEX RMO003 Figure 6 44 Example Single Write COP Request Data File N30 0 Radix Hex BCD x sma Desc Request Data for Explicit Message N30 Properties Usage Help 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 6 40 Using Explicit Messaging 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P Table 6 5 Example Single Write COP Response Data Value Address Hex Dec Description N30 70 0101 257 TXID 01 Status 01 successful N30 71 0000 0 Port 00 Size 00 bytes N30 72 9001 28671 Service 90 succes
102. EN P Configuring the Adapter 3 9 Port 5 Device Default 0 00 20 COMM D Parameter 33 Peer Ref Adjust 0 00 lt gt 199 99 8 Set Parameter 36 Peer Inp Timeout to the maximum amount of time the adapter will wait for a message before timing out Important This value must be greater than the product of Parameter 42 Peer Out Time multiplied by Parameter 43 Peer Out Skip in the adapter from which you are receiving I O For example if the value of Parameter 42 Peer Out Time is 2 00 seconds and the value of Parameter 43 Peer Out Skip is 2 then Parameter 36 Peer Inp Timeout needs to have a value greater than 4 00 such as 5 00 in the example below Port 5 Device Default 10 00 5 20 COMM D Parameter 36 Peer Inp Timeout 5 00 5 0 01 lt gt 180 00 9 Set Parameter 34 Peer Action to the action that the adapter will take if it times out Parameter 34 Peer Flt Action lets you determine the action of the adapter and connected drive if peer communication is disrupted By default this parameter faults the drive You can set this parameter so that the drive continues to run however precautions should be taken to verify that the setting of this parameter does not create a hazard of injury or equipment damage When commissioning the drive verify that your system responds correctly to various situations for example a disconnected cable 0 ATTENTION Ris
103. ER Done Enabled EN Waiting for Slot WS Scanner Status Scanner Code hex 1 Transaction completed successfully dec B Error Code hex 0 The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to configure a message to write a single parameter General Tab Example Value Description 1747 SDN Slot 1 The chassis slot occupied by the scanner Size of Send Data Bytes 2 Number of bytes to be sent written Two bytes equal a 16 bit integer word Message Timeout 5 The time in seconds that the message must be completed DeviceNet Addr 1 Dec The node address of the adapter connected to the drive Service Generic Set Attribute Single Code for the requested service Class 93 Class ID for the DPI Parameter Object Instance 140 Dec Instance number is the same as the parameter number Attribute 2 9 or 10 Dec Attribute number for the Parameter Value attribute 1 The default setting for Service is Custom enabling entry of a Service Code not available from the Service pull down menu When choosing a Service other than Custom from the pull down menu an appropriate Hex value is automatically assigned to the Service Code box which is dimmed unavailable Setting the Attribute value to 9 will write the parameter value to the drive s Nonvolatile Storage EEPROM memory which retains the parameter value even after the driv
104. Fit Another peripheral with the same port number is already in use 12 Type 0 Login The adapter has logged in for Type 0 control 13 Type 0 Time Fit The adapter has not received a Type 0 status message within the specified time 14 DL Login The adapter has logged into a Datalink 15 DL Reject The drive rejected an attempt to log in to a Datalink because the Datalink is not supported or is used by another peripheral 16 DL Time The adapter has not received a Datalink message within the specified time 17 Control Disabled The adapter has sent a Soft Control Disable command to the drive 18 Control Enabled The adapter has sent a Soft Control Enable command to the drive 19 PCCC IO Time Fit The adapter has not received a PCCC Control message for longer than the PCCC Control Timeout 20 Normal Startup The adapter successfully started up 21 Message Timeout A Client Server message sent by the adapter was not completed within 1 sec 22 DPI Fault Msg The drive has faulted 23 DN Poll Timeout A Polled I O connection has timed out 24 DN IO Too Long Reconfigure the I O length in the scanner 25 Bad IO Fragment A DeviceNet I O fragment was received out of sequence Possible line noise problem 26 Idle IO Message The DeviceNet scanner was placed in program mode 27 Peer IO Timeout The adapter has not received a Peer I O message within the specified timeout interval 28 DPI Fault Clear The drive issued this because a fault was c
105. Flex 700 Frames 2 and Larger PowerFlex 700S Frames 0 and 1 PowerFlex 700S Frames 2 through 6 HIM panel opens to F5 d allow access to DPI A interface To open panel remove screws a on left side of HIM e exi panel and swing open PowerFlex 700H Frames 9 and Larger PowerFlex 700S Frames 9 and Larger Item Description 15 24 6 in Internal Interface cable DPI Connector DeviceNet cable 2 54 1 Internal Interface cable 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 2 6 Installing the Adapter Figure 2 44 Mounting and Grounding the Adapter Drive Q 0 9 Nem 8 0 Ibein 4 Places Adapt r Internal Interface Cable folded behind the adapter mm and in front of the drive PowerF
106. I Control PowerFlex 700L Drives with 700S Control 5 39 Data Table Address Description N9 0 Logic Status see Appendix D N9 1 Not Used N9 2 Speed Feedback LSW N9 3 Speed Feedback MSW N9 4 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 660 DPI Data Out A1 LSW N9 5 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 660 DPI Data Out A1 MSW N9 6 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 661 DPI Data Out A2 LSW N9 7 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 661 DPI Data Out A2 MSW N9 8 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 662 DPI Data Out B1 LSW N9 9 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 662 DPI Data Out B1 MSW N9 10 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 663 DPI Data Out B2 LSW N9 11 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 663 DPI Data Out B2 MSW N9 12 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 664 DPI Data Out C1 LSW N9 13 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 664 DPI Data Out C1 MSW N9 14 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 665 DPI Data Out C2 LSW N9 15 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 665 DPI Data Out C2 MSW N9 16 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 666 DPI Data Out D1 LSW N9 17 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 666 DPI Data Out D1 MSW N9 18 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 667 DPI Data Out D2 LSW N9 19 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 667 DPI Data Out D2
107. INT is to be consumed by this Connection object 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P C4 DeviceNet Objects Register Object Class Code Hexadecimal Decimal 0x07 7 Services Service Code Implemented for Service Name Class Instance Ox0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 Yes Yes Set_Attribute_Single Instances Instance Description 1 All polled data being read from the DPI device read only 2 All polled data written to the DPI device read write 3 Logic Status and Feedback data read only 4 Logic Command and Reference data read write 5 Datalink A input data from device to scanner read only 6 Datalink A output data from scanner to device read write 7 Datalink B input data from device to scanner read only 8 Datalink B output data from scanner to device read write 9 Datalink C input data from device to scanner read only 10 Datalink C output data from scanner to device read write 11 Datalink D input data from device to scanner read only 12 Datalink D output data from scanner to device read write 13 Logic Status and Feedback Data read only 14 Mask read write 1 The mask command word is set to the value of the first word of the data where there are ones in the second word of the data Command word 1 and not word 2 or word 1 and word 2 This only controls specified bits in the Logic Command data to the
108. IP If a message box reports that RSLogix 5000 software is unable to go online select Communications Who Active to find your controller in the Who Active screen After finding and selecting the controller click Set Project Path to establish the path If your controller does not appear you need to add or configure the DeviceNet driver with RSLinx software See Using RSLinx Classic Software on page 4 1 and the RSLinx online help for details Click Download to download the configuration to the controller When the download is successfully completed RSLogix 5000 software goes into the Online mode and the I O OK box in the upper left of the screen should be steady green Select File Save If this is the first time you saved the project the Save As dialog box appears a Navigate to a folder b Typea file name c Click Save to save the configuration as a file on your computer To be sure that the present project configuration values are saved RSLogix 5000 software prompts you to upload them Click Yes to upload and save the values Place the controller in Remote Run or Run Mode 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 4 20 Configuring the I O PLC 5 Controller Example 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P After the adapter is configured the connected drive and adapter will be a single node on the network This section provides the steps needed to con
109. MSW N9 13 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 732 733 Data Out C1 LSW N9 14 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 732 733 Data Out C1 MSW N9 15 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 734 735 Data Out C2 LSW N9 16 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 734 735 Data Out C2 MSW N9 17 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 736 737 Data Out D1 LSW N9 18 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 736 737 Data Out D1 MSW N9 19 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 738 739 Data Out D2 LSW N9 20 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 738 739 Data Out D2 MSW N10 0 1771 SDN Scanner Command Word see its User Manual for bit definitions N10 1 Logic Command see Appendix D N10 2 Not Used N10 3 Speed Reference LSW N10 4 Speed Reference MSW N10 5 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 707 708 Data In A1 LSW N10 6 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 707 708 Data In A1 MSW N10 7 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 709 710 Data In A2 LSW N10 8 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 709 710 Data In A2 MSW N10 9 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 711 712 Data In B1 LSW N10 10 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 711 712 Data In B1 MSW N10 11 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 713 714 Data In B2 LSW N10 12 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 713 714 Data In B2 MSW N10 13 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 715 716 Data In C1 LSW N10 14 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 715
110. OL 2 15 Not used DPI Alarm Object DeviceNet Objects C 19 Class Code Hexadecimal Decimal 0x98 152 Products such as PowerFlex drives use this object for alarms or warnings Adapters do not support this object Services Service Code Implemented for Service Name Class Instance Ox0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 Yes No Set_Attribute_Single Instances The number of instances depends on the maximum number of alarms supported by the queue The maximum number of alarms can be read in Instance 0 Attribute 2 Instances Hex Device Example Description 0x0000 0x3FFF Host 0 Class Attributes Drive Only host devices can have alarms 1 Most Recent Alarm 2 Second Most Recent Alarm Class Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 1 Get Class Revision WORD Revision of object 2 Get Number of WORD Maximum number of alarms that the Instances device can record in its queue 3 Set Alarm Command BYTE 0 No Operation Write 1 Clear Alarm 2 Clear Alarm Queue 3 Reset Device 4 Get Fault Data List STRUCT of Reserved BYTE BYTE WORD n 5 Get Number of WORD Number of alarms in the queue A 0 Recorded Alarms indicates the alarm queue is empty 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P C 20 DeviceNet Objects Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access Name Data Type Description 0 Get Full All STRUCT of Infor
111. Out C1 101 Preset Speed 1 315 Data Out C2 102 Preset Speed 2 316 Data Out D1 103 Preset Speed 3 317 Data Out D2 104 Preset Speed 4 1 Since the PowerFlex 70 EC drive uses 16 bit Datalinks two contiguous Datalinks for example Data Out A1 A2 are required when assigning a 32 bit parameter such as Parameter 003 Output Current For drives with 32 bit Datalinks only one Datalink is required Use RSNetWorx for DeviceNet to Configure and Save the I O to the Controller To establish an configuration that can be used between the controller and drive over a DeviceNet network you must first create an I O image for the 1747 SDN scanner 1 Start RSNetWorx for DeviceNet software 2 Inthe RSNetWorx for DeviceNet window select File gt New to display the New File screen 3 Select DeviceNet Configuration as the network configuration type 4 Click OK Configuring the I O 4 33 5 Select Network gt Online to display the Browse for Network screen Browse for network Select a communications path to the desired network Wiis len 5 8 ControlNet ControlNet 325 DeviceNet DeviceNet gy Ethernet Ethernet EtherNet IP Ethernet 285 USB Data Highway Plus E Workstation USMEQDMWISNIE2 9 85 Linx Gateways Ethernet 295 Serial Data Highway Plus 6 Expand the communication path from your computer to the 1747 SDN scanner The following screen shows our exampl
112. PI Parameter Class code 0x93 for explicit messaging Table 6 E Example Controller Tags to Write a Single Parameter Operand Controller Tags for Single Write Message Data Type XIC Execute_Single_Write_Message BOOL MSG Single_Write_Message MESSAGE Figure 6 8 Example Ladder Logic to Write a Single Parameter Execute_Single_Write_Message MSG JE Message Message Control Single Write Message CDN gt CER2 Configuration Tab Message Type Service Type 7 Service Code Class Instance 2 Attribute 9 Source Element Source Length Example Value CIP Generic Set Attribute Single 10 Hex 93 Hex 140 Dec 9 or A Hex Accel Time 19 2 5 Using Explicit Messaging 6 11 ControlLogix Controller Formatting a Message to Write a Single Parameter Using RSLogix 5000 Software Any Version Figure 6 9 Set Attribute Single Message Configuration Screens Message Configuration Single_Write_Message Configuration Communication Tag Name Single_Write_Message Message Configuration Single_Write_Message Configuration Communication Tag Path My_DeviceNet_Bridge 2 1 Message Configuration Single Write Message Configuration Communication Tag ci Generic bd Message Type Service x Source Element Type Accel Time 1 zl 2 GBytes zl tes New Tag Set Attribute Single Source Lengt
113. Par 25 Par 26 Input Output DPI I O Cfg M S Input M S Output 8 8 0 0001 0 0001 0 0001 v v v 16 16 0 0011 0 0011 0 0011 v v vv 24 24 00111 00111 00111 v v 32 32 0 1111 0 1111 01111 v v 40 40 144 11111 1 1111 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 4 40 Configuring the I O g Set the scan rate for the selected data exchange method Exchange Method Rate Field to Set Polled Poll Rate Change of State Heartbeat Rate Cyclic Send Rate For more information about scan rates see RSNetWorx for DeviceNet software online help h Click OK If a Scanner Configuration Applet appears click Yes to continue The Edit I O Parameters screen closes and then the 1747 SDN Scanlist tab screen reappears 12 Click the Input tab to display the input registers for the 1747 SDN scanner Important If your RSLogix 500 project requires a different memory selection than the default setting for the drive input image set the Memory field to the appropriate setting For this example change the default setting of Discrete to M File and its corresponding M files are used 13 Click AutoMap to map the drive input image to the 1747 SDN scanner as shown in this example below 1747 SDN Scanner Module General Module Scanist input Output ADR Summary Node Sze W 01 Power
114. Parameter Service Code p ScennerCode es 1 Class hex Instance hex Attribute hex I Enor Description dec Transaction completed successfully dec Enor Error Code hex 0 No errors The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to configure a message to read a single parameter General Tab Example Value Description 1747 SDN Slot 1 The chassis slot occupied by the scanner Size of Send Data Bytes 0 Number of bytes to be sent For a read message always set to zero 0 Message Timeout 5 The time in seconds that the message must be completed DeviceNet 1 Dec The node address of the adapter connected to the drive Service Read Parameter Code for the requested service Instance 3 Dec Instance number is the same as the parameter number 1 The default setting for Service is Custom enabling entry of a Service Code not available from the Service pull down menu When choosing a Service other than Custom from the pull down menu an appropriate Hex value is automatically assigned to the Service Code box which is dimmed unavailable 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P Using Explicit Messaging 6 29 SLC 500 Controller Example Read Single Response Data In this message example we use the data table address in Figure 6 31 to store the response value 0 13 amps that was read from drive parameter 0
115. Parameter 04 DN Addr Act Description The node address used by the adapter This will be one of the following values e The address set by the rotary switches e The value of Parameter 03 DN Addr Cfg e An old address of the switches or parameter if they have been changed and the adapter has not been reset 06 DN Rate Act The data rate used by the adapter This will be one of the following values e The data rate set by the rotary switch The value of Parameter 05 DN Rate Cfg An old data rate of the switch or parameter if it has been changed and the adapter has not been reset 07 Ref Fdbk Size The size of the Reference Feedback It will either be 16 bits or 32 bits It is set in the drive and the adapter automatically uses the correct size 08 Datalink Size The size of the Datalinks It will either be 16 bits or 32 bits It is set in the drive and the adapter automatically uses the correct size 12 DN Active Cfg Source from which the adapter node address and data rate are taken This will be either 0 in which the address from Parameter 03 DN Addr Cfg and the data rate from Parameter 05 DN Rate Cfg are stored or 1 Switches The source is determined by the settings of the adapter switches 14 DPI I O Act The Reference Feedback and Datalinks used by the adapter This value is the same as Parameter 13 DPI I O Cfg unless the para
116. Peer B Input 2 2 5 Datalink A B C or D Input DL A Input IG 5 Ifthe adapter receives Logic Command set the bits in Parameter 32 Peer Cmd Mask that the drive should use The bit definitions for the Logic Command word will depend on the drive to which the adapter is connected See Appendix D or the drive documentation Port 5 Device Value Description 20 COMM D 0 Ignore this command bit Default Parameter 32 Peer Mask 1 Use this command bit 00000000000000 0 Bit 0 Boo Important If the adapter receives a Logic Command from both a Master device and a Peer device each command bit must have only one source The source of command bits set to 0 will be the Master device The source of command bits set to 1 will be the Peer device 6 Resetthe adapter see Resetting the Adapter on page 3 12 so that changes to Parameter 32 Peer Cmd Mask take effect 7 Ifthe adapter is receiving a Reference it can be scaled using Parameter 33 Peer Ref Adjust to the desired scaling factor between 0 00 199 99 personal injury note that changes to adapter Parameter 33 Peer Ref Adjust take effect immediately A drive receiving its Reference from peer I O will receive the newly scaled Reference resulting in a change of speed ATTENTION To guard against equipment damage and or 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G
117. PowerFlex 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter Allen Bradley Series FRN 2 xxx User Manual Allen Bradley Rockwell Software Automation Important User Information 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Solid state equipment has operational characteristics differing from those of electromechanical equipment Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls Publication SGI 1 1 available from your local Rockwell Automation sales office or online at_http www rockwellautomation com literature describes some important differences between solid state equipment and hard wired electromechanical devices Because of this difference and also because of the wide variety of uses for solid state equipment all persons responsible for applying this equipment must satisfy themselves that each intended application of this equipment is acceptable In no event will Rockwell Automation Inc be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of this equipment The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes Because of the many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation Rockwell Automation Inc cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation Inc with respect to use of information circu
118. RD 0x0001 Allen Bradley 11 Get NVS Checksum WORD Checksum of the Nonvolatile Storage in a device 12 Get Class Revision WORD 2 DPI 13 Get Character Set Code BYTE 0 SCANport HIM 1 ISO 8859 1 Latin 1 2 ISO 8859 2 Latin 2 3 ISO 8859 3 Latin 3 4 ISO 8859 4 Latin 4 5 ISO 8859 5 Cyrillic 6 ISO 8859 6 Arabic 7 ISO 8859 7 Greek 8 ISO 8859 8 Hebrew 9 ISO 8859 9 Turkish 10 ISO 8859 10 Nordic 255 ISO 10646 Unicode 15 Get Languages Supported STRUCT of BYTE Number of Languages BYTE n Language Codes see Class Attribute 2 16 Get Date of Manufacture STRUCT of WORD Year BYTE Month BYTE Day 17 Get Product Revision STRUCT of BYTE Major Firmware Release BYTE Minor Firmware Release 18 Get Serial Number DWORD Value between 0x00 and OxFFFFFFFF 19 Set Language Selected BYTE 0 Default HIM will prompt at start up 1 Language was selected no prompt 20 Set Customer Generated Firmware STRING 36 GUID Globally Unique Identifier identifying customer firmware flashed into the device 128 Get Customization Code WORD Code identifying the customized device 129 Get Customization Revision Number WORD Revision of the customized device 130 Get Customization Device Text STRING 32 Text identifying the customized device Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Data Type Description 3 Get Component Name STRING 32 Name of the component 4 Get Component Firmware Revision STRUCT of BYTE Majo
119. RSLinx Classic software documentation P 3 using 4 1 RSLogix 5 500 5000 software G 7 RSNetWorx for DeviceNet software configuring saving I O to ControlLogix controller 4 5 PLC 5 controller 4 21 SLC 500 controller s 1747 SDN scanner 4 32 definition website G 7 S safety precautions 1 5 scanner G 8 selecting data exchange COS Change of State 3 10 cyclic 3 10 polled I O 3 10 SLC 500 controller configuring the I O 4 31 explicit messaging 6 27 using the I O 5 32 specifications adapter A 1 DeviceNet G 3 status indicators definition G 8 locating 7 1 MOD 7 1 7 2 NET A 7 1 7 3 NET B not used 7 1 normal operation 2 8 PORT 7 1 7 2 troubleshooting with 7 2 to 7 3 understanding 7 1 switches to set data rate 2 3 node address 2 2 Index 5 T technical support P 2 tools required 1 3 troubleshooting 7 1 to 7 8 Type 0 Type 1 Type 2 Control G 8 U UCMM UnConnected Message Manager G 8 UDDT User Defined Data Type G 8 update definition G 8 guidelines 3 14 W website Connected Components Workbench software G 2 DeviceNet G 3 DriveExecutive software G 4 DriveExplorer software G 3 DriveTools SP software G 4 EDS files G 4 manuals P 2 ODVA Open DeviceNet Vendor s Association G 3 RSLogix 5 500 5000 software G 7 RSNetWorx for DeviceNet software G 7 wiring see cables Z zero data configuring the adapter for 3 11 definition G 8 20 COMM D Devi
120. SH DriveExplorer DriveExecutive or HyperTerminal software Using RSLinx Classic Software Chapter 4 Configuring the I O This chapter provides instructions on how to configure a Rockwell Automation ControlLogix PLC 5 or SLC 500 controller to communicate with the adapter and connected PowerFlex drive Topic Page Using RSLinx Classic Software 4 1 ControlLogix Controller Example 4 2 PLC 5 Controller Example 4 20 SLC 500 Controller Example 4 31 RSLinx Classic software in all its variations Lite Gateway OEM and so forth is used to provide a communication link between the computer network and controller RSLinx Classic software requires its network specific driver to be configured before communication is established with network devices To configure the RSLinx driver follow this procedure 1 Start RSLinx Classic software and select Communications gt Configure Drivers to display the Configure Drivers screen 2 From the Available Driver Types pull down menu choose DeviceNet Drivers 1784 PCD PCIDS 1770 KFD SDNPT drivers 3 Click Add New to display the DeviceNet Driver Selection screen 4 Select the computer communication card 1770 KFD 1771 SDNPT and so forth being used to connect your computer to the network and click Select 5 Configure the driver for your computer and network settings 6 Click OK 7 Inthe Add New RSLinx Driver screen use the default name or type a
121. Size sent from the Controller to the Adapter M S Input M S Output Poll Only COS Only Cyclic Only Poll amp COS Poll amp Cyclic 01011 XXXX0 12 01100 xxxxO 8 01101 XXXX0 12 01110 XXXX0 12 01111 XXXX0 16 10000 XxxxO 4 10001 xxxxO 8 10010 xxxxO 8 10011 XXXX0 12 10100 xxxxO 8 10101 XXXX0 12 10110 XXXX0 12 10111 XXXX0 16 11000 XXXX0 8 11001 XXXX0 12 11011 XXXX0 16 11100 XXXX0 12 11101 XXXX0 16 11110 XXxx0 16 11111 XxxxO 20 00000 xood 0 0 0 0 and 0 00001 XXXX1 4 4 4 4 and 0 4 and 0 00010 XXXX1 4 4 4 4 and0 4 and 0 00011 xood 8 8 8 8 0 8 and 0 00100 XXXX1 4 4 4 4 and0 4 and 0 00101 xood 8 8 8 8 and0 8 and0 00110 XXXX1 8 8 8 8 and0 8 and0 00111 XXXX1 12 12 12 12 and 0 12 and 0 01000 XXXX1 4 4 4 4 and0 4 and 0 01001 xood 8 8 8 8 0 8 and 0 01010 xood 8 8 8 8 0 8 and 0 01011 XXXX1 12 12 12 12 and 0 12 and 0 01100 xood 8 8 8 8 0 8 and 0 01101 XXXX1 12 12 12 12 and 0 12 and 0 01110 XXXX1 12 12 12 12 and 0 12 and 0 01111 xxxi 16 16 16 16and0 16and0 10000 XXXX1 4 4 4 4 and0 4 and 0 10001 xood 8 8 8 8 0 8 and 0 10010 xood 8 8 8 8 0 8 and 0 10011 XXXX1 12 12 12 12 and 0 12 and 0 10100 xood 8 8 8 8 0 8 and 0 10101 XXXX1 12 12 12 12 and 0 12 and 0 10110 xxxx1 12 12 12 12 and 0 12 and 0 10111 XXXX1 16 16 16 16 and 0 16 and 11000 xood 8 8 8 8 0 8 and 0 11001 XXXX1 12 12 12 12 and 0 12 and 0 11011 xxxi 16 16 16 16and0 16and0 11100 XXXX1 12 12 12 12 and 0 12 and 0
122. Table 5 N Program and PLC 5 Data Table Address Descriptions for Example Logic Command Reference Ladder Logic Program Program Data PLC 5 Data Description Table Address Description Table Address Command Stop B3 20 0 Drive Stop N10 1 0 Command Start B3 20 1 Drive Start N10 1 1 Command Jog B3 20 2 Drive Jog N10 1 2 Command Clear Faults B3 20 3 Drive Clear Faults N10 1 3 Command Forward Reverse B3 20 4 Drive Forward N10 1 4 Command Forward Reverse XIC B3 20 4 Drive Reverse N10 1 5 Speed Reference N30 2 Speed Reference N10 2 An example ladder logic program that uses these descriptive controller data table addresses and passes their data to the descriptive program data table addresses is shown in Figure 5 16 and Figure 5 17 Using the I O 5 31 Figure 5 16 PLC 5 Example Ladder Logic Program for Logic Status Feedback Drive Ready Status Ready N9 1 B3 1 CY gr 2 0 0 Drive Active Status Active N9 1 B3 1 JE zii 1 1 Actual Direction Status Forward N9 1 B3 1 JE COS IE 3 3 Actual Direction N9 1 B3 1 J 3 4 Drive Faulted Status Faulted N9 1 B3 zt ul 7 Drive At Speed Status At Speed N9 1 B3 1 3m C Emu 8 8 SpeedFeedback MOV Move m Source N9 2 0 lt Dest N20 2 0 lt Command Stop Drive Stop B3 20 N10 1 J C f al 2 0 0 Command Start Drive Start
123. Type XIC Execute Single Read Message BOOL MSG Single Read Message MESSAGE Figure 6 2 Example Ladder Logic to Read a Single Parameter Execute Single Read Message MSG jE Message LCEN Message Control Single Read Message CDN gt CER Using Explicit Messaging 6 5 ControlLogix Controller Formatting a Message to Read a Single Parameter Using RSLogix 5000 Software Version 15 00 or Later Figure 6 3 Parameter Read Single Message Configuration Screens Message Configuration Single Read Message Message Configuration Single Read Message Configuration Communication Tag Name Message Configuration Single Read Message Configuration Communication Tag Single_Read_Message Path My_DeviceNet_Bridge 2 1 Configuration Communication Tag Message Type cie Generic Service Type Service Code Instance 3 Enable Eror Code Eror Path Eror Text Parameter Read Q Enable Waiting Extended Eror Code il e Class ff 1 Hex Stat Done Dutput Current New Tag Done Length 0 Timed Out The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to configure a message to read a single parameter Configuration Tab Example Value Description Message Type CIP Generic Used to access the Parameter Obje
124. Unrecognized Device icon and choose Register Device The EDS Wizard appears Rockwell Software s EDS Wizard Welcome to Rockwell Software s EDS Wizard The EDS Wizard allows you to register EDS based devices unregister a device change the graphic images associated with a device create an EDS file from an unknown device To continue click Next b Click Next to start creating the EDS file c Select Create an EDS file d Click Next If the EDS file is already downloaded and resides on your computer select the Register an EDS file option and click Next Then follow the screen prompts and disregard the remaining steps in this procedure e Type a description if desired and click Next f Check the Polled box type 4 in the Input Size and Output Size boxes which accounts for just the basic I O and click Next RSNetWorx for DeviceNet software will upload the EDS file from the drive g Click Next to display the icon options for the node We recommend using the icon for the PowerFlex 7 Class drive being used You can change icons by clicking Change icon h Click Next to view a summary i Click Next again to accept it j Click Finish to finish creating the EDS file A new icon represents the PowerFlex 7 Class drive and communication adapter in the RSNetWorx for DeviceNet graph view window 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 4 8 Configuring the I O
125. X RM003 Figure 6 43 Example Single Read COP Response Data File i3 Data File N30 hex 6B 0 0 4144 DDFS 90 FFFF FFFF 1 1000 1910 210 FFFF FEFF FFFF 7FFF 0 piel N30 70 Radix Hex BCD xj Symbol Columns 10 Desc N30 Properties Usage Help 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P Using Explicit Messaging 6 39 SLC 500 Controller Example COP Message to Write a Single Parameter A write message is used to write to a single parameter This write message example writes a value of 10 0 seconds to parameter 140 Accel Time 1 in a PowerFlex 7 Class drive Table 6 R Example Single Write COP Request Data 1 e 3 Value Address Hex Dec Description N30 0 0101 257 TXID 01 Command 01 execute N30 1 0008 8 Port 00 Size 08 bytes N30 2 1001 4097 Service 10 Set_Attribute_Single Address 01 Node N30 3 0093 147 Class 93 Parameter Object N30 4 008C 140 Instance Parameter 140 N30 5 0009 9 Attribute 9 Parameter Value N30 6 0064 9 100 Parameter Value Written LSW 10 0 seconds N30 7 00009 9 Parameter Value Written MSW 0 In RSLogix 5 software leading zeros are not displayed in data file addresses For example 9008 in address N30 1 is shown as 8 Setting the data file address value to 9 will write the parameter value to the drive s Nonvolatile Storage
126. XXXX 00001 4 4 4 4and4 4and4 XXXXX 00011 8 4 4 8 and 4 8 and 4 XXXXX 00101 8 4 4 8 and 4 8 and 4 XXXXX 00111 12 4 4 12 and 4 12 and 4 XXXXX 01011 12 4 4 12 and 4 12 and 4 XXXXX 01101 12 4 4 12 and 4 12 and 4 XXXXX 01111 16 4 4 16 and 4 16 and 4 XXXXX 10001 8 4 4 8 and 4 8 and 4 XXXXX 10011 12 4 4 12 and 4 12 and 4 XXXXX 10101 12 4 4 12 and 4 12 and 4 XXXXX 10111 16 4 4 16 and 4 16 and 4 XXXXX 11001 12 4 4 12 and 4 12 and 4 XXXXX 11011 16 4 4 16 and 4 16 and 4 XXXXX 11101 16 4 4 16 and 4 16 and 4 XXXXX 11111 20 4 4 20and4 20and4 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P E 6 Master Slave I O Configuration Table E D Host Products with 32 bit Reference Feedback and Datalinks Allocation Number of Bytes Data Size sent from the Adapter to the Controller M S Input 5 Output Poll Only COS Only Cyclic Only Poll amp COS Poll amp Cyclic XXXXX 00000 0 XXXXX 00010 8 XXXXX 00100 8 XXXXX 00110 16 XXXXX 01000 8 XXXXX 01010 16 XXXXX 01100 16 XXXXX 11100 24 XXXXX 10000 8 XXXXX 10010 16 XXXXX 10100 16 XXXXX 10110 24 XXXXX 11000 16 XXXXX 11010 24 XXXXX 11100 24 XXXXX 11110 32 XXXXX 00001 8 8 8 8 and 8 8 and8 XXXXX 00011 16 8 8 16 and 8 16 and 8 XXXXX 00101 16 8 8 16 and 8 16 and 8 XXXXX 00111 24 8 8 24and8 24and8 XXXXX 01011 24 8 8 24and8 24and8 XXXXX 01101 24 8 8 24and8 24and8
127. XXXXX 01111 32 8 8 32and8 32and8 XXXXX 10001 16 8 8 16 and 8 16 and 8 XXXXX 10011 24 8 8 24and8 24and8 XXXXX 10101 24 8 8 24and8 24and8 XXXXX 10111 32 8 8 32and8 32and8 XXXXX 11001 24 8 8 24and8 24and8 XXXXX 11011 32 8 8 32and8 32and8 XXXXX 11101 32 8 8 32and8 32and8 XXXXX 11111 40 8 8 40and8 40and8 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P Glossary Adapter Devices such as drives controllers and computers usually require a network communication adapter to provide a communication interface between them and a network such as DeviceNet An adapter reads data on the network and transmits it to the connected device It also reads data in the device and transmits it to the network The 20 COMM D DeviceNet adapter connects PowerFlex 7 Class drives to a DeviceNet network Adapters are sometimes also called cards embedded communication options gateways modules or peripherals Automatic Device Replacement ADR A means for replacing a malfunctioning device with a new unit and having the device configuration data set automatically The DeviceNet scanner is set up for ADR using RSNetWorx for DeviceNet software The scanner uploads and stores a device s configuration Upon replacing a malfunctioning device with a new unit node 63 the scanner automatically downloads the configuration data and sets the node address Bridge A network device that can rout
128. a Name Value Data Type Description Scattered Write_Response INT 15 Scattered_Write_Response 0 INT Parameter Number decimal Scattered_Write_Response 1 INT Pad Word or Error Code Scattered Write Response 2 INT Pad Word always zero Scattered Write Response 3 INT Parameter Number decimal Scattered_Write_Response 4 INT Pad Word or Error Code Scattered Write Response 5 INT Pad Word always zero Scaltered Write Fiesponse 5 INT Parameter Number decimal Scaltered Wiite Response 7 INT Pad Word or Error Code Scattered Write R esponse 8 INT Pad Word always zero Scattered Write Response 3 INT Parameter Number decimal Scattered Write Response 10 INT Pad Word or Error Code Scattered Write Response 11 INT Pad Word always zero Scattered Write Response 12 7 INT Parameter Number decimal Scattered Write Response 13 INT Pad Word or Error Code Scattered Write Response 14 INT Pad Word always zero PLC 5 Controller Examples Using Explicit Messaging 6 19 To perform explicit messaging on a DeviceNet network with a PLC 5 controller a combination of a block transfer read and a block transfer write must be used Figure 6 20 Figure 6 20 PLC 5 Example Ladder Logic Program for All Explicit Messaging B3 0 B3 0 BTW J 0 Block Transfer Write CEN 0 1 Module 1771 SDN DeviceNet Scanner Module Rack 000 CDN5
129. a Out B1 100 Points to Par 100 Jog Speed 313 Data Out B2 155 Points to Par 155 Stop Mode A 314 Data Out C1 101 Points to Par 101 Preset Speed 1 315 Data Out C2 102 Points to Par 102 Preset Speed 2 316 Data Out D1 103 Points to Par 103 Preset Speed 3 317 Data Out D2 104 Points to Par 104 Preset Speed 4 20 COMM D 03 DN Addr 2 Node address for the adapter Adapter 13 DPI 1 0 Cfg xod 1111 Enables Cmd Ref and Datalinks A D 25 M S Input xxx 1111 Configures the I O Data to be transferred from the controller on the network to the drive 26 M S Output xxx1 1111 Configures the I O Data to be transferred from the drive to the controller on the network TIP Data In parameters are inputs into the drive that come from controller outputs for example data to write to a drive parameter Data Out parameters are outputs from the drive that go to controller inputs for example data to read a drive parameter TIP When using a drive that has 16 bit Datalinks PowerFlex 70 PowerFlex 700 and PowerFlex 700H drives to transfer a 32 bit parameter two contiguous drive Datalink parameters for example Data Out A1 A2 B1 B2 and so forth are required To determine if a parameter is a 32 bit parameter see the Parameter section in the drive documentation and look fora V7 symbol in the No column All parameters in PowerFlex 700 Series B drives are 32 bit parameters
130. a Table Addresses for PowerFlex 750 Series Drives Data Table Address Description N9 0 Logic Status see Appendix D N9 1 Not Used N9 2 Speed Feedback LSW N9 3 Speed Feedback MSW N9 4 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 905 Data Out A1 LSW N9 5 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 905 Data Out A1 MSW N9 6 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 906 Data Out A2 LSW N9 7 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 906 Data Out A2 MSW N9 8 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 907 Data Out B1 LSW N9 9 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 907 Data Out B1 MSW N9 10 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 908 Data Out B2 LSW N9 11 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 908 Data Out B2 MSW N9 12 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 909 Data Out C1 LSW N9 13 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 909 Data Out C1 MSW N9 14 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 910 Data Out C2 LSW N9 15 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 910 Data Out C2 MSW N9 16 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 911 Data Out D1 LSW N9 17 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 911 Data Out D1 MSW N9 18 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 912 Data Out D2 LSW N9 19 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 912 Data Out D2 MSW N10 0 Logic Command see Appendix D N10 1 Not Used N10 2 Speed Re
131. adapter Using COS Change of State Data Exchange 1 Set Bit 0 the Logic Command Reference bit in Parameter 13 DPI T O Config to 1 Enabled and Bit 0 the Logic Status Feedback bit in Parameter 26 M S Output to 1 Enabled Changes to bits in the Logic Status Feedback trigger messages in COS data exchange Port 5 Device Port 5 Device 20 COMM D 20 COMM D Parameter 13 Parameter 26 DPI I O Cfg M S Output XXXXXXXXXXX0 00 Of XXXXXXXXXXX0 0 0 Cmd Ref b00 Status Fdbk b00 2 Set Parameter 27 COS Status Mask for the bits in the Logic Status word that should be checked for changes The bit definitions for the Status Mask will depend on the drive to which the adapter is connected See Appendix D or the drive documentation Port 5 Device Value Description 20 COMM D 0 Ignore this logic bit Default Parameter 27 m COS Status Mask 1 Use this logic bit XXXXXXXXXXX000 Of Bit 0 b00 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P Setting a Fault Action Configuring the Adapter 3 11 3 Set Parameter 28 COS Fdbk Change for the amount of change to the Feedback that is required to trigger a Change of State message Port 5 Device Default 0 20 COMM D Parameter 28 COS Fdbk Change 0 lt gt 4294967295 The adapter is now configured for COS data exchange You must configure the scanner to allo
132. adapter does not transmit messages on the network too often thus minimizing network traffic It is set using Parameter 42 Peer Out Time The maximum interval ensures that the adapter transmits messages often enough so that the receiving adapters can receive recent data and verify that communication is working or if communication is not working can timeout The maximum interval is the value of Parameter 42 Peer Out Time multiplied by the value of Parameter 43 Peer Out Skip 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P Configuring the Adapter 3 7 In this example the minimum interval is set to 2 00 seconds Parameter 42 Peer Out Time and the maximum interval is set to 4 00 seconds 2 00 x 2 setting of Parameter 43 Peer Out Skip Port 5 Device Port 5 Device 20 COMM D 20 COMM D Parameter 42 Parameter 43 Peer Out Time Peer Out Skip 2 00 0 lt gt 10 00 1 lt gt 16 Default 10 00 s Default 1 5 Set Parameter 41 Peer Out Enable to 1 On The adapter will transmit the data selected in Parameters 39 Peer A Output and 40 Peer B Output to the network Another adapter must be configured to receive the peer I O data Setting the Adapter to Receive Peer to Peer Data Important The device receiving peer data must match the data sizes of the sending device For example if the sending device uses a 16 bit Reference the receivi
133. al Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 5 26 Using the I O PowerFlex 700S PowerFlex 700L with 700S Control PowerFlex 750 Series and PowerFlex Digital DC Drives When using any of these drives which contain both DINT 32 bit format and REAL floating point format data types you will always read from and write to the LSW data table address in the controller first Then if the data value exceeds 16 bits the remaining value will be in the MSW data table address Table 5 1 5 Data Table Addresses for PowerFlex 7005 Drives Phase Control Data Table Address Description N9 0 1771 SDN Scanner Status Word see its User Manual for bit definitions N9 1 Logic Status see Appendix D N9 2 Not Used N9 3 Speed Feedback LSW N9 4 Speed Feedback MSW N9 5 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 724 725 Data Out A1 LSW N9 6 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 724 725 Data Out A1 MSW N9 7 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 726 727 Data Out A2 LSW N9 8 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 726 727 Data Out A2 MSW N9 9 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 728 729 Data Out B1 LSW N9 10 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 728 729 Data Out B1 MSW N9 11 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 730 731 Data Out B2 LSW N9 12 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 730 731 Data Out B2
134. alog 204B4P4 Enhanced option Revision 3002 EE cot s or Click the Parameter tab to display the Parameters screen If the EDS Editor dialog box appears asking to upload the configuration from the drive to the software configuration click Upload Depending on the type of drive the upload may take several minutes to complete 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 4 16 Configuring the I O 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 4 With the parameter list showing set the various Data In and Data Out parameters In this example the Datalinks are set to the values shown in Table 4 D 5 Click OK If the EDS Editor dialog box appears asking to download the configuration to the drive from the software configuration click Yes After the download is completed the PowerFlex 70 EC Drive Properties screen closes Using the DeviceNet Tag Generator to Create Descriptive Controller Tags Optional DeviceNet controller tags are non descriptive for I O configurations in RSLogix 5000 projects However the DeviceNet Tag Generator a free Rockwell software tool can generate descriptive controller tags for basic control I O words Logic Command Status and Reference Feedback and Datalinks Additionally Datalinks automatically take the name of the drive parameter to which they are assigned Important The DeviceNet Tag Generator will
135. ameters Details Default Values Type Reset Required Values Type Default Default Values Type Reset Required Default Values Type Reset Required Default Minimum Maximum Type Reset Required Default Minimum Maximum Type Reset Required B 7 0 Off 0 Off 1 On Read Write No 0 Off 1 Waiting 2 Running 3 Faulted Read Only 0 Off 0 Off 0 Off 1 Cmd Ref 2 Datalink A Input 3 Datalink B Input 4 Datalink C Input 5 Datalink D Input 6 Datalink A Output 7 Datalink B Output 8 Datalink C Output 9 Datalink D Output Read Write No 0 Off 0 Off 1 On Read Write No 10 00 Seconds 0 01 Seconds 10 00 Seconds Read Write No 1 1 16 Read Write No 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 8 Adapter Parameters Notes 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P Appendix DeviceNet Objects This appendix presents information about the DeviceNet objects that can be accessed using Explicit Messages For information on the format of Explicit Messages and example ladder logic programs see Chapter 6 Using Explicit Messaging Object Class Code Page Object Class Code Page Hex Dec Hex Dec Identity Object 0x01 1 C 2 DPI Device Object 0x92 146 11 Connection Object 0x04 4 C 3 DPI Paramete
136. anual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 22 DeviceNet Objects DPI Time Object Class Code Hexadecimal Decimal Ox9B 155 Services Service Code Implemented for Service Name Class Instance Ox0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 Yes Yes Set_Attribute_Single Instances The number of instances depends on the number of timers in the device Instance 1 is always reserved for a real time clock although a device may not support it The total number of timers can be read in Instance 0 Attribute 2 Instances Hex Dec Device Example Description 0x0000 0x3FFF 0 16383 Host 0 Class Attributes Drive 0x4000 0x43FF 16384 17407 Adapter 1 Real Time Clock Predefined not always supported 0x4400 0x47FF 17408 18431 DPI Port 1 2 Timer 1 0x4800 0x4BFF 18432 19455 DPI 2 3 Timer 2 4 19456 20479 Port 3 0x5000 0x53FF 20480 21503 DPI Port 4 0x5400 0x57FF 21504 22527 DPI Port 5 0x5800 0xX5BFF 22528 23551 Port 6 Class Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 1 Get Class Revision WORD Revision of object 2 Get Number of Instances WORD Number of timers in the object excluding the real time clock that is predefined 3 Get First Device Specific Timer WORD Instance of the first timer that is not predefined 4 Set Time Command Write BYTE 0 No Opera
137. anual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 6 30 Using Explicit Messaging SLC 500 Controller Formatting a Message to Write a Single Parameter Using Read Write Parameter Service Figure 6 33 Write Parameter Message Configuration Screen r4 DEM N14 0 70 Elements inl Send Data Receive Data This Controller 1747 SDN Slot 1 Size of Send Data Bytes Target Device Message Timeout x1 sec E DeviceNet Addr Message Control Bits Abort 0 Error ER p Done 1 Enabled 0 Waiting for Slot WS p Scanner Status Service Wite Parameter Service Code hex Saas coetus 1 Class Instance hex Attribute hex Enor Description No errors dec Transaction completed successfully deck Error dec Error Code hex 0 The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to configure a message to write a single parameter General Tab Example Value Description 1747 SDN Slot 1 The chassis slot occupied by the scanner Size of Send Data Bytes 2 Number of bytes to be sent written Two bytes equal a 16 bit integer word Message Timeout 5 The time in seconds that the message must be completed DeviceNet 1 Dec The node address of the adapter connected to the drive Service 1 Write Parameter Code for the requested service Instance 140 Dec Instance number is the same as the parameter number 1 The defa
138. arameter 25 M S Input This parameter determines the data received from the master by the drive A 1 enables the I O and a 0 disables the I O Port 5 Device 20 COMM D Parameter 25 M S Input XXXXXXXXXXX0 0 0 Of Cmd Ref b00 Bit Description Logic Command Reference Default Datalink A Input Datalink B Input Datalink Input Datalink D Input o 15 Not Used Bit 0 is the right most bit It is highlighted above and equals 1 Set the bits in Parameter 26 M S Output This parameter determines the data transmitted from the drive to the scanner A 1 enables the I O and a 0 disables the I O Port 5 Device 20 COMM D Parameter 26 M S Output XXXXXXXXXXX0 00 Of Status Fdbk b00 Bit Description Status Feedback Default Datalink A Output Datalink B Output Datalink C Output Datalink D Output 0 1 2 3 4 5 19 Not Used Bit 0 is the right most bit It is highlighted above and equals 1 4 Reset the adapter see Resetting the Adapter on page 3 12 The adapter is ready to receive I O from the master that is scanner You must now configure the scanner to recognize and transmit I O to the adapter See Chapter 4 Configuring the I O 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 3 6 Configuring the Adapter Setting the A
139. ard control e PowerFlex 700H drives DWORD Output I O 0 Logic Command LSW Reference MSW 1 Datalink In A1 LSW Datalink In A2 MSW 2 Datalink In B1 LSW Datalink In B2 MSW 3 Datalink In C1 LSW Datalink In C2 MSW 4 Datalink In D1 LSW Table 5 B Datalink In D2 MSW DWORD e SMC Flex smart motor controllers e SMC 50 smart motor controllers Input I O Logic Status LSW Feedback MSW Datalink Out A1 LSW Datalink Out A2 MSW 2 Datalink Out B1 LSW Datalink Out B2 MSW 3 Datalink Out C1 LSW Datalink Out C2 MSW 4 Datalink Out D1 LSW Datalink Out D2 MSW ControlLogix Controller I O Image for Drives with 16 bit Reference Feedback and 32 bit Datalinks These products include the following e PowerFlex 700 drives with vector control e PowerFlex 700L drives with 700 control DWORD Output I O 0 Logic Command LSW Reference MSW 1 Datalink In A1 LSW Datalink In 1 MSW 2 Datalink In A2 LSW Datalink In A2 MSW 3 Datalink In B1 LSW Datalink In B1 MSW 4 Datalink In B2 LSW Datalink In B2 MSW 5 Datalink In C1 LSW Datalink In C1 MSW 6 Datalink In C2 LSW Datalink In C2 MSW 7 Datalink In D1 LSW Datalink In D1 MSW 8 Datalink In D2 LSW Datalink In D2 MSW e PowerFlex Digital DC drives DWORD Input I O 0 Log
140. are version 2 01 or later DriveExecutive software version 3 01 or later Switches to set a node address and network data rate before applying power to the PowerFlex drive or you can disable the switches and use adapter parameters to configure these functions Status indicators that report the status of the drive communications the adapter and network They are visible when the drive cover is open or closed Parameter configured I O Logic Command Reference and up to four pairs of Datalinks to accommodate application requirements Explicit Messaging and UCMM Unconnected Message Manager support Multiple data exchange methods Polled Cyclic and Change of State to transmit data between the network and adapter Master Slave or Peer to Peer hierarchy that can be set up so that the adapter and connected PowerFlex drive transmit data to and from either a scanner or another PowerFlex drive on the network User defined fault actions to determine how the adapter and connected drive respond to the following messaging communication disruptions Comm FIt Action Controllers in idle mode Idle Action Compatible Products Required Equipment Getting Started 1 3 e Faulted node recovery support You can configure a device even when it is faulted on the network if you have a configuration tool that uses faulted node recovery and have set the data rate switch to Program The adapter then uses paramete
141. ation 750 INO01 ex 750 Series Drive Programming Manual publication 750 PMO001 ex 20 750 DNET DeviceNet Option Module publication 750COM UM002 20COMM and 20 750COMM F1 Communication Carrier Cards Installation Instructions cation 750COM INO01 Information on installing and programming PowerFlex 750 Series AC drives PowerF ex Digital DC Drive User Manual publication 20P UM001 Information on installing and programming PowerFlex Digital DC drives Getting Results with RSLinx Guide publication LINX GR001 and online help Information on using RSLinx Classic software RSLogix Emulate 5 500 Getting Results Guide publication 2 and online help Information on installing and navigating the RSLogix Emulate software for ladder logic programming with Allen Bradley PLC 5 and SLC 500 processors RSLogix 500 Getting Results Guide publication LG500 GR002 and online help 9 Information on using the RSLogix 500 software tool RSLogix 5000 PIDE Autotuner Getting Results Guide publication PIDE GR001 and online help 1 Information on using the RSLogix 5000 software tool RSNetWorx for DeviceNet Getting Results Guide publication DNET GROO1 and online help Information on installing and navigating the RSNetWorx for DeviceNet software effectively using it and accessing and navigating the online help DeviceNet Network Configuration User Manual publication DNET UM004 I
142. ation representative New Product Satisfaction Return Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number call the phone number above to obtain one to your distributor to complete the return process Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure Documentation Feedback Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better Ifyou have any suggestions on how to improve this document complete this form publication RA DU002 available at http www rockwellautomation com literature Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret A S Kar Plaza Is Merkezi E Blok Kat 6 34752 erenk y stanbul Tel 90 216 5698400 www rockwellautomation com Power Control and Information Solutions Headquarters Americas Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee WI 53204 2496 USA Tel 1 414 382 2000 Fax 1 414 382 4444 Europe Middle East Africa Rockwell Automation Pegasus Park De Kleetlaan 12a 1831 Diegem Belgium Tel 32 2 663 0600 Fax 32 2 663 0640 Asia Pacific Rockwell Automation Level 14 Core Cyberport 3 100 Cyberport Road Hong Kong Tel 852 2887 4788 Fax 852 2508 1846 Publicat
143. ave or Peer to Peer Hierarchy Selecting COS Cyclic or Polled I O Setting a Fault Action Resetting the Adapter Viewing the Adapter Status Using Parameters Updating the Adapter Firmware Configuring the I O Using RSLinx Classic Software ControlLogix Controller Example PLC 5 Controller Example SLC 500 Controller Example Setting the Node Address Switches Setting the Data Rate Switch Connecting the Adapter to the Drive Connecting the Adapter to the Network Applying Table of Contents 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P ii Table of Contents Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Chapter 7 Chapter 8 Appendix A Appendix B Using the I O About I O Messaging selle e Understanding the I O Image sssseeeeeeeeeee Using Logic Command Status 2 0 0 0 enn eens Using Reference Feedback eA AN ep ep Using Datalink cok ete ee See ne E RE e En Example Ladder Logic Program Information ControlLogix Controller Example 2 0 0 eee ect eh PLC 5 Controller Example p menner einean ann e e a cece eens SLC 500 Controller Example 0 rarae Using Explicit Messaging About Explicit Messaging lesse Performing Explicit Messaging eee ControlLogix Controller Examples lel PLC 5 Controller Examples cie
144. ax Speed the speed Reference Feedback scaling is equal to parameter 82 Max Speed Parameter 82 Scaling Using the parameter 82 default value speed Reference Feedback scaling is 0 32767 0 60 0 Hz 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 5 8 Using the I O 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P If parameter 82 Maximum Speed is changed to 90 Hz then 90 Hz 32767 Speed Feedback uses the same scaling as the speed Reference TIP For PowerFlex 700 drives with vector control firmware 3 xxx or later parameter 299 DPI Fdbk Select enables you to select the feedback data coming from the drive over DPI The default is Speed Fdbk in Hz or RPM determined by parameter 079 Speed Units The data selection for parameter 299 is also displayed on the Ist line of the HIM and on DriveExplorer and DriveExecutive software screens in the drive status area of the screen PowerFlex 700S and PowerFlex 700L Drives with 700S Control The Reference Feedback value is 32767 Base Motor Speed The base speed is set using drive parameter 4 Motor RPM To set a speed Reference Feedback above base speed a value greater than 32767 must be entered For 16 bit processors such as PLC 5 and SLC 500 controllers the data requires manipulation to set a speed Reference above 32767 or below 32767 Please see the PowerFlex 700S AC Drives Phase II Control Reference Man
145. back least significant word N41 2 Reference most significant word Feedback most significant word N41 3 Datalink A1 least significant word Datalink A1 least significant word N41 4 Datalink A1 most significant word Datalink A1 most significant word N41 5 Datalink A2 least significant word Datalink A2 least significant word N41 6 Datalink A2 most significant word Datalink A2 most significant word N41 7 Datalink B1 least significant word Datalink B1 least significant word N41 8 Datalink B1 most significant word Datalink B1 most significant word N41 9 Datalink B2 least significant word Datalink B2 least significant word N41 10 Datalink B2 N41 11 Datalink C1 N41 12 Datalink C1 N41 13 Datalink C2 N41 14 Datalink C2 most significant word least significant word Datalink B2 most significant word Datalink C1 least significant word most significant word Datalink C1 most significant word least significant word Datalink C2 least significant word most significant word Datalink C2 most significant word N41 15 Datalink D1 least significant word Datalink D1 least significant word N41 16 Datalink D1 most significant word Datalink D1 most significant word N41 17 Datalink D2 least significant word Datalink D2 least significant word N41 18 Datalink D2 most significant word Datalink D2 most significant word N42 This N file lets you read and write some values configuring th
146. bject Class code 0x93 and attribute A 10 decimal see page 6 11 This writes to RAM not NVS EEPROM memory This example single write message using Class code F writes to NVS Over time continuous writes will exceed the EEPROM life cycle and cause the drive to malfunction Using Explicit Messaging 6 9 ControlLogix Controller Formatting a Message to Write a Single Parameter Using RSLogix 5000 Software Version 15 00 or Later Figure 6 7 Parameter Write Single Message Configuration Screens Message Configuration Single_Write_Message Configuration Communication Tag Name Message Configuration Single_Write_Message Configuration Communication Tag Single_Write_Message Path My DeviceNet Bridge 2 1 Message Configuration Single Write Message Configuration Communication Message Type cip Generic Service Type Service Code 0D Instance Parameter Write 140 Source Length Hex Class Attribute Source Element Accel Time 1 Bytes New Tag Enable Enable Waiting Eror Code Eror Path Eror Text Start Extended Error Code Done Done Length 0 Timed Out ok Cancel The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to configure a message to write a single parameter Configuration Tab Message Type Service
147. bled 1 1 0 Enabled Type Read Write Reset Required Yes ink D Input ink C Input ink B Input ink A Input Definition 8 8 2 PIP IPIBIS zls d elo loivs ivo allg z zizioaijnouuo Default X X x 0 0 0 0 1 Bit 7T 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Parameter No Name and Description 26 27 28 29 30 31 M S Output Sets the Master Slave output data This data is produced by the adapter and consumed by the Master device for example scanner COS Status Mask Sets the mask for the 16 bit Logic Status word Unless they are masked out the bits in the Logic Status word are checked for changes when the adapter is allocated using COS Change of State If a bit changes it is reported as a change in the Change of State operation If the mask bit is 0 Off the bit is ignored If the mask bit is 1 On the bit is checked Important The bit definitions in the Logic Status word will depend on the drive See Appendix D or the documentation for the drive being used COS Fdbk Change Sets the hysteresis band to determine how much the Feedback word can change before it is reported as a change in the COS Change of State operation COS Cyc Interval Displays amount of time that a scanner will wait to check for data in the adapter When COS Change of State data exchange has been set up this is the maximum amount of time between scans Scans will occur sooner if
148. buffer upload e o e The Explicit Message is complete For information on the maximum number of Explicit Messages that can be executed at a time see the documentation for the scanner and or controller that is being used 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 6 4 Using Explicit Messaging ControlLogix Controller Examples 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P TIP To display the Message Configuration screen in RSLogix 5000 software add a message instruction MSG create a new tag for the message Properties Base tag type MESSAGE data type controller scope and click the button in the message instruction For supported classes instances and attributes see Appendix C DeviceNet Objects Read a Single Parameter ControlLogix Controller Example Ladder Logic Program to Read a Single Parameter Using RSLogix 5000 Software Version 15 00 or Later A Parameter Read message is used to read a single parameter This read message example reads the value of parameter 003 Output Current in a PowerFlex 7 Class drive Important Parameter Object Class code OxOF is not supported in PowerFlex 750 Series drives To do a single parameter read follow the RSLogix 5000 software any version single read example on page 6 7 Table 6 B Example Controller Tags to Read a Single Parameter Operand Controller Tags for Single Read Message Data
149. cannot access for example the Host parameters in a 24V I O option module in Port 5 See DPI Parameter Object on page C 13 for instance parameter numbering 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P Performing Explicit Messaging Using Explicit Messaging 6 3 There are five basic events in the Explicit Messaging process The details of each step will vary depending on the type of controller being used See the documentation for your controller Important There must be a request message and a response message for all Explicit Messages whether you are reading or writing data Figure 6 1 Explicit Message Process Set up and send Explicit o Message Request Complete Explicit A e Message s F Lo 4 Retrieve Explicit le o Message Response A aoe uU eS Event Description You format the required data and set up the ladder logic program to send an Explicit Message request to the scanner or bridge module download The scanner or bridge module transmits the Explicit Message Request to the slave device over the network The slave device transmits the Explicit Message Response back to the scanner The data is stored in the scanner buffer The controller retrieves the Explicit Message Response from the scanner s
150. cate it using COS See Chapter 4 Configuring the I O for details By default when I O communication is disrupted for example a cable is disconnected or the controller is idle in program mode or faulted the drive responds by faulting if it is using I O from the network You can configure a different response to these faults e Disrupted I O communication by using Parameter 10 Comm Action e Anidle controller by using Parameter 11 Idle Action Parameters 10 Comm Action and 11 Idle Action let you determine the action of the adapter and connected drive if I O communication is disrupted or the controller is idle By default these parameters fault the drive You can set these parameters so that the drive continues to run however precautions should be taken to verify that the settings of these parameters do not create a risk of injury or equipment damage When commissioning the drive verify that your system responds correctly to various situations for example a disconnected cable or faulted controller ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists Changing the Fault Action Set the values of Parameters 10 Comm Action and 11 Idle Action to an action that meets your application requirements Value Action Description 0 Fault The drive is faulted and stopped Default 1 Stop The drive is stopped but not faulted 2 Zero Data The drive is sent
151. cation before applying power to the drive Install the drive cover or close the drive door and apply power to the drive The adapter receives its power from the connected drive When you apply power to the adapter for the first time its topmost PORT status indicator should be steady green or flashing green after an initialization If it is red there is a problem See Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Start Up Status Indications Status indicators for the drive and communication adapter can be viewed on the front of the drive Figure 2 6 after power has been applied Possible start up status indications are shown in Table 2 A Figure 2 6 Drive and Adapter Status Indicators location on drive may vary PoRT O O __ nerao NETB O OOOOO OOO OD OOOOO OOOOO P Allen Bradley 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P Installing the Adapter 2 9 Table 2 A Drive and Adapter Start Up Status Indications ltem Name Color State Description Drive STS Indicator STS Green Flashing Drive ready but not running and no faults are present Status Steady Drive running no faults are present Yellow Flashing An inhibit condition exists the drive cannot be drive stopped started Check drive Parameter 214 Start Inhibits Flashing An intermittent type 1 alarm c
152. ceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P Index 6 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P Rockwell Automation Support Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At http www rockwellautomation com support you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit http www rockwellautomation com support For US Allen Bradley Drives Technical Support Tel 1 262 512 8176 Fax 1 262 512 2222 Email support drives ra rockwell com Online www ab com support abdrives Installation Assistance If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation review the information that is contained in this manual You can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running United States or Canada 1 440 646 3434 Outside United States or Use the Worldwide Locator at http www rockwellautomation com support americas phone_en html or contact Canada your local Rockwell Autom
153. click the tab for the option module at the bottom of the window click the Parameters icon in the tool bar and open the Host parameters folder e DriveExplorer software find the option module in the treeview and open its Parameters folder e DriveExecutive software find the option module in the treeview expand the module in the tree and open its Parameters folder Idle Action An idle action determines how the adapter and connected drive act when the controller is switched out of run mode T O Data I O data sometimes called implicit messages or input output is time critical data such as a Logic Command and Reference The terms input and output are defined from the controller s point of view Output is produced by the controller and consumed by the adapter Input is produced by the adapter and consumed by the controller Logic Command Logic Status The Logic Command is used to control the PowerFlex 7 Class drive for example start stop and direction It consists of one 16 bit word of output to the adapter from the network The definitions of the bits in this word depend on the drive and are shown in Appendix D 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P G 6 Glossary 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P The Logic Status is used to monitor the PowerFlex 7 Class drive for example operating state and motor direction It consists o
154. creen Enter Module Addresses Internal Name Description Address Required BTRControl Block Transfer Read control block Required BTWControl Block Transfer Write control block Required InputD ata Read data block Optional OutputD ata Write data block Optional Auto Pick a In the Enter Module Addresses screen enter unique block transfer read and write control block addresses in the Address column For this example BT11 0 is used for the block transfer read and BT11 1 is used for the block transfer write b c Using the 5 21 For the input data and output data rows enter the corresponding N files that were used in configuring the I O see step 10 b on page 4 26 For this example N9 0 is used for the input data and N10 0 is used for the output data After the Address column has been configured click Done 8 When the Monitor message screen appears click Yes The 1771 SDN at RGS 0 0 0 screen appears L 1771 SDN at RGS 0 0 0 a Module 1771 SDN Type DeviceNet Scanner Module PLC EXAMPLE R G S 0 0 0 Close Insert Ladder Rungs Description DeviceNet Scanner Module Data Format Data Signed Decimal C ReadData ReadLength 62 Unsigned Decimal it ES wri Write Length 62 C HewBCD Wiite Data Symbol Description Address ata Write data block N10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Set the Read Length and Write Length fie
155. ct in the adapter Service Type 1 Parameter Read This service is used to read a parameter value Service Code e Hex Code for the requested service Class f Hex Class ID for the DPI Parameter Object Instance 2 3 Dec Instance number is the same as parameter number Attribute 1 Hex Attribute number for the Parameter Value attribute Destination Output Current 6 The tag where the data that is read is stored Communication Tab Example Value Description Path My_DeviceNet_Bridge The path is the route that the message will follow Tag Tab Example Value Description Name Single_Read_Message The name for the message 1 The default setting for Service Type is Custom enabling entry of a Service Code not available from the Service Type pull down menu When choosing a Service Type other than Custom from the pull down menu an appropriate Hex value is automatically assigned to the Service Code box which is dimmed unavailable Only drive parameters Port 0 can be read using Parameter Object Class code OxOF To read a parameter of a peripheral in another port use DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 see page 6 6 9 Click Browse to find the path or type in the name of the device listed in the Configuration folder 0 In this example Output Current is a 32 bit integer parameter requiring the Data Type field to be set to DINT when creating the controller tag If the parameter being read is a 16
156. d The drive has refused an I O connection from the Important Cycle power to the drive or adapter if mounted in a DPI adapter External Comms Kit after making any of the following corrections Another DPI peripheral is using the same DPI e Verify that all DPI cables on the drive are securely connected and not port as the adapter damaged Replace cables if necessary e Verify that the DPI drive supports Datalinks e Configure the adapter to use a Datalink that is not already being used by another peripheral Steady Orange The adapter is connected to a product that does Connect the adapter to a product that supports Allen Bradley DPI not support Allen Bradley communications communications for example a PowerFlex 7 Class drive Flashing Green The adapter is establishing an I O connection to No action required Normal behavior if no DPI I O is enabled the drive Steady Green The adapter is properly connected and is No action required communicating with the drive MOD Status Indicator This red green bicolor LED indicates the status of the adapter as shown in the table below Status Cause Corrective Action Off The adapter is not powered or is not properly e Securely connect the adapter to the drive using the Internal Interface connected to the drive ribbon cable e Apply power to the drive or adapter if mounted in a DPI External Comms Kit Flashing Red The adapter has failed the firmware tes
157. d being transmitted to the drive by this adapter from the controller 3 Reference The present value of the Reference being transmitted to the drive by this adapter Note that a 16 bit value will be sent as the Most Significant Word of the 32 bit field 4 Common Logic Sts The present value of the Common Logic Status being received from the drive by this adapter 5 Prod Logic Sts The present value of the Product Logic Status being received from the drive by this adapter from the controller 6 Feedback The present value of the Feedback being received from the drive by this adapter Note that a 16 bit value will be sent as the Most Significant Word of the 32 bit field 7 Datalink A1 In The present value of respective Datalink In being transmitted to the 8 Datalink A2 In drive by this adapter If not using a Datalink this parameter should have a value of zero 9 Datalink B1 In 10 Datalink B2 In 11 Datalink C1 In 12 Datalink C2 In 13 Datalink D1 In 14 Datalink D2 In Troubleshooting 7 5 Table 7 Adapter Diagnostic Items Continued No Name Description 15 Datalink A1 Out The present value of respective Datalink Out being received from the Or 17 Datalink B1 Out and the most significant 16 bits of this diagnostic item are zero 18 Datalink B2 Out 19 Datalink C1 Out 20 Datalink C2 Out 21 Datalink D1 Out 22
158. d for Speed Sel 1 2 or 3 option 15 16 or 17 Note that Reference Select is Exclusive Ownership see drive User Manual for more information 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P D 2 Logic Command Status Words Logic Bits Logic Status Word 15 14 13 Status Ready Description 0 Not Ready Par 214 1 Ready Active 0 Not Active Running 1 Active Command Direction 0 Reverse 1 Forward Actual Direction 0 Reverse 1 Forward Accel 0 Not Accelerating 1 Accelerating Decel 0 Not Decelerating 1 Decelerating Alarm 0 No Alarm Par 211 and 212 1 Alarm Fault 0 No Fault Par 243 1 Fault At Speed 0 Not At Reference 1 At Reference Local Control 000 Port 0 TB 001 Port 1 010 Port 2 011 Port 3 100 Port 4 101 Port 5 110 Port 6 111 Local 1 See Owners in drive User Manual for further information 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P Reference 0000 Ref A Auto Par 90 0001 Ref B Auto Par 93 0010 Preset 2 Auto 0011 Preset 3 Auto 0100 Preset 4 Auto 0101 Preset 5 Auto 0110 Preset 6 Auto 0111 Preset 7 Auto 1000 Term Blk Manual 1001 DPI 1 Manual 1010 DPI 2 Manual 1011 DPI 3 Manual 1100 DPI 4 Manual 11
159. dapter parameters begin with parameter RSNetWorx for DeviceNet software 01 For example Parameter 01 DPI Port is Connected Components Workbench software parameter 01 as indicated by this manual e DriveExplorer software e DriveExecutive software Explicit Messaging See Chapter 6 Using Explicit Messaging and Appendix C DeviceNet Objects for details Parameter No Name and Description Details 01 DPI Port Minimum 0 7 Displays the port to which the adapter is connected This will usually be port 5 Type Read Only 02 DPI Data Rate Values 0 125 kbps Displays the data rate used by the drive This data ma Uie ue i rate is set in the drive and the adapter detects it ype 03 DN Addr Cfg Default 63 Sets the DeviceNet node address used by the UE 0 adapter if the Data Rate switch is set to PGM ax mum 63 Program Type Read Write Reset Required Yes 04 DN Addr Act Minimum 0 63 Displays the actual DeviceNet node address used j by the adapter Type Read Only 05 DN Rate Cfg Default 3 Autobaud Sets the DeviceNet data rate at which the adapter Values 0 7 x b communicates if the Data Rate switch is set to 2 7 50 hos PGM Program Updates Parameter 06 DN 3 Rate Act after a reset dos Read Write Reset Required Yes 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 2 Adapter Parameters
160. dapter to Transmit Peer to Peer Data Drive to Drive Communication 1 Verify that Parameter 41 Peer Out Enable is set to 0 Off This parameter must be Off while you configure peer output parameters Port 5 Device Value Setting 20 COMM D 0 Off Default Parameter 41 Peer Out Enable on 2 Set Parameter 39 Peer A Output to select the source of the data to output to the network Port 5 Device Value Description 20 COMM D 0 Off Default Parameter 39 Peer A Output 1 Logic Command Reference 1 2 5 Datalink A B C or D Input 6 9 Datalink A B C or D Output Cmd Ref Important When transmitting a 32 bit Reference or 32 bit Datalink only Peer A Output will be available Peer B Output cannot be used 3 If desired set Parameter 40 Peer B Output to select an additional source of the data to output to the network Port 5 Device Value Description 20 COMM D 0 Off Default Parameter 40 f 1 Li Ref Peer B Output ogic Command Reference 2 2 5 Datalink A B C or D Input DL A Input 6 9 Datalink A B C or D Output 4 Set Parameters 42 Peer Out Time and 43 Peer Out Skip to establish the minimum and maximum intervals between Peer messages Because the adapter transmits Peer messages when a change of state condition occurs minimum and maximum intervals are required The minimun interval ensures that the
161. data changes When Cyclic data exchange has been set up this interval is the fixed time between scans This interval is the heartbeat rate configured in the scanner Peer A Input Peer B Input Sets the destination of the peer I O input The adapter receives this data from the network and sends it to the drive Important Changes to these parameters are ignored when Parameter 37 Peer Inp Enable is T On Important Parameter 31 Peer B Input cannot be used when a 32 bit Datalink or Reference is used in Parameter 30 Peer A Input Adapter Parameters B 5 Details Default xxx0 0001 Bit Values 0 I O Disabled 1 I O Enabled Type Read Write Reset Required Yes Bit Definition ink D Output ink C Output ink B Output ink A Output Used Used Used al al al Default Bit x e gt lt No o of Dai oj Da o Da Default 0000 0000 0000 0000 Minimum 0000 0000 0000 0000 Maximum 1111 1111 1111 1111 Values 0 Ignore bit 1 Check bit Type Read Write Reset Required No Default 0 Minimum 0 Maximum 4294967295 Type Read Write Reset Required No Minimum 0 0 seconds Maximum 655 35 seconds Type Read Only Default 0 Off Default 0 Off Values 0 Off 1 Cmd Ref 2 Datalink A Input 3 Datalink B Input 4 Datalink C Input 5 Datalink D Input Type Read Write Res
162. e Figure 8 6 shows inputs that are valid and all on and Figure 8 7 shows inputs that are valid and all off zero Figure 8 6 Valid Inputs All On Datalink Out D1 Word 1514131211109 876543210 32831 decimal 11010100 0 0 0 0 1011111111111 Status MNI Figure 8 7 Valid Inputs All Off Datalink Out D1 Word Bit 1514131211109 8 7 6 5 4 32 1 0 32768 decimal 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Status MN Communications Electrical Mechanical Appendix A Specifications This appendix presents the specifications for the adapter Topic Page Communications A 1 Electrical A 1 Mechanical A 1 Environmental A 2 Regulatory Compliance 2 Network Protocol DeviceNet Data Rates 125K 250K 500K Autobaud and PGM Program Connection Limits 30 TCP connections 16 simultaneous CIP messaging connections including 1 exclusive owner I O connection Requested Packet Interval RPI 5 ms minimum Packet Rate Up to 400 total I O packets per second 200 in and 200 out Drive Protocol DPI Data Rates 125 kbps or 500 kbps Consumption Drive 150 mA at 5V DC supplied by the host drive or DPI External Comms Kit Network 60 mA at 24V DC supplied by the network Use the 60 mA value to size the network current draw from the power supply Dimensions Height 19 mm 0 75 inches
163. e EX4MPLE Platform Processor Series Memory Cancel Ethemet PLCS 40E Iul E 2000 Files E xtended Forci v 491 52 x Help Revision D Communication settings Driver Processor Node Reply Timeout Ethernet v f peanae Who ctive 10 Sec Octal 3 Assign a name for the processor 4 From the pull down menus choose the appropriate choices to match your PLC 5 controller and application Important Note that for this example the processor being used has direct Ethernet communication capability DeviceNet always uses a dedicated module for example 1771 SDN scanner and so forth which cannot be used for a direct PLC 5 processor connection Therefore this example screen shows an Ethernet configuration 5 Click OK The RSLogix 5 project window appears Creating Logic for Communication Between the 1771 SDN Scanner and PLC 5 Processor To transmit read and write data between the 1771 SDN DeviceNet scanner and PLC 5 processor you must create message instructions that allocate data table addresses in the controller By doing the following configuration RSLogix 5 software automatically creates the needed logic rungs for this communication 1 In the RSLogix 5 project treeview left pane double click IO Configuration to display the I O Configuration Chassis Table screen 1077 Configuration Chassis Table Chassis Type Adapter Inh Red ps E Rack Group Span Complementary 17
164. e the upper word bits 16 31 of the Logic Command and Logic Status words are not accessible and cannot be used Only when using a PowerFlex 750 Series drive with a 20 750 DNET DeviceNet communication option module is the upper word accessible and used Logic Command Word Logic Bits 31 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 21 1 0 Command Description Normal Stop 0 Not Normal Stop 1 Normal Stop X Start 7 0 Not Start 1 Start x Jog 1 2 0 Not Jog 1 Par 556 1 Jog 1 X Clear Fault 9 0 Not Clear Fault 1 Clear Fault xX x Unipolar 00 No Command Direction 01 Forward Command 10 Reverse Command 11 Hold Direction Control X Manual 0 Not Manual 1 Manual X Reserved X x Accel Time 00 No Command 01 Use Accel Time 1 Par 535 10 Use Accel Time 2 Par 536 11 Use Present Time xX Xx Decel Time 00 No Command 01 Use Decel Time 1 Par 537 10 Use Decel Time 2 Par 538 11 Use Present Time X Ref Select 1 000 No Command X RefSelect2 001 Ref A Select Par 545 Ref Select 3 010 Ref B Select Par 550 are 011 Preset 3 Par 573 100 Preset 4 Par 574 101 Preset 5 Par 575 110 Preset 6 Par 576 111 Preset 7 Par 577 X Reserved A Not Stop condition logic bit 0 0 must first be present before a 1 Start condition will start the drive A Not Stop condition logic bit 0 0
165. e adapter and drive will take if the adapter detects that peer I O communication has been disrupted This setting is effective only if l O is transmitted through the adapter A Default Values 0 Fault 0 Fault 1 Stop 2 Zero Data 3 Hold Last 4 Send Fit Cfg Type Read Write Reset Required No ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists Parameter 34 Peer Fit Action lets you determine the action of the adapter and connected drive if the adapter is unable to communicate with the designated peer By default this parameter faults the drive You can set this parameter so that the drive continues to run however precautions should be taken to verify that the setting of this parameter does not create a risk of injury or equipment damage When commissioning the drive verify that your system responds correctly to various situations for example a disconnected cable Peer Node to Inp Sets node address of the node producing the peer 1 0 Important A change to this parameter is ignored when Parameter 37 Peer Inp Enable is 1 On Peer Inp Timeout Sets the time out for a Change of State peer I O connection If the time is reached without the adapter receiving consuming a message the adapter will respond with the action specified in Parameter 34 Peer Flt Action On a slave drive this parameter should be set to the value calculated as follows Master Parameter 42 Peer O
166. e if the Datalink parameter is a 16 bit or 32 bit parameter 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 5 10 Using the I O 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P PowerFlex 700S PowerFlex 700L with 700S Control PowerFlex 753 755 and PowerFlex Digital DC Drives Datalinks require scaling in the following way Parameters are either 16 bit or 32 bit integers or REALs When the parameter is a 32 bit integer the data needs to be copied using a COP command to a DINT tag Because PLC 5 and SLC 500 controllers do not support 32 bit integers the data must be separated into two 16 bit integers When the parameter is a REAL the data needs to be copied using a COP command to a REAL tag See subsequent sections in this chapter for ladder logic examples See the drive documentation to determine if the Datalink parameter is a 16 bit or 32 bit integer parameter or a REAL parameter Using 16 Bit Datalinks to Read Write 32 Bit Parameters This subsection only pertains to PowerFlex 70 standard or enhanced control PowerFlex 700 standard control and PowerFlex 700H drives which use 16 bit Datalinks To read or write a 32 bit parameter using 16 bit Datalinks typically both Datalinks of a pair A B C D are set to the same 32 bit parameter For example to read parameter 10 Elapsed Run Time in a PowerFlex 70 drive both Datalink 1 Out Parameter 310 and Datalink A2 Out Parameter
167. e in the scanlist must be for the 1756 DNB scanner to match its compatibility for I O operation The more boxes that are checked the more specific the device must be to operate For this example keep the default boxes Device Type Vendor and Product Code checked Configuring the I O 4 11 d Click Edit I O Parameters to display the Edit I O Parameters screen for the PowerFlex 70 EC drive used in this example Edit 1 0 Parameters 01 PowerFlex 70 EC 240 4 2A ag Strobed f Change of State Cyclic Input Size 4 Bytes e r Input Size Bytes Polled Output Size Bytes Input Size 4 E Bytes Heartbeat Rate msec Output Size 4 a Bytes PollRate Scan v Cancel Restore 1 0 Sizes Select the type of data exchange Polled Change of State and or Cyclic For this example we selected and recommend Polled f For the Input Size and Output Size boxes use the pull down menus to choose the number of bytes that are required for your I O The size will depend on the drive s Reference Feedback and the number of Datalinks used in your I O enabled with adapter Parameter 13 DPI I O Cfg and the selected data exchange method A 16 bit word is two bytes and a 32 bit word is four bytes For this example an Input Size of 20 and an Output Size of 20 are used Important Make sure that the bits for Parameters 25 M S Input and 26 M S Output are set to match Pa
168. e is power cycled Important When set to 9 the EEPROM may quickly exceed its life cycle and cause the drive to malfunction Setting the Attribute value to A 10 decimal will write the parameter value to temporary memory which deletes the parameter value after the drive is power cycled When frequent write messages are required we recommend using the A 10 decimal setting 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P Using Explicit Messaging 6 35 SLC 500 Controller Example Request Data for DEM Write Single Message In this message example we use the data table address in Figure 6 40 to store the request value 10 0 sec that was written to drive parameter 140 Accel Time 1 In this example Accel Time 1 is a 16 bit parameter The most significant word MSW is not used For PowerFlex 7005 drives Accel Time 1 is a floating point number To manipulate REAL data into two 16 bit registers see the Communications section in Chapter 1 of the PowerFlex 7005 AC Drives Phase II Control Reference Manual publication Figure 6 40 Example Request Data File for DEM Write SIngle Message Z Data File N14 dec DER 0 0 0 0 0 0 1412 Radix Decimal _ Symbol Columns 10 Desc 4 Properties Usage Help 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 6 36 Using Explicit Messaging SLC 500 Controller Examp
169. e messages from one network to another A bridge also refers to a communication module in a ControlLogix controller that connects the controller to a network See also Scanner Bus Off A bus off condition occurs when an abnormal rate of errors is detected on the Control Area Network CAN bus in a device The bus off device cannot receive or transmit messages on the network This condition is often caused by corruption of the network data signals due to noise or data rate mismatch CAN Controller Area Network CAN is a serial bus protocol on which DPI is based Change of State COS I O Data Exchange A device that is configured for Change of State I O data exchange transmits data at a specified interval if its data remains unchanged If its data changes the device immediately transmits the change This type of exchange can reduce network traffic and save resources since unchanged data does not need to be transmitted or processed CIP Common Industrial Protocol CIP is the transport and application layer protocol used for messaging over EtherNet IP ControlNet and DeviceNet networks The protocol is used for implicit messaging real time I O and explicit messaging configuration data collection and diagnostics 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P G 2 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P Glossary Class A class is defined by the DeviceNet specification
170. e navigating to devices that are on a DeviceNet network Depending on the communication link you are using the navigation path may be different Browse for network Select a communications path to the desired network Autobowse I Workstation USMEQOMWISNIE2 d Linx Gateways Ethernet Bs ControlNet ControlNet 00 1747 SON Scanner Module 01 PowerFlex 7D EC 2401 4 24 EJ 62 Workstation DeviceNet Bs Ethernet Ethernet Bs EtherNet IP Ethernet ds Serial Data Highway Plus dg USB Data Highway Plus 7 After selecting a valid path to the DeviceNet network for this example A DeviceNet click OK As the selected DeviceNet path is browsed RSNetWorx for DeviceNet software creates a graph view window that shows a graphical representation of the devices on the network 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 4 34 Configuring the I O DeviceNet RSNetWorx for DeviceNet DER Eile Edit View Network Device Diagnostics Tools Help 2152 8181 je Eig eL Hardware 1747 SDN PowerFlex 70 Scanner 240V 42A Module Barcode Scanner Communication Adapter DPI to DeviceNet 00 01 _ DSI to DeviceNet DeviceNet Safety Scanner J DeviceNet to SCANport H4 M Graph Spreadsheet 14 gt TE 9 26 2007 14 24 44 Mode changed to online The online path is USMEQDMWISN Messages If the ic
171. e number 876 in the Parameter field of the example is the parameter in the drive that points to the port Commissioning the Adapter To commission the adapter you must set a unique node address on the network See Setting the Node Address on page 3 3 and the Glossary for details about node addresses Important New settings for some adapter parameters are recognized only when power is applied to the adapter or it is reset After you change parameter settings cycle power or reset the adapter 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P Configuration Tools Chapter 3 Configuring the Adapter This chapter provides instructions and information for setting the parameters to configure the adapter Topic Page Configuration Tools 3 1 Using the PowerFlex 7 Class to Access Parameters 3 2 Setting the Node Address 3 3 Setting the Data Rate 3 3 Setting the I O Configuration 3 4 Selecting Master Slave or Peer to Peer Hierarchy 3 5 Selecting COS Cyclic or Polled I O 3 10 Setting a Fault Action 3 11 Resetting the Adapter 3 12 Viewing the Adapter Status Using Parameters 3 13 Updating the Adapter Firmware 3 14 For a list of parameters see Appendix B Adapter Parameters For definitions of terms in this chapter see the Glossary The adapter stores parameters and other information in its own nonvolatile storage NVS memory You must therefore
172. e of parameter assigned to Parameter 316 Data Out D1 MSW N9 17 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 317 Data Out D2 LSW N9 18 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 317 Data Out D2 MSW N10 0 1771 SDN Scanner Command Word see its User Manual for bit definitions N10 1 Logic Command see Appendix D N10 2 Speed Reference N10 3 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 300 Data In A1 LSW N10 4 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 300 Data In A1 MSW N10 5 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 301 Data In A2 LSW N10 6 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 301 Data In A2 MSW N10 7 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 302 Data In B1 LSW N10 8 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 302 Data In B1 MSW N10 9 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 303 Data In B2 LSW N10 10 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 303 Data In B2 MSW N10 11 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 304 Data In C1 LSW N10 12 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 304 Data In C1 MSW N10 13 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 305 Data In C2 LSW N10 14 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 305 Data In C2 MSW N10 15 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 306 Data In D1 LSW N10 16 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 306 Data In D1 MSW N10 17 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 307 Data In D2 LSW N10 18 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 307 Data In D2 MSW 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manu
173. e port N42 3 Time out read write Time in seconds allowed between messages to the N41 file If the adapter does not receive a message in the specified time it performs the fault action configured in its Comm Fit Action parameter A valid setting is between 1 and 32767 seconds 5 20 seconds is recommended N42 7 Adapter Port Number read only DPI port on the drive to which the adapter is connected N42 8 Peer Adapters read only Bit field of devices having DPI Peer capabilities 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P DPI Device Object DeviceNet Objects Class Code Hexadecimal Decimal 0x92 146 Services Service Code Implemented for Service Name Class Instance Ox0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 Yes Yes Set_Attribute_Single Instances The number of instances depends on the number of components in the device The total number of components can be read in Instance 0 Class Attribute 4 Instances Hex Dec Device Example Description 0x0000 0x3FFF 0 16383 Host 0 Class Attributes Drive 0x4000 0x43FF 16384 17407 Adapter 1 Drive Component 1 0x4400 0x47FF 17408 18431 DPI Port 1 2 Drive Component 2 0x4800 0x4BFF 18432 19455 DPI Port 2 4 19456 20479 DPI Port 3 16384 Class Attributes Adapter 0x5000 0x53FF 20480 21503 DPI Port 4 1
174. e updated using various Allen Bradley software tools See Updating the Adapter Firmware on page 3 14 for more information Zero Data When communication is disrupted for example a cable is disconnected the adapter and drive can respond with zero data Zero data results in the drive receiving zero as values for Logic Command Reference and Datalink data If the drive was running and using the Reference from the adapter it will stay running but at zero Reference Numerics 5 pin linear plug 2 7 A adapter applying power 2 8 commissioning 2 10 compatible products 1 3 components 1 1 configuration tools 3 1 configuring to use with optional I O data 8 3 connecting to the drive 2 4 network 2 7 data rate 2 3 definition G 1 features 1 2 firmware updating 3 14 grounding 2 6 installation 2 1 to 2 10 mounting on the drive 2 6 node address 2 2 parameters B 1 to B 7 resetting 3 12 specifications A 1 using in a DPI External Comms Kit 8 1 viewing its status 3 13 viewing optional I O diagnostic items 8 4 applying power to the adapter 2 8 attentions 1 5 Automatic Device Replacement ADR G 1 baud rate see data rate bit definitions of Logic Command Status word for PowerFlex 70 700 700H and 700L with 700 Control drives D 1 PowerFlex 7005 Phase II Control and 700L with 700S Control drives D 3 PowerFlex 750 Series drives D 5 PowerFlex Digital DC drives D 7 bridge G 1 bus off
175. ears a Navigate to a folder b Type a file name c Click Save to save the configuration as a file on your computer 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 4 42 Configuring the I O Notes 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P About I O Messaging Chapter 5 Using the I O This chapter provides information and examples that explain how to control configure and monitor a PowerFlex 7 Class drive using the configured I O Topic Page About I O Messaging 5 1 Understanding the I O Image 5 2 Using Logic Command Status 5 6 Using Reference Feedback 5 6 Using Datalinks 5 9 Example Ladder Logic Program Information 5 11 ControlLogix Controller Example 5 12 PLC 5 Controller Example 5 19 SLC 500 Controller Example 5 32 ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists The A examples in this publication are intended solely for purposes of example There are many variables and requirements with any application Rockwell Automation does not assume responsibility or liability to include intellectual property liability for actual use of the examples shown in this publication On CIP based networks including DeviceNet I O connections are used to transfer the data which controls the PowerFlex drive and sets its Reference I O can also be used to transfer data to and from Datalinks in PowerFlex 7 Class drives The
176. end Data Bytes 0 Number of bytes to be sent For a read message always set to zero 0 Message Timeout 5 The time in seconds that the message must be completed DeviceNet Addr 1 Dec The node address of the adapter connected to the drive Service Generic Get Attribute Single Code for the requested service Class 93 Hex Class ID for the DPI Parameter Object Instance 3 Dec Instance number is the same as the parameter number Attribute 9 Dec Attribute number for the Parameter Value attribute 1 The default setting for Service is Custom enabling entry of a Service Code not available from the Service pull down menu When choosing a Service other than Custom from the pull down menu an appropriate Hex value is automatically assigned to the Service Code box which is dimmed unavailable 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P Using Explicit Messaging 6 33 SLC 500 Controller Example Response Data for DEM Read Single Message In this message example we use the data table address in Figure 6 37 to store the response value 0 13 amps that was read from drive parameter 003 Output Current In this example Output Current is a 32 bit parameter For PowerFlex 700S or PowerFlex 750 Series drives Output Current is a floating point number To manipulate REAL data into a proper Float tag see the Communications section in Chapter 1 of the PowerFlex 7005 AC Drives Phase II Co
177. ensures that data is updated at an appropriate rate for the application preserves bandwidth for rapidly changing devices and allows data to be sampled at precise intervals for better determinism Data Rate The speed at which data is transferred on the DeviceNet network The available data rates depend on the type of cable and total cable length used on the network Maximum Cable Length Cable 125K 250K 500K Thick Trunk Line 500 m 1 640 ft 250 m 820 ft 100 m 328 ft Thin Trunk Line 100 m 328 ft 100 m 328 ft 100 m 328 ft Maximum Drop Length 6 m 20 ft 6 m 20 ft 6 m 20 ft Cumulative Drop Length 156 m 512 ft 78 m 256 ft 39 m 128 ft Each device on a DeviceNet network must be set for the same data rate The DeviceNet adapter can be set to 125K 250K or 500K Or it can set to Autobaud if another device on the network has set the data rate Glossary G 3 Datalinks A Datalink is a type of pointer used by PowerFlex 7 Class drives to transfer data to and from the controller Datalinks allow specified parameters to be read or written to without using explicit messages When enabled each Datalink consumes either four bytes or eight bytes in both the input and output image table of the controller The drive determines the size of Datalinks DeviceNet Network An open producer consumer Controller Area Network CAN which connects devices for example controllers drives and motor starters
178. ents that the device can record in its queue 3 Set Fault Command Write BYTE 0 No Operation 1 Clear Fault Event 2 Clear Fault Event Queue 3 Reset Device 4 Get Fault Trip Instance Read WORD Fault that tripped the device For adapters this value is always 1 when faulted 5 Get Fault Data List STRUCT of Reserved BYTE BYTE WORD n 6 Get Number of Recorded Faults WORD Number of faults events in the queue A 0 indicates the fault queue is empty 7 Get Fault Parameter Reference WORD Reserved 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P C 18 DeviceNet Objects Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access Data Type Description 0 Get Full All STRUCT of Information WORD Fault code STRUCT of Fault source BYTE DPI port BYTE DPI Device Object STRING 16 Fault text STRUCT of Fault time stamp LWORD Timer value 0 timer not supported BOOL 16 0 invalid data 1 valid data BOOL 1 0 elapsed time 1 real time BOOL 2 15 Not used WORD Reserved CONTAINER n Reserved 1 Get Basic STRUCT of Information WORD Fault code STRUCT of Fault source BYTE DPI port BYTE DPI Device Object STRUCT of Fault time stamp LWORD Timer value 0 timer not supported BOOL 16 BOOL O0 0 invalid data 1 valid data 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P BOOL 1 0 elapsed time 1 real time BO
179. er click Yes 17 Click File gt Save If this is the first time you saved the project the Save As dialog box appears a Navigate to a folder b Type a file name c Click Save to save the configuration as a file on your computer SLC 500 Controller Example After the adapter is configured the connected drive and adapter will be a single node on the network This section provides the steps needed to configure a simple DeviceNet network see Figure 4 3 In our example we will configure a SLC 500 controller with 1747 SDN scanner to communicate with a drive using Logic Command Status Reference Feedback and Datalinks over the network Figure 4 3 SLC 500 Controller Example DeviceNet Network Node 62 Node 1 Computer with Node 0 PowerFlex 70 Drive with DeviceNet Connection SLC 5 05 Controller 20 COMM D Adapter m with 1747 SDN 6 61 lef Configuring Parameters for Network I O Because the I O for the drive is defined in the next subsection Use RSNetWorx for DeviceNet to Configure and Save the I O to the Controller on page 4 32 there is no need to configure any I O inside the RSLogix 500 project version 7 20 or later until using the I O as described in Chapter 5 However to get the adapter to operate with the I O created in Chapter 5 you need t
180. er Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P The I O configuration determines the data that is sent to and from the drive Logic Command Status Reference Feedback and Datalinks may be enabled or disabled Datalinks allow you to read write directly to parameters in the drive using implicit I O A 1 enables the I O and a 0 disables the I O 1 5 Set the bits in Parameter 13 DPI I O Cfg Port 5 Device Bit Description 20 COMM D 0 Logic Command Reference Default Parameter 13 DPI I O 1 Datalink A XXXXXXXXXXX000 Of 2 Datalink B Cmd Ref b00 3 Datalink C 4 Datalink D 5 15 Not Used Bit 0 is the right most bit It is highlighted above and equals 1 If a controller is used to control the drive set adapter Parameters 25 M S Input and 26 M S Output for Master Slave Hierarchy For details see Setting a Master Slave Hierarchy Scanner to Drive Communication on page 3 5 If Logic Command Reference is enabled configure the parameters in the drive to accept the Logic Command and Reference from the adapter For example set Parameter 90 Speed Ref A Sel in a PowerFlex 70 or 700 drive to 22 DPI Port 5 so that the drive uses the Reference from the adapter Also verify that the mask parameters for example Parameter 276 Logic Mask in the drive are configured to receive the desired logic from the adapter See the documentation for your drive fo
181. er User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P When this box is checked clicking OK opens additional module properties screens to further configure the scanner When unchecked clicking OK closes the scanner s New Module screen For this example uncheck this box Configuring the I O 4 5 10 Click OK The scanner is now configured for the DeviceNet network and added to the RSLogix 5000 project It appears in the I O Configuration folder In our example a 1756 DNB scanner appears under the I O Configuration folder with its assigned name 1 0 Configuration 9 1756 Backplane 1756 A7 fa 0 1756 163 v16 Example using 20COMMD 3 9 3 1756 DNB My_DeviceNet_Scanner Za DeviceNet For convenience keep the project open Later in this chapter the project will need to be downloaded to the controller Use RSNetWorx for DeviceNet Software to Configure and Save the I O to the Scanner After adding the scanner to the I O configuration you now must configure and save the I O to the scanner 1 Start RSNetWorx for DeviceNet software 2 Inthe RSNetWorx for DeviceNet window select File gt New to display the New File screen 3 Select DeviceNet Configuration as the network configuration type 4 Click OK 5 Select Network gt Online to display the Browse for Network screen Browse for network Select a communications path to the desired network Wie omen Es Workstation USMEQDMWISNIE2 m Linx Ga
182. er values in a user set in NVS 4 Get NVS Link Value Checksum WORD Checksum of parameter links in a user set in NVS 5 Get First Accessible Parameter WORD First parameter available if parameters are protected by passwords A 0 indicates all parameters are protected 7 Get Class Revision WORD 2 DPI 8 Get First Parameter Processing Error WORD The first parameter that has been written with a value outside of its range A 0 indicates no errors 9 Set Link Command BYTE 0 No Operation 1 Clear All Parameter Links This does not clear links to function blocks 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P C 14 DeviceNet Objects Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access Data Type Description 7 Get DPI Online Read Full STRUCT of BOOL 32 Descriptor see page C 15 CONTAINER Parameter value CONTAINER Minimum value CONTAINER Maximum value CONTAINER Default value WORD Next parameter WORD Previous parameter STRING 4 Units for example Amp Hz UINT Multiplier 2 UINT Divisor UINT Base 2 INT Offset 2 BYTE 3 Link source of the value 0 no link BYTE Always zero 0 STRING 16 Parameter name 8 Get DPI Descriptor BOOL 32 Descriptor see page C 15 9 Get Set DPI Parameter Value Various Parameter value NVS 9 10 Get Set DPI RAM Parameter Value Various Parameter value in temporary memory 11 Get Set DPI Link BYTE 3 Link para
183. ers in a PowerFlex 7 Class drive PowerFlex 7 Class Drive Parameter Write Value 141 Accel Time 2 11 1 Sec 148 Decel Time 2 22 2 Sec 105 Preset Speed 5 33 3 Hz 106 Preset Speed 6 44 4 Hz 107 Preset Speed 7 55 5 Hz See DPI Parameter Object on page C 13 Class Code 0x93 for parameter numbering Important See Table 6 A on page 6 2 for limitations of PowerFlex 7 Class and PowerFlex 750 Series drives when using DPI Parameter Class code 0x93 for explicit messaging Table 6 G Example Controller Tags to Write Multiple Parameters Operand Controller Tags for Write Multiple Message Data Type XIC Execute_Scattered_Write_Message BOOL MOV Scattered_Write_Request_Internal_Use_Only 0 SINT 31 COP Scattered Write Request 0 INT 15 MSG Scattered Write Message MESSAGE Figure 6 16 Example Ladder Logic to Write Multiple Parameters Execute Scattered Write Message MOV 3E Move Source 0 Dest Scattered Write Request Internal Use 0 0e COP Copy File Source Scattered Write Request 0 Dest Scattered Write Request Internal Use 1 Length 30 MSG Message EN Message Control Scattered Write Message CDND CER2 TIP The MOV Move and COP Copy instructions are required to convert the data into the necessary data types and to align the data into a usable display format Important If the explicit message scatte
184. es in Appendix E Table 4 E Drives with 16 bit Reference Feedback and 16 bit Datalinks These products include the following e PowerFlex 70 drives with standard or enhanced control e PowerFlex 700 drives with standard control e SMC Flex smart motor controllers e SMC 50 smart motor controllers e PowerFlex 700H drives Logic Ref Fdbk Datalinks 16 bit User Configured Settings a p Pato Par 25 Par 26 Input Output DPI I O Cfg M S Input M S Output 4 4 0 0001 0 0001 0 0001 v v v 8 8 0 0011 0 0011 0 0011 v v vv 12 12 00111 00111 00111 v v 16 16 0 1111 0 1111 01111 v v V viviwv 2o 20 11111 11111 11111 Table 4 F Drives with 16 bit Reference Feedback and 32 bit Datalinks These products include the following e PowerFlex 700 drives with vector control PowerFlex Digital DC drives e PowerFlex 700L drives with 700 control Logic Ref Fdbk Datalinks 32 bit User Configured Settings a 16 bit ile elo Size in Bytes Par 13 Par 25 Par 26 Input Output DPI I O Cfg M S Input M S Output v v 4 4 0 0001 0 0001 0 0001 v v v 12 12 0 0011 0 0011 0 0011 v v vv 20 20 00111 00111 00111 v v 28 28 0 1111 0 1111 01111 v v 36 36 4 1111 4 1111 1 1111 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publicatio
185. et d EtherNet IP Ethernet 225 Serial Data Highway Plus 85 USB Data Highway Plus 7 After selecting a valid path to the DeviceNet network for this example A DeviceNet click OK As the selected DeviceNet path is browsed RSNetWorx for DeviceNet software creates a graph view window that shows a graphical representation of the devices on the network 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P Configuring the I O 4 23 DeviceNet RSNetWorx for DeviceNet DER Fle Edit View Network Device Diagnostics Tools Help als ulss c 4 Ln ai Hardware 1771 SDN PowerFlex 70 DeviceNet Scanner EC240V 42A Category Module ML AC Drive Barcode Scanner Communication Adapter DPI to DeviceNet 00 01 DSI to DeviceNet DeviceNet Safety Scanner DeviceNet to SCANport gt H 2 Graph 4 Spreadsheet 14 Date Description 9 4 2007 11 46 09 Mode changed to online The online path is USMEQDMWISN Messages If the icon for the drive for this example PowerFlex 70 EC on the network appears as Unrecognized Device either use RSNetWorx for DeviceNet software to create the appropriate drive EDS file or download the EDS file from the Rockwell Automation website Creating the EDS File from Online DeviceNet Network a Right click the Unrecognized Device icon and choose Regi
186. et Required No 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P B 6 Adapter Parameters Parameter No Name and Description 32 33 34 35 36 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P Peer Cmd Mask Sets the mask for the Logic Command word when it is received through peer input If the mask bit is 0 Off the command bit is ignored and not used If the mask bit is 1 On the command bit is checked and used Important If the adapter receives a Logic Command from both a Master device and a peer device each command bit must have only one source The source of command bits set to 0 will be the Master device The source of command bits set to 1 will be the peer device Peer Ref Adjust Sets the percent scale factor for the Reference received from a peer Details Default 0000 0000 0000 0000 Minimum 0000 0000 0000 0000 Maximum 1111 1111 1111 1111 Values 0 Ignore bit 1 Check bit Type Read Write Reset Required Yes Default 0 0096 Minimum 0 00 Maximum 199 99 Type Read Write Reset Required No ATTENTION To guard against equipment damage and or personal injury note A that changes to Parameter 33 Peer Ref Adjust take effect immediately A drive receiving its Reference from peer will receive the newly scaled Reference resulting in a change of speed Peer Action Sets the action that th
187. eter 25 M S Input has the following five configurable bits Figure E 1 Parameter 25 M S Input Bits and Corresponding I O Datalink B Datalink C Datalink A Datalink D Cmd Ref 0 Peer or other input 0000 1 Master Slave input When you enable Cmd Ref or Datalink in the adapter you must set the corresponding bit in Parameter 25 M S Input if you want the input data to come from the scanner or master device Table E A and Table E B list possible configurations for Parameter 25 M S Input and the possible data size allocation associated with each value depending on the data exchange method Table E A Host Products with 16 bit Reference Feedback and Datalinks Allocation Number of Bytes Data Size sent from the Controller to the Adapter M S Input 5 Output Poll Only COS Only Cyclic Only amp COS amp Cyclic 00000 XXXX0 0 00001 XXXX0 4 00010 XXXX0 4 00011 XXXX0 8 00100 XXXX0 4 00101 XXXX0 8 00110 XXXX0 8 00111 XXXX0 12 01000 XXXX0 4 01001 XXXX0 8 01010 XxxxO 8 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 2 Master Slave I O Configuration Table E A Host Products with 16 bit Reference Feedback and Datalinks Continued Allocation Number of Bytes Data
188. eter Number verification N30 74 0000 0 Pad Word 0 successful or Error Code N30 75 0000 0 Pad Word 0 always zero N30 76 008F 143 Parameter Number verification N30 77 0000 0 Pad Word 0 successful or Error Code N30 78 0000 0 Pad Word 0 always zero N30 79 0069 105 Parameter Number verification N30 80 0000 0 Pad Word 0 successful or Error Code N30 81 0000 0 Pad Word 0 always zero N30 82 006A 106 Parameter Number verification N30 83 0000 0 Pad Word 0 successful or Error Code N30 84 0000 0 Pad Word 0 always zero N30 85 006B 107 Parameter Number verification N30 86 0000 0 Pad Word 0 successful or Error Code N30 87 0000 0 Pad Word 0 always zero 1 n RSLogix 5 software leading zeros are not displayed in data file addresses For example 0024 in address N30 71 is shown as 24 Figure 6 49 Example Scattered Write COP Response Data File Data File N30 hex 1E CCOl 0 8F 0 0 0 0 0 0 4144 DDFS F7FF FFFF FFFF 1 1000 1910 210 FFFF FEFF FFFF 0 100 7FFF 0 EE N30 70 Radix Hex BCD x Symbol Columns 10 Desc Response Data for Explicit Message N30 E Properties Usage Help Understanding the Status Indicators Troubleshooting Chapter 7 This chapter provides information for diagnosing and troubleshooting potential problems with the adapter and network
189. exists The adapter contains electrostatic discharge ESD sensitive parts that can be damaged if you do not follow ESD control procedures Static control precautions are required when handling the adapter If you are unfamiliar with static control procedures see Guarding Against Electrostatic Damage publication 8000 4 5 2 ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists If the adapter is transmitting control I O to the drive the drive may fault when you reset the adapter Determine how your drive will respond before resetting an adapter ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists Parameters 10 Comm Action 11 Idle Flt Action and 34 Peer Flt Action let you determine the action of the adapter and connected drive if communication is disrupted or the controller is idle By default these parameters fault the drive You can set these parameters so that the drive continues to run however precautions should be taken to verify that the settings of these parameters do not create a risk of injury or equipment damage When commissioning the drive verify that your system responds correctly to various situations for example a disconnected cable or a faulted controller ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists When a system is configured for the first time there may be unintended or incorrect machine motion Disconnect the motor from the machine or process during initial system testing ATTENTION R
190. f one 16 bit word of input from the adapter to the network The definitions of the bits in this word depend on the drive and are shown in Appendix D Master Slave Hierarchy An adapter configured for a master slave hierarchy exchanges data with the master device Usually a network has one scanner which is the master device and all other devices for example drives connected to DeviceNet adapters are slave devices On a network with multiple scanners called a multimaster hierarchy each slave device must have a scanner specified as a master Node Address A DeviceNet network can have as many as 64 devices connected to it Each device on the network must have a unique node address between 0 and 63 Node address 63 is the default used by uncommissioned devices Node addresses are sometimes called MAC IDs NVS Nonvolatile Storage NVS is the permanent memory of a device Devices such as the adapter and drive store parameters and other information in NVS so that they are not lost when the device loses power NVS is sometimes called EEPROM Objects The DeviceNet specification defines an object as abstract representation of a particular component within a product PCCC Programmable Controller Communications Command PCCC is the protocol used by some controllers to communicate with devices on a network Some software products for example DriveExplorer and DriveExecutive software also use PCCC to communicate
191. f the available communication modules Select Module 1756 CNBR D 1756 1756 DHRIO B 1756 DHRIO C 1756 DHRIO D 1756 DNB 1756 EN2F A 1756 ENZT A 1756 ENBT A 1756 ENET A 1756 ENET B 1756 EWEB A 1756 SYNCH A Description 1756 ControlNet Bridge Redundant Media 1756 ControlNet Bridge Redundant Media 1756 DH Bridge RIO Scanner 1756 DH Bridge RIO Scanner 1756 DH Bridge RIO Scanner 1756 DeviceNet Scanner 1756 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Bridge Fiber Media 1756 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Bridge Twisted Pair Media 1756 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Bridge Twisted Pair Media 1756 Ethernet Communication Interface 1756 Ethernet Communication Interface 1756 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Bridge w Enhanced Web Services SynchLink Interface Vendor Allen Bradley A Allen Bradley Allen Bradley Allen Bradley Allen Bradley Allen Bradley Allen Bradley Allen Bradley Allen Bradley Allen Bradley Allen Bradley Allen Bradley Allen u v gt Find Add Favorite Favorites 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 4 4 Configuring the I O 5 In the list select the DeviceNet scanner used by your controller In this example we use a 1756 DNB DeviceNet Scanner so the 1756 DNB option is selected 6 Click OK 7 In the Select Major Revision pop up dialog box select the major revision of its firmware 8 Click OK The scanner s New Module screen appears New Module 1756 DNB 1756
192. factory default settings 3 12 PCCC Programmable Controller Communications Command G 6 PCCC object C 8 Peer A Input parameter B 5 Peer A Output parameter B 7 Peer B Input parameter B 5 Peer B Output parameter B 7 Peer Cmd Mask parameter B 6 Peer Fit Action parameter B 6 Peer Inp Enable parameter B 7 Peer Inp Status parameter B 7 Peer Inp Timeout parameter B 6 Peer Node to Inp parameter B 6 Peer Out Enable parameter B 7 Peer Out Skip parameter B 7 Peer Out Time parameter B 7 Peer Ref Adjust parameter B 6 Peer to Peer hierarchy configuring adapter to receive data 3 7 to transmit data 3 6 definition G 6 ping G 6 PLC 5 controller configuring the I O 4 20 explicit messaging 6 19 using the I O 5 19 Polled configuring adapter for 3 10 definition G 7 PORT status indicator locating 7 1 troubleshooting with 7 2 power consumption A 1 PowerFlex drives compatible with adapter 1 3 definition G 7 HIM 3 2 installing adapter on 2 4 preparing for an installation 2 1 processor see controller producer consumer network G 7 programmable logic controller see controller Q quick start 1 6 R Ref Fdbk Size parameter B 2 Reference Feedback definition G 7 in I O image for ControlLogix controller 5 2 PLC 5 and SLC 500 controllers 5 4 using 5 6 Register object C 4 regulatory compliance A 2 related documentation P 2 Reset Module parameter B 2 ribbon cable see Internal Interface cable
193. ference LSW N10 3 Speed Reference MSW N10 4 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 895 Data In A1 LSW N10 5 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 895 Data In A1 MSW N10 6 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 896 Data In A2 LSW N10 7 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 896 Data In A2 MSW N10 8 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 897 Data In B1 LSW N10 9 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 897 Data In B1 MSW N10 10 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 898 Data In B2 LSW N10 11 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 898 Data In B2 MSW N10 12 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 899 Data In C1 LSW N10 13 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 899 Data In C1 MSW N10 14 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 900 Data In C2 LSW N10 15 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 900 Data In C2 MSW N10 16 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 901 Data In D1 LSW N10 17 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 901 Data In D1 MSW N10 18 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 902 Data In D2 LSW N10 19 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 902 Data In D2 MSW Using the Table 5 T SLC 500 Data Table Addresses for PowerFlex Digital DC Drives Data Table Address Description N9 0 Logic Status see Appendix D N9 1 Speed Feedback LSW N9 2 Speed Feedback MSW N
194. fg determines the node address We recommend not to use the default node address 63 because all new devices on the network use this address as the default address Also node address 63 is used for Automatic Device Recovery ADR 1 Set the value of Parameter 03 DN Addr Cfg to a unique node address Port 5 Device Default 63 20 COMM D Parameter 03 DN Addr Cfg 0 lt gt 63 2 Reset the adapter see Resetting the Adapter on page 3 12 When the node address is correctly configured and the adapter is connected to an operational network the NET A status indicator should be steady green or flashing green If the adapter Data Rate switch Figure 2 2 is set to PGM Program the value of Parameter 05 DN Rate Cfg determines the data rate The default Autobaud setting will detect the data rate used on the network if another device is setting the data rate Your application may require a different setting 1 Set the value of Parameter 05 DN Rate Cfg to the data rate at which your network is operating Port 5 Device Value Data Rate 20 COMM D 0 125 kbps Parameter 05 DN Rate Cfg 30 kbps 3 2 500 kbps Autodetect 3 Autobaud default 2 Reset the adapter see Resetting the Adapter on page 3 12 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 3 4 Configuring the Adapter Setting the I O Configuration 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter Us
195. fi Poled 20 M1 1 0 0 I e Advanced gt Options Memory M Fie c Stat Word E Bts 15 0 15 14 13 rz ri o s s 71615 AODANN 0 A TIP If your RSLogix 500 project requires a different starting Word word 32 bit than the default value of 0 for the drive input image set the Start Word field to the appropriate value 14 Click the Output tab to display the output registers for the 1747 SDN scanner Important If your RSLogix 500 project requires a different memory selection than the default setting for the drive output image set the Memory field to the appropriate setting For this 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P Configuring the I O 4 41 example change the default setting of Discrete to M File and its corresponding M files are used 15 Click AutoMap to map the drive output image to the 1747 SDN scanner as shown in this example below lt gt 1747 SDN Scanner Module General Module Scanist Input Output ADR Summary TIP If your RSLogix 500 project requires a different starting Word word 32 bit than the default value of 0 for the drive output image set the Start Word field to the appropriate value 16 Click OK If the Scanner Configuration Applet appears asking to download these settings to the 1747 SDN scanner click Yes 17 Click File gt Save If this is the first time you saved the project the Save As dialog box app
196. figure a simple DeviceNet network see Figure 4 2 In our example we will configure a PLC 5 controller with 1771 SDN scanner to communicate with a drive using Logic Command Status Reference Feedback and Datalinks over the network Figure 4 2 PLC 5 Controller Example DeviceNet Network Node 62 Node 0 Node 1 Computer with PLC 5 Controller PowerFlex 70 Drive with DeviceNet Connection with 1771 SDN Scanner 20 COMM D Adapter Configuring Parameters for Network I O Because the I O for the drive is defined in the next subsection Use_ RSNetWorx for DeviceNet to Configure and Save the I O to the Controller on page 4 21 there is no need to configure any I O inside the RSLogix 5 project version 7 20 or later until using the I O as described in Chapter 5 However to get the adapter to operate with the I O created in Chapter 5 you need to configure the adapter to accept the I O and the drive to point to the appropriate Datalinks 1 Set adapter Parameters 13 DPI I O Cfg 25 M S Input and 26 M S Output to values that meet your application requirements For this example the adapter I O parameters are set to these values Adapter Parameter No Setting 13 DPI I O Cfg XXXX XXXX 1 1111 25 M S
197. for the Instance 2 for the Attribute 2 for each parameter being read and 4 for each parameter value 2 bytes for the Least Significant Word and 2 bytes for the Most Significant Word For this example where 5 parameters are being read a value of 36 bytes is required Figure 6 25 Example Scattered Read Request Data File i File N30 hex Rado Hex BCD v Sma 1 9 10 x Desc Properties 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 6 24 Using Explicit Messaging Table 6 M Example Scattered Read Response Data Value Address Hex Dec Description N30 70 0101 257 TXID 01 Status 01 successful N30 71 001E 30 Port 00 Size 30 bytes N30 72 51969 Service successful Address 01 Node N30 73 0001 1 Read Value Parameter Number verification N30 74 0384 900 Parameter Value LSW 90 0 Hz N30 75 00002 9 Parameter Value MSW 0 N30 76 0003 3 Read Value Parameter Number verification N3077 000902 g Parameter Value LSW 0 09 Amp N30 78 00000 9 Parameter Value MSW 0 N30 79 0006 6 Read Value Parameter Number verification N30 80 8EE 2286 Parameter Value LSW 228 6 VDC N30 81 00000 9 Parameter Value MSW 0 N30 82 000C 12 Read Value Parameter Number verification N30 83 3239 Parameter Value LSW 323 9 VDC N30 84 000002 0 Parameter Va
198. g a valid path to the DeviceNet network for this example A DeviceNet click OK If a message box appears about uploading or downloading information click OK As the selected DeviceNet path is browsed RSNetWorx for DeviceNet creates a graph view window that shows a graphical representation of the devices on the network lt DeviceNet RSNetWorx for DeviceNet File Edit View Network Device Diagnostics Tools Help amp e e TE EU Seer BEGOEN 1756 DNB PowerFlex 70 Bg z QD Devicenet EC240V 42A Category Barcode Scanner Communication Adapter 2 DPI to DeviceNet 00 01 M Graph Spreadsheet 14 gt f 7 DeviceNet Safety Scanner 2 DSI to DeviceNet DeviceNet to SCANport ml x Date 7 30 2007 15 34 40 Mode changed to online The online path is USMEQDMWIST Messages Online Not Browsing If the icon for the drive for this example PowerFlex 70 EC on the network appears as Unrecognized Device either use RSNetWorx for DeviceNet software to create the appropriate drive EDS file or download the EDS file from the Rockwell Automation website Important If you will be using the optional DeviceNet Tag Generator to create descriptive controller tags page 4 16 you must download and use the EDS file from the website Configuring the I O 4 7 Creating the EDS File from Online DeviceNet Network a Right click the
199. g the Fault Action jumper see the I O Board Option Installation Instructions publication 20COMM INO02 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 8 4 Using the Adapter in DPI External Comms Kit 20 XCOMM DC BASE Viewing Optional I O Diagnostic Items 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P Viewing communication adapter diagnostic item 31 OPT Status shows the operating status of the optional I O board Bit State Status Indication Description 0 1 On OPT Present I O data is being exchanged with the adapter 1 1 On OPT Faulted The I O board is taking its fault action 2 1 On Hold Last Fault Action is Hold Last 3 1 On Send Fit Cfg Fault Action is Fault Config Viewing communication adapter diagnostic item 32 OPT RX Errors shows the number of I O board receive errors Viewing communication adapter diagnostic item 33 OPT FW Version shows the present firmware revision of the optional I O board Diagnostic item 13 Datalink D1 In will show the status of the outputs as a combined decimal value For example a 0 decimal 00 binary indicates both outputs are off and a 3 decimal 11 binary indicates both outputs are on NOTE A status bit is not used for outputs Diagnostic item 21 Datalink D1 Out will show the status of the inputs as a combined decimal value including the status bit 15 For exampl
200. ging 6 13 Read Multiple Parameters ControlLogix Controller Example Ladder Logic Program to Read Multiple Parameters Using RSLogix 5000 Software Any Version A Scattered Read message is used to read the values of multiple parameters Up to 22 parameters can be read This read message example reads the values of these five parameters in a PowerFlex 7 Class drive Parameter 001 Output Freq Parameter 003 Output Current Parameter 006 Output Voltage Parameter 012 DC Bus Voltage Parameter 017 Analog In1 Value See DPI Parameter Object on page C 13 Class Code 0x93 for parameter numbering Important See Table 6 A on page 6 2 for limitations of PowerFlex 7 Class and PowerFlex 750 Series drives when using DPI Parameter Class code 0x93 for explicit messaging Table 6 F Example Controller Tags to Read Multiple Parameters Operand Controller Tags for Read Multiple Message Data Type XIC Execute Scattered Read Message MOV Scattered Read Request Internal Use Only 0 SINT 32 COP Scattered Read Request 0 INT 15 MSG Scattered Read Message MESSAGE Figure 6 12 Example Ladder Logic to Read Multiple Parameters Execute Scattered Read Message MOV JE Move Source 0 Dest Scattered Read Request Internal Use Only 0 Oe COP Copy File Source Scattered Read Request 0 Dest Scattered Read Request Internal Use Only 1 Length 30 MSG Message
201. gram to Read a Single Parameter A Generic Get Attribute Single message is used to read a single parameter This read message example reads the value of parameter 003 Output Current in a PowerFlex 7 Class drive Figure 6 35 Example Ladder Logic to Read a Single Parameter SingeReadMessage 0 B3 0 DEM DeviceNet Explicit Message EN 0 Control Block N13 0 CDN Control Block Length 70 CER gt Setup Screen SLC 500 Controller Formatting a DEM Instruction Message to Read a Single Parameter Figure 6 36 Generic Get Attribute Single DEM Message Configuration Screen x DEM N13 0 70 Elements General Send Data Receive Data This Controller 1747 SDN Slot Size of Send Data Byte 0 Target Device Message Timeout x1 sec E DeviceNet Addr dec Service Generic Get Single Service Code hex dec Error deck S Class hex Instance hex Attribute hex Eror Description No errors Message Control Bits Abort 0 Error ER p Done DN Enabled 0 Waiting for Slot WS 0 Scanner Status Scanner Code hex 1 Transaction completed successfully Error Code hex 0 The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to configure a message to read a single parameter General Tab Example Value Description 1747 SDN Slot 1 The chassis slot occupied by the scanner Size of S
202. gramming Manual publication 750 PM001 for drive parameter information and the 20 750 DNET DeviceNet Option Module User Manual publication 750 2 for network communication module information Some of the equipment that is required for use with the adapter is shipped with the adapter but some you must supply yourself Equipment Shipped with the Adapter When you unpack the adapter verify that the package includes the following Q One 20 COMM D DeviceNet adapter One 2 54 cm 1 in long and 15 24 cm 6 in long Internal Interface cable only one cable is needed to connect the adapter to the drive for which cable to use see Figure 2 3 on page 2 5 Q One 5 pin linear DeviceNet plug connected to the DeviceNet connector on the adapter One PowerFlex 7 Class DPI Drive Peripheral Interface Network Communication Adapter Installation Instructions publication 20COMM INO004 p TIP When mounting the 20 COMM D Series B adapter in a PowerFlex 750 Series drive you must use a 20 750 20COMM or 20 750 20COMM F1 Communication Carrier Card publication 750COM INO001 and the 20 COMM D adapter must have firmware revision 2 001 or later 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 1 4 Getting Started User Supplied Equipment To install and configure the adapter you must supply the following A small flathead screwdriver Q DeviceNet cable thin cable with an outside dia
203. h Service Code Instance 140 Hex Class 93 Attribute 3 Enable Enable Waiting Start Eror Code Extended Eror Code Eror Path Emor Text Done Done Length 0 Timed Out Cancel v The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to configure a message to write a single parameter Description Used to access the Parameter Object in the adapter This service is used to write a parameter value Code for the requested service Class ID for the DPI Parameter Object Instance number is the same as parameter number Attribute number for the Parameter Value attribute Name of the tag for any service data to be sent from the scanner or bridge to the adapter drive Number of bytes of service data to be sent in the message Communication Tab Example Value Description Path My_DeviceNet_Bridge The path is the route that the message will follow Tag Tab Example Value Description Name Single_Write_Message The name for the message 1 The default setting for Service Type is Custom enabling entry of a Service Code not available from the Service Type pull down menu When choosing a Service Type other than Custom from the pull down menu an appropriate Hex value is automatically assigned to the Service Code box which is dimmed unavailable 2 The instance is the parameter number in the drive Port 0 To write t
204. h the Reference coming from another peripheral or terminal block Or you could set the drive to have both its control and Reference come from the network The following steps in this section assume that the drive will receive the Logic Command and Reference from the network 1 Use drive Parameter 090 Speed Ref A Sel to set the drive speed Reference to 22 DPI Port 5 p If hard wired discrete digital inputs are not used to control the drive verify that unused digital input drive Parameters 361 Dig In1 Sel and 366 Dig In2 Sel are set to 0 Not Used 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 2 10 Installing the Adapter 3 Verify that drive Parameter 213 Speed Ref Source is reporting that the source of the Reference to the drive is 22 DPI Port 5 This ensures that any Reference commanded from the network can be monitored by using drive Parameter 002 Commanded Speed If a problem occurs this verification step provides the diagnostic capability to determine whether the drive adapter or the network is the cause gt TIP For PowerFlex 750 Series drives use drive Parameter 545 Speed Ref A Sel to set the drive speed Reference a Set the Port field to Port 0 PowerFlex 75x b Set the Parameter field to point to the port in which the 20 COMM D adapter 20 750 20COMM Communication Carrier Card are installed for example 876 Port 6 Reference Th
205. he I O 5 13 Controller Tags When you add the adapter and drive to the I O configuration Chapter 4 RSLogix 5000 software automatically creates generic non descriptive controller tags for them In this example program the following controller tags are used Figure 5 1 ControlLogix Controller Non descriptive Controller Tags for Example Ladder Logic Program Name amp Data Type Description Local 3 B 1755 Local 3 0 AB 1756_DNB Locat3 s AB 1756_DNB You can expand the Input and Output tags to reveal the input and output configuration The Input tag for this example requires ten 16 bit words of data see Figure 5 2 The Output tag for this example program requires ten 16 bit words of data see Figure 5 3 Figure 5 2 ControlLogix Input Image with Non descriptive Controller Tags for Example Ladder Logic Program Name Data Type Description Drive Input Image INT 10 Input Image Drive Input 0 INT Logic Status Drive Input Image 1 INT Speed Feedback Drive Input Image 2 INT Datalink Qut 41 A Drive Input Image 3 INT Datalink Qut 42 Drive Input Image 4 INT Datalink Qut B1 Drive Input Image 5 INT Datalink Out B2 Drive Input Image 5 INT Datalink Qut C1 Drive Input Image 7 INT Datalink Qut C2 _ Drive Input Image 8 INT Datalink Out D1 Drive Input Image 3 INT Datalink Qut D2 Figure 5 3 ControlLogix Output Image with Non descriptive Control
206. he PowerFlex 7 Class drive being used You can change icons by clicking Change icon Click Next to view a summary Click Next again to accept it Click Finish to finish creating the EDS file A new icon represents the PowerFlex 7 Class drive and communication adapter in the RSNetWorx for DeviceNet graph view window Downloading the EDS File from Rockwell Automation Website a Go to the website http www rockwellautomation com resources eds On the web page in the Electronic Data Sheets EDS section click the link All Other EDS Files The Find EDS Files search screen appears From the Network pull down menu choose the type of network for this example DeviceNet From the Device Type pull down menu choose AC Drive In the Keyword entry field enter the type of PowerFlex drive for this example PowerFlex 70EC noting that this field is space sensitive Click Search Because of many EDS files this search may take several minutes On the EDS File Search Results screen in the Details amp Download column click the Download link for the EDS file that corresponds to the drive Click Save on the File Download dialog box to save the EDS file to an appropriate location on your computer Launch the EDS Hardware Installation Tool by clicking the Microsoft Windows Start button and selecting Programs gt Rockwell Software gt RSLinx Tools gt EDS Hardware Installation Tool Follow the screen p
207. he parameters being written to are floating point REAL data types see the Communications section in Chapter 1 of the PowerFlex 7005 AC Drives Phase II Control Reference Manual publication PFLEX RM003 on how to manipulate REAL data into two 16 bit registers 9 The maximum number of bytes that can be entered is 120 78 Hex which represents 19 parameters The number of required bytes always includes 2 for the Class 2 for the Instance 2 for the Attribute 2 for each parameter being written to and 4 for each parameter value 2 bytes for the Least Significant Word and 2 bytes for the Most Significant Word For this example where 5 parameters are being written to a value of 36 bytes is required Figure 6 48 Example Scattered Write COP Request Data File Data File N30 hex 24 4 01 93 0 69 140 0 0 0 0 0 0 N30 0 Radix Symbok Columns 10 Desc Request Data for Explicit Message 0 Properties Usage 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 6 44 Using Explicit Messaging 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P Table 6 W Example Scattered Write COP Response Data Value Address Hex Dec Description N30 70 0101 257 TXID 01 Status 01 successful N30 71 001E 30 Port 00 Size 30 bytes N30 72 CCO01 13311 Service CC successful Address 01 Node N30 73 008D 141 Param
208. hrough significant word of the value must be set to zero 0 or a fault will occur 24 Flt Cfg x2 In Changes to these parameters take effect immediately A reset is not required Changes to switch settings and some adapter parameters require that you reset the adapter before the new settings take effect You can reset the adapter by power cycling the drive or by using Parameter 09 Reset Module adapter is transmitting control I O to the drive the drive may fault when you reset the adapter Determine how your drive will respond before resetting a connected adapter ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists If the Set Parameter 09 Reset Module to 1 Reset Module Port 5 Device Value Description 20 COMM D 0 Ready Default Parameter 09 Reset Module 1 Reset Module 1 2 Set Defaults Reset Module Viewing the Adapter Status Using Parameters Configuring the Adapter 3 13 When you enter 1 Reset Module the adapter will be immediately reset When you enter 2 Set Defaults the adapter will set all adapter parameters to their factory default values After performing a Set Defaults enter 1 Reset Module so that the new values take effect The value of this parameter will be restored to 0 Ready after the adapter is reset The following parameters provide information about the status of the adapter You can view these parameters at any time
209. i x of o Cmd Ref Bit Values 0 I O Disabled 1 I O Enabled Type Read Only ink C ink B Bit Definition Used Used Used atal atal Default Bit x gt x oj D rm ol Cmd Ref 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 4 Adapter Parameters 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P Parameter No Name and Description 15 16 25 Fit Cfg Logic Sets the Logic Command data that is sent to the drive if any of the following is true e Parameter 10 Comm Action is set to 4 Send Cfg and communication is disrupted e Parameter 11 Idle Fit Action is set to 4 Send Cfg and the controller is idle e Parameter 34 Peer Action is set to 4 Send Cfg and peer communication is disrupted The bit definitions will depend on the product to which the adapter is connected See Appendix D or the documentation for the drive being used Fit Cfg Ref Sets the Reference data that is sent to the drive if any of the following is true e Parameter 10 Comm Action is set to 4 Send Cfg and communication is disrupted e Parameter 11 Idle Action is set to 4 Send Cfg and the controller is idle e Parameter 34 Peer Ac
210. ic Status LSW Feedback MSW 1 Datalink Out A1 LSW Datalink Out A1 MSW 2 Datalink Out A2 LSW Datalink Out A2 MSW 3 Datalink Out B1 LSW Datalink Out B1 MSW 4 Datalink Out B2 LSW Datalink Out B2 MSW 5 Datalink Out C1 LSW Datalink Out C1 MSW 6 Datalink Out C2 LSW Datalink Out C2 MSW 7 Datalink Out D1 LSW Datalink Out D1 MSW 8 Datalink Out D2 LSW Datalink Out D2 MSW 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 5 4 Using the I O 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P Table 5 C ControlLogix Controller I O Image for Drives with 32 bit Reference Feedback and 32 bit Datalinks These products include the following e PowerFlex 7005 drives with Phase or Phase Il control e PowerFlex 753 drives e PowerFlex 700L drives with 7005 control e PowerFlex 755 drives DWORD Output I O DWORD Input I O 0 Logic Command LSW 0 Logic Status LSW Not Used Not Used 1 Reference LSW 1 Feedback LSW Reference MSW Feedback MSW 2 Datalink In 1 LSW 2 Datalink Out A1 LSW Datalink In A1 MSW Datalink Out A1 MSW 3 Datalink In A2 LSW 3 Datalink Out A2 LSW Datalink In A2 MSW Datalink Out A2 MSW 4 Datalink In B1 LSW 4 Datalink Out B1 LSW Datalink In B1 MSW Datalink Out B1 MSW 5 Datalink In B2 LSW 5 Datalink Out B2 LSW
211. iceNet_Bridge_NO1_POL_O Jog J Command_Clear_Faults My_DeviceNet_Bridge_N01_POL_O ClearFault 3 E d t Command_Forward_Reverse My DeviceNet Bridge NO1 POL O Forward A E d t Command Forward Reverse My DeviceNet Bridge NO1 POL O Reverse J MOV Move Source Speed_Reference O Dest My DeviceNet Bridge NO1 POL O Reference 0 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 5 18 Using the I O 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P Enabling the DeviceNet Scanner A rung in the ladder logic must be created and assigned to the 1756 DNB scanner Command Register Run bit This rung Figure 5 12 enables the scanner to transfer I O on the network Figure 5 12 Ladder Logic Rung for Command Register Run Bit Local 3 0 CommandRegister Run ij 1 Important This rung must always be included in the ladder logic program Example Datalink Data The Datalink data used in the example program is shown in Figure 5 13 Note that the parameters to which the Datalinks are assigned are descriptive Figure 5 13 ControlLogix Example Datalinks for Ladder Logic Program with Descriptive Controller Tags Name amp Value My DeviceNet Bridge POL I My DeviceNet Bridge POL l Ready My DeviceNet Bridge POL l Active My DeviceNet Bridge POL l CommandDir My DeviceNet Bridge POL l ActualDir My DeviceNet Bridge
212. ion Stop 0 Not Stop 1 Stop X Start 02 0 Not Start 1 Start X Jog 0 Not Jog Par 100 1 X Clear Faults 0 Not Clear Faults 1 Clear Faults X x Direction 00 No Command 01 Forward Command 10 Reverse Command 11 Hold Direction Control X Local Control 0 No Local Control 1 Local Control X MOP Increment 0 Not Increment 1 Increment X Xx Accel Rate 00 No Command 01 Accel Rate 1 Command Par 140 10 Accel Rate 2 Command Par 141 11 Hold Accel Rate Decel Rate 00 No Command 01 Decel Rate 1 Command Par 142 10 Decel Rate 2 Command Par 143 11 Hold Decel Rate Reference Select 9 000 No Command 001 Ref A Select Par 90 010 Ref B Select Par 93 011 Preset 3 Par 103 100 Preset 4 Par 104 101 Preset 5 Par 105 110 Preset 6 Par 106 111 Preset 7 Par 107 MOP Decrement 0 Not Decrement 1 Decrement 1 AO Not Stop condition logic 0 must first be present before a 1 Start condition will start the drive The Start command acts as a momentary Start command A 1 will start the drive but returning to 0 will not stop the drive 2 This Start will not function if a digital input parameters 361 366 is programmed for 2 Wire Control option 7 8 or 9 9 This Reference Select will not function if a digital input parameters 361 366 is programme
213. ion 20C0MM UMO02G EN P July 2013 Supersedes 20COMM UMO002F EN P May 2012 Copyright 2013 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in USA
214. ion tool that supports faulted node recovery and your adapter is using parameters to set its node address and data rate you can change the node address Heartbeat Rate The heartbeat rate is used in Change of State COS data exchange It is associated with producing data once every EPR Expected Packet Rate duration There may be four heartbeats before a time out occurs Glossary G 5 HIM Human Interface Module A device that can be used to configure and control a drive PowerFlex 7 Class HIMs catalog number 20 HIM xx can be used to configure PowerFlex 7 Class drives and their connected peripherals Hold Last When communication is disrupted for example a cable is disconnected the adapter and PowerFlex drive can respond by holding last Hold last results in the drive receiving the last data received via the network connection before the disruption If the drive was running and using the Reference from the adapter it will continue to run at the same Reference Host Parameters only PowerFlex 750 Series drives Host parameters are used to configure peripherals connected to a PowerFlex 750 Series drive When using a PowerFlex 7 Class HIM 20 HIM A3 A5 C3S C5S Host parameters do not appear When using a PowerFlex 750 Series HIM 20 HIM A6 C6S Host parameters appear in the HOST PARAM folder You can also view Host parameters with any of the following drive configuration tools e Connected Components Workbench software
215. ires a different starting DWord double word 32 bit than the default value of 0 for the drive output image set the Start DWord field to the appropriate value 16 Click OK If the Scanner Configuration Applet appears and asks to download these settings to the 1756 DNB scanner click Yes 17 Click File gt Save If this is the first time you saved the project the Save As dialog box appears a Navigate to a folder b Type a file name c Click Save to save the configuration as a file on your computer Setting Datalinks in the Drive Optional After configuring the 1756 DNB scanner the drive Datalinks must be set to parameters that are appropriate for your application This also enables the DeviceNet Tag Generator to create descriptive controller tags for your RSLogix 5000 project 1 Use any of the drive configuration tools or RSNetWorx for DeviceNet software to set the Datalinks in the drive For this example RSNetWorx for DeviceNet software and the following Datalink values were used Configuring the I O Table 4 0 Example PowerFlex 70 EC Drive Datalink Settings Parameter Value Description 300 Data In A1 140 Points to Par 140 Accel Time 1 301 Data In A2 142 Points to Par 142 Decel Time 1 302 Data In B1 100 Points to Par 100 Jog Speed 303 Data In B2 155 Points to Par 155 Stop Mode A 304 Data In C1 101 Points to Par 101
216. isk of injury or equipment damage exists The examples in this publication are intended solely for purposes of example There are many variables and requirements with any application Rockwell Automation does not assume responsibility or liability to include intellectual property liability for actual use of the examples shown in this publication 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 1 6 Getting Started Quick Start This section is provided to help experienced users quickly start using the adapter If you are unsure how to complete a step refer to the referenced chapter Step Action See 1 Review the safety precautions for the adapter Throughout this manual 2 Verify that the PowerFlex drive is properly installed Drive User Manual 3 Install the adapter PowerFlex 7 Class DPI a Verify that the PowerFlex drive is not powered Network Communication au Adapter Installation b Connect the adapter to the drive with the Internal Interface Instructions publication cable 20COMM IN004 and Use the captive screws to secure and ground the adapter to Chapter 2 the drive Installing the Adapter d Connect the adapter to the network with a DeviceNet cable NOTE When installing the adapter in either of the following products see the listed publication for instructions e DPI External Comms Kit see the 20 XCOMM DC BASE Installation Instructions publication 20COMM INO01 supplied with
217. ite zero when reading Important The STRUCT may repeat up to 24 times in a single message 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P DeviceNet Objects C 17 DPI Fault Object Class Code Hexadecimal Decimal 0x97 151 Products such as PowerFlex drives use this object for faults Adapters use this object for events Services Service Code Implemented for Service Name Class Instance Ox0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 Yes No Set_Attribute_Single Instances The number of instances depends on the maximum number of faults or events supported in the queue The maximum number of faults events can be read in Instance 0 Attribute 2 Instances Hex Dec Device Example Description 0x0000 0x3FFF 0 16383 Host 0 Class Attributes Drive 0x4000 0x43FF 16384 17407 Adapter 1 Most Recent Drive Fault 0x4400 0x47FF 17408 18431 DPI Port 1 2 Second Most Recent Drive Fault 0x4800 0x4BFF 18432 19455 DPI Port 2 Ox4C00 0x4FFF 19456 20479 Port 3 16384 Class Attributes Adapter 0x5000 0x53FF 20480 21503 Port 4 16385 Most Recent Adapter Event 0x5400 0x57FF 21504 22527 DPI Port 5 0x5800 0x5BFF 22528 23551 DPI Port 6 Class Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Data Type Description 1 Get Class Revision WORD Revision of object 2 Get Number of Instances WORD Maximum number of faults ev
218. its equipment or software described in this manual Reproduction of the contents of this manual in whole or in part without written permission of Rockwell Automation Inc is prohibited Throughout this manual when necessary we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment which may lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss WARNING Identifies information about practices or Important Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss Attentions help you identify a hazard avoid a hazard and recognize the consequences ATTENTION Identifies information about practices Shock Hazard labels may be located on or inside the equipment e g drive or motor to alert people that dangerous voltage may be present Burn Hazard labels may be located on or inside the equipment e g drive or motor to alert people that surfaces may be at dangerous temperatures Allen Bradley Rockwell Software Rockwell Automation TechConnect PowerFlex SMC Flex DPI SCANport Connected Components Workbench DriveExplorer DriveExecutive DriveTools Control FLASH RSLogix RSNetWorx for DeviceNet ControlLogix PLC 5 and SLC 500 are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc DeviceNet is a
219. k of injury or equipment damage exists Port 5 Device Value Description 20 COMM D 0 Fault Default e 2 Zero Data Pauh 3 Hold Last 4 Send Fit Cfg For more details see Setting a Fault Action on page 3 11 10 Set Parameter 37 Peer Inp Enable to 1 On The adapter is now configured to receive peer I O from the specified node Verify that the specified node is configured to transmit peer I O 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 3 10 Configuring the Adapter Selecting COS Cyclic or The data exchange sometimes called allocation is the method that the Polled I O adapter uses to exchange data on the DeviceNet network Polled is the default and is recommended unless one of the other following data exchanges also supported by the adapter is more appropriate for your application e COS Change of State e Polled and COS e Cyclic Polled and Cyclic e Polled If Polled and COS or Polled and Cyclic is used the adapter receives the I O from the polled messages It transmits its Logic Status and Feedback in COS or Cyclic messages Other data is transmitted in Polled messages Cyclic and Polled data exchanges are configured in the scanner so you only need to set the I O configuration in the adapter COS data exchange must be configured in both the adapter and the scanner You need to set the I O configuration and COS parameters in the
220. kwell Automation Support Additional Resources Rockwell Automation offers support services worldwide with over 75 sales and support offices over 500 authorized distributors and over 250 authorized systems integrators located throughout the United States alone In addition Rockwell Automation representatives are in every major country in the world Local Product Support Contact your local Rockwell Automation Inc representative for Sales and order support Product technical training Warranty support Support service agreements Technical Product Assistance For technical assistance please review the information in Chapter 7 Troubleshooting first If you still have problems then access the Allen Bradley Technical Support website at www ab com support abdrives or contact Rockwell Automation These documents contain additional information concerning related products from Rockwell Automation Resource PowerFlex 7 Class DPI Drive Peripheral Interface Network Communication Adapter Installation Instructions publication 20COMM INO04 Description Information on installing PowerFlex 20 COMM x Network Communication Adapters DeviceNet Media Design and Installation Guide publication DNET UM072 DeviceNet Starter Kit User Manual publication DNET UM003 Information on planning installation and techniques used to implement a DeviceNet network Connected Components Workbench website http www ab com sup
221. lds to correspond with the default Block Xfer 62 and its associated N files that were configured in step 10 b on page 4 26 Important The Read Length and Write Length fields actually define the data file locations Therefore these fields were set to 62 to correspond with Block Xfer 62 used in this example Click Insert Ladder Rungs to display the Select Program File For Rung Insertion screen In this screen select the ladder file that you want the ladder rungs to be inserted into and click OK In the 1771 SDN at RGS 0 0 0 screen click Close to close this screen 9 When the Monitor message screen appears click Yes The instructions will now appear in the form of rungs in the ladder file you selected The resulting ladder logic from this configuration is shown in Figure 5 14 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 5 22 Using the I O 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P Figure 5 14 Ladder Logic for Communication Between the 1771 SDN Scanner and PLC 5 Processor k BTW Block Transfer Write EN Module Type 1771 SDN DeviceNet Scanner Module Rack lt DN gt Group 0 Module 0 ER gt Control Block BT11 1 Data File N10 0 Length 62 Continuous NO Setup Screen BT11 0 BTR yt Block Transfer Read I END 34 EN EN Module 1771 SDN DeviceNet Scanner Module Rack DN Group 0 Module 0
222. le COP Instruction Ladder Logic Program for All Explicit Messaging The example ladder logic program with a COP Copy instruction shown in Figure 6 41 can be used to perform single read single write scattered multiple read and scattered multiple write explicit messaging Figure 6 41 Example COP Instruction Ladder Logic Program for All Explicit Messaging B3 1 COP 4 F Copy File 0 Source N30 0 Dest 0 1 224 Length 32 MOV Move Source 4 4 Dest N100 0 B3 1 c I1 COP JE Copy File 15 Source M1 1 224 1747 SDN Dest N30 70 Length 32 EQU MVM Equal Masked Move Source N30 0 Source N100 0 257 4 Source B N30 70 Mask OOFFh 257 lt 255 lt Dest 0 1 224 0 lt 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P Using Explicit Messaging 6 37 SLC 500 Controller Example COP Message to Read a Single Parameter A read message is used to read a single parameter This read message example reads the value of parameter 003 Output Current in a PowerFlex 7 Class drive Table 6 P Example Single Read COP Request Data Value Address Hex Dec Description N30 0 0101 257 TXID 01 Command 01 execute N30 1 0008 8 Port 00 Size 08 bytes N30 2 0 01 3585 Service OE Get_Attribute_Single Address 01 Node N30 3 0093 147 Class 93 DPI Paramete
223. leared 29 DN COS Timeout A Change of State COS I O connection has timed out 30 DN Poll Allocate A Polled I O connection has been allocated 31 DN COS Allocate A Change of State COS I O connection has been allocated 32 DN Poll Closed A Polled I O connection has was explicitly closed 33 DN COS Closed A Change of State COS I O connection was explicitly closed 34 Fit Cfg Error One of the Fit Cfg xx parameters is set to a value greater than 65535 and the drive requires a 16 bit value 35 DN Dup MAC The adapter has detected another node on DeviceNet using the same node address that it is using 36 Manual Reset The adapter was reset by changing its Reset Module parameter 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 7 8 Troubleshooting Table 7 B Adapter Events Continued Code Event Description 37 Language CRC Bad The language text memory segment is corrupt 38 OPT Timeout Communication between the adapter and I O option of the DPI External Comms Kit was disrupted 39 OPT Open The adapter began exchanging I O data with the I O option of the DPI External Comms Kit 40 OPT Close The adapter forced a fault condition on the I O option of the DPI External Comms Kit 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P Chapter 8 Using the Adapter in a DPI External Comms 20 XCOMM DC BASE This chapter provides information and examples that explain how to
224. ler To establish an configuration that can be used between the controller and drive over a DeviceNet network you must first create an I O image for the 1771 SDN scanner 1 Start RSNetWorx for DeviceNet software 2 Inthe RSNetWorx for DeviceNet window select File New to display the New File screen 3 Select DeviceNet Configuration as the network configuration type 4 Click OK 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 4 22 Configuring the I O 5 Select Network gt Online to display the Browse for Network screen Browse for network Select a communications path to the desired network Autobrowse Wj E Linx Gateways Ethernet ga ControlNet ControlNet 31 ga DeviceNet DeviceNet gs Ethernet Ethernet 9285 EtherNetJP Ethernet 89 085 Serial Data Highway Plus 89 225 USB Data Highway Plus Lo ee Help 6 Expand the communication path from your computer to the 1771 SDN scanner The following screen shows our example navigating to devices that are on a DeviceNet network Depending on the communication link you are using the navigation path may be different Browse for network Select a communications path to the desired network f Autobowse 55 By Workstation USMEQOMWISNIE2 25 Linx Gateways Ethernet Bs ControlNet ControlNet 00 1771 SON Scanner Module 01 PowerFlex 70EC 240V 4 24 JE 62 Workstation DeviceNet d Ethernet Ethern
225. ler Tags for Example Ladder Logic Program Name amp Data Type Description Drive Output Image INT 10 Dutput Image Drive Output Image U INT Logic Command Drive Output Image 1 INT Speed Reference Drive Dutput Image 2 INT Datalink In A1 _ Drive_Output_Image 3 INT Datalink In amp 2 _ Drive Output Image 4 INT Datalink In B1 Drive_Output_Image 5 INT Datalink In B2 Drive Output Image 5 INT Datalink In C1 Drive Qutput Image 7 INT Datalink In C2 _ Drive_Output_Image 8 INT Datalink In D1 _ Drive Output Image 8 INT Datalink In D2 Program Tags To use the non descriptive Controller tags that are automatically created you need to create the following Program tags for this example program 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 5 14 Using the I O Figure 5 4 ControlLogix Program Tags for Example Ladder Logic Program with Non descriptive Controller Tags amp Data Type Description Command_Clear_Faults BOOL Command_Forward_Reverse BOOL Command_Jog BOOL Command_Start BOOL Command_Stop BOOL Speed_Feedback DINT Speed_Reference DINT Status_Active BOOL Status_At Speed BOOL Status_Faulted BOOL Status Forward BOOL Status_Ready BOOL Status_Reverse BOOL Drive Input Image INT 10 Input Image Drive Output Image INT 10 Output Image Figure 5 5 ControlLogix Example Ladder Logic Program with Non descriptive Controller Tags for Logic Sta
226. lex 70 All Frame Sizes Ground Tab Detail Adapter mounts in drive 0 9 Nem 8 0 i 4 Places Verify metal ground tab is bent 90 and 8 T is under the adapter before tightening c ES screw After tightening the screw verify continuity exists between the head of the screw and drive ground Urs o e PowerFlex 700 Frames 0 and 1 PowerFlex 700 Frames 2 and Larger PowerFlex 7005 Frames 0 and 1 PowerFlex 7005 Frames 2 through 6 Adapter mounts on door Adapter mounts in drive Ground Tab Detail 0 9 Nem 8 0 Ibein 4 Places oS Verify metal ground tab is bent 90 and x is under the adapter before tightening 9 screw After tightening the screw verify continuity exists between the head of the screw and drive ground PowerFlex 700H Frames 9 and Larger PowerFlex 700S Frames 9 and Larger Adapter mounts behind HIM panel NOTE When installing the adapter in a PowerFlex 750 Series drive see the 20 750 20COMM and 20 750 20COMM F1 Communication Carrier Cards Installation Instructions publication 750COM INO01 supplied with the card 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P Connecting the Adapter to the Network 1 2 3 Installing the Adapter 2 7 ATTENTION Risk of injury or death exists The PowerFlex drive may contain high voltages that can cause
227. lication 20COMM UM002G EN P Configuring the I O 4 37 Edit the following Box Interscan Delay Setting Sets the scanner time delay between consecutive I O scans on the network For this example we recommend using the default setting of 10 milliseconds Foreground Sets the ratio of foreground to background polls For this example we recommend using the default setting of 1 Slot Sets the slot location in which the scanner is installed For this example Slot 0 is selected b Click Apply 11 Click the Scanlist tab to begin the drive I O configuration The Available Devices box shows devices that are presently on the DeviceNet network but are not yet configured The Scanlist box shows devices that are presently on the DeviceNet network and are configured TIP The Automap on Add box is checked by default and allows RSNetWorx for DeviceNet software to automatically map the drive I O into the scanner in the next available registers The mapping is based on the minimum I O requirements 4 bytes for input and 4 bytes for output that the scanner obtains from the drive EDS file a For this example uncheck the Automap on Add box b Select the PowerFlex 70 EC drive in the Available Devices box c Click gt to move the PowerFlex 70 EC drive to the Scanlist box 2 1747 SDN Scanner Module General Module Scaniist input Output ADR Summary Available Devices Scaniist I
228. licit Message N30 EI Properties Usage 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 6 42 Using Explicit Messaging 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P Table 6 U Example Scattered Read COP Response Data Value Address Hex Dec Description N30 70 0101 257 TXID 01 Status 01 successful N30 71 001E 30 Port 00 Size 30 bytes N30 72 CB01 51969 Service CB successful Address 01 Node N30 73 0001 1 Read Value Parameter Number verification N3074 0384 900 Parameter Value LSW 90 0 Hz N30 75 00009 0 Parameter Value MSW 0 N30 76 0003 3 Read Value Parameter Number verification N3077 0009 g Parameter Value LSW 0 09 Amp N30 78 00009 0 Parameter Value MSW 0 N30 79 0006 6 Read Value Parameter Number verification N30 80 O8EE 2286 Parameter Value LSW 228 6 VDC N30 81 00009 0 Parameter Value MSW 0 N30 82 000C 12 Read Value Parameter Number verification N30 83 0ca7 2 3239 Parameter Value LSW 323 9 VDC N30 84 00009 0 Parameter Value MSW 0 N30 85 0011 17 Read Value Parameter Number verification N30 86 207E 2 8318 Parameter Value LSW 8 318 mA N30 87 00008 0 Parameter Value MSW 0 1 in RSLogix 5 software leading zeros are not displayed in data file addresses For example 001E in address
229. lliseconds Foreground Sets the ratio of foreground to background polls For this example we recommend using the default setting of 1 Rack Sets the rack location in which the scanner is installed For this example Rack 0 is selected Group Sets the group location in which the scanner is installed For this example Group 0 is selected b Set the PLC 5 addresses that correspond to an existing RSLogix 5 project or will be used for a new project If an address file exists from a previous network configuration click Import to import those addresses into the RSNetWorx for DeviceNet project For a new application where addresses do not exist click PLC Interface Addresses to display the PLC Interface Addresses screen We recommend using the default addresses shown on this screen However if a different address is required click the button to edit the address After the addresses match your project requirements they can be saved for future use by clicking Export and selecting a desired location c Click Apply to set the PLC 5 controller addresses 11 Click the Scanlist tab to begin the drive I O configuration The Available Devices box shows devices that are presently on the DeviceNet network but are not yet configured The Scanlist box shows devices that are presently on the DeviceNet network and are configured TIP The Automap on Add box is checked by default and allows RSNetWorx for DeviceNe
230. llowing e PowerFlex 700 drives with vector control PowerFlex Digital DC drives e PowerFlex 700L drives with 700 control Logic Ref Fdbk Datalinks 32 bit User Configured Settings one 16 bit SC bed Size in Bytes Par 13 Par 25 Par 26 Input Output DPI I O Cfg M S Input M S Output 4 4 0 0001 0 0001 0 0001 v v v 12 12 0 0011 0 0011 0 0011 v v vv 20 20 00111 00111 00111 v v 28 28 01111 0 1111 01111 v v 36 36 11111 11111 11111 Table 4 C Drives with 32 bit Reference Feedback and 32 bit Datalinks These products include the following e PowerFlex 700S drives with Phase or Phase II control e PowerFlex 753 drives e PowerFlex 700L drives with 7005 control e PowerFlex 755 drives Logic Ref Fdbk Datalinks 32 bit User Configured Settings wae 32 bit fad Size in Bytes Par 13 Par 25 Par 26 Input Output DPI I O Cfg M S Input M S Output v v 8 8 0 0001 0 0001 0 0001 v v v 16 16 0 0011 0 0011 0 0011 v v vv 24 24 00111 00111 00111 v v 32 32 01111 0 1111 0 1111 v v 40 40 11111 11111 11111 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P Configuring the I O 4 13 g Set the scan rate for the selected data exchange method Data Exchange Method Rate Field to Set Polled Poll Rate Change of State Heartbeat Rate C
231. lue MSW 0 N30 85 0011 17 Read Value Parameter Number verification N30 86 207 2 8318 Parameter Value LSW 8 318 mA N30 87 00002 9 Parameter Value MSW 0 0 In RSLogix 5 software leading zeros are not displayed in data file addresses For example 001E in address N30 71 is shown as 2 For PowerFlex 7005 or PowerFlex 750 Series drives if some of the parameters being read are floating point REAL data types see the Communications section in Chapter 1 of the PowerFlex 7005 AC Drives Phase Control Reference Manual publication PFLEX RM003 on how to manipulate REAL data into a proper Float tag Figure 6 26 Example Scattered Read Response Data File File N30 hex 4 o Radx Hex BCD x Columns 10 v PLC 5 Controller Example to Write Multiple Parameters A scattered write message is used to write values to multiple parameters Values for up to 19 parameters can be written This write message example writes the following values to these five parameters PowerFlex 7 Class Drive Parameter Write Value PowerFlex 7 Class Drive Parameter Write Value 141 Accel Time 2 11 1 Sec 106 Preset Speed 6 444 Hz 143 Decel Time 2 22 2 Sec 107 Preset Speed 7 55 5 Hz 105 Preset Speed 5 33 3 Hz 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P Using Explicit Messaging 6 25 Table 6 N Example Scattered Write Request Data
232. lue of parameter assigned to Parameter 663 DPI Data Out B2 LSW N9 12 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 663 DPI Data Out B2 MSW N9 13 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 664 DPI Data Out C1 LSW N9 14 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 664 DPI Data Out C1 MSW N9 15 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 665 DPI Data Out C2 LSW N9 16 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 665 DPI Data Out C2 MSW N9 17 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 666 DPI Data Out D1 LSW N9 18 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 666 DPI Data Out D1 MSW N9 19 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 667 DPI Data Out D2 LSW N9 20 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 667 DPI Data Out D2 MSW N10 0 1771 SDN Scanner Command Word see its User Manual for bit definitions N10 1 Logic Command see Appendix D N10 2 Not Used N10 3 Speed Reference LSW N10 4 Speed Reference MSW N10 5 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 651 DPI Data In A1 LSW N10 6 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 651 DPI Data In A1 MSW N10 7 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 652 DPI Data In A2 LSW N10 8 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 652 DPI Data In A2 MSW N10 9 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 653 DPI Data In B1 LSW N10 10 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 653 DPI Data In B1 MSW N10 11 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 654 DPI Data In B2 LSW N10 12 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 654 DPI Data In
233. mation WORD Alarm code STRUCT of Alarm source BYTE DPI port BYTE DPI Device Object STRING 16 Alarm text STRUCT of Alarm time stamp LWORD Timer value 0 timer not supported BOOL 16 BOOL OJ 0 invalid data 1 valid data BOOL 1 0 elapsed time 1 real time BOOL 2 15 Reserved WORD Reserved CONTAINER n Reserved 1 Get Basic STRUCT of Information WORD Alarm code STRUCT of Alarm source BYTE DPI port BYTE DPI Device Object STRUCT of Alarm time stamp LWORD Timer value 0 timer not supported BOOL 16 BOOL OJ 0 invalid data 1 valid data 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P BOOL 1 0 elapsed time 1 real time BOOL 2 15 Reserved C 21 DeviceNet Objects DPI Diagnostic Object Class Code Hexadecimal Decimal 0x99 153 Services Service Code Implemented for Service Name Class Instance Ox0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 Yes Yes Set_Attribute_Single Instances The number of instances depends on the maximum number of diagnostic items in the device The total number of diagnostic items can be read in Instance 0 Attribute 2 Instances Device Example Description 0x0000 0x3FFF 0 16383 Host 0 Class Attributes Drive 0x4000 0x43FF 16384 17407 Adapter 1 Drive Diagnostic Item 1 0x4400 0x47FF 17408 18431 DPI Port
234. meter assigned to Parameter 907 Data Out B1 LSW N9 10 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 907 Data Out B1 MSW N9 11 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 908 Data Out B2 LSW N9 12 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 908 Data Out B2 MSW N9 13 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 909 Data Out C1 LSW N9 14 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 909 Data Out C1 MSW N9 15 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 910 Data Out C2 LSW N9 16 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 910 Data Out C2 MSW N9 17 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 911 Data Out D1 LSW N9 18 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 911 Data Out D1 MSW N9 19 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 912 Data Out D2 LSW N9 20 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 912 Data Out D2 MSW N10 0 1771 SDN Scanner Command Word see its User Manual for bit definitions N10 1 Logic Command see Appendix D N10 2 Not Used N10 3 Speed Reference LSW N10 4 Speed Reference MSW N10 5 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 895 Data In A1 LSW N10 6 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 895 Data In A1 MSW N10 7 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 896 Data In A2 LSW N10 8 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 896 Data In A2 MSW N10 9 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 897 Data In B1 LSW N10 10 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 897 Data In B1 MSW N10 11 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 898 Data In B2 LSW N10
235. meter of 6 9 mm 0 27 in is recommended Q Drive and adapter configuration tool such as the following PowerFlex 20 HIM xx HIM RSNetWorx for DeviceNet software version 7 00 or later Connected Components Workbench software version 1 02 or later Connected Components Workbench is the recommended stand alone software tool for use with PowerFlex drives You can obtain a free copy by e Internet download at http www ab com support abdrives webupdate software html e Requesting a DVD at http www ab com onecontact controllers micro800 Your local distributor may also have copies of the DVD available Connected Components Workbench software cannot be used to configure SCANport based drives or Bulletin 160 drives DriveExplorer software version 2 01 or later This software tool has been discontinued and is now available as freeware at http www ab com support abdrives webupdate software html There are no plans to provide future updates to this tool and the download is being provided 5 15 for users that lost their DriveExplorer CD or need to configure legacy products not supported by Connected Components Workbench software DriveExecutive software version 3 01 or later A Lite version of DriveExecutive software ships with RSLogix 5000 RSNetWorx MD FactoryTalk AssetCentre and Itelli CENTER software All other versions are purchasable items e 0303 ADTEOIENE Drive Executive software
236. meter or function block that is the source of the value 0 no link 12 Get Help Object Instance WORD ID for help text for this parameter 13 Get DPI Read Basic STRUCT of BOOL 32 Descriptor see page C 15 CONTAINER Parameter value CONTAINER Minimum value CONTAINER Maximum value CONTAINER Default value STRING 16 Parameter name STRING 4 Units for example Amp Hz 14 Get DPI Parameter Name STRING 16 Parameter name 15 Get DPI Parameter Alias STRING 16 Customer supplied parameter name Only supported by PowerFlex 7008 at time of publication 16 Get Parameter Processing Error BYTE 0 No error 1 Value is less than the minimum 2 Value is greater than the maximum 1 A CONTAINER is a 32 bit block of data that contains the data type used by a parameter value If signed the value is sign extended Padding is used in the CONTAINER to ensure that it is always 32 bits 2 This value is used in the formulas used to convert the parameter value between display units and internal units See Formulas for Converting on page C 16 9 Do not continually write parameter data to NVS Refer to the attention on page 6 1 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P DeviceNet Objects C 15 Descriptor Attributes Bit Name Description 0 Data Type Bit 1 Right bit is least significant bit 0 fs 0 BE eas oe 21 010
237. meter was changed and the adapter was not reset ink D ink C ink B ink A Cmd Ref Bit Definition zz s s s s Default Bit 0 I O disabled 1 1 0 enabled Da 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 3 14 Configuring the Adapter Updating the Adapter Firmware 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P The adapter firmware can be updated over the network or serially through a direct connection from a computer to the drive using a 1203 USB or 1203 SSS serial converter When updating firmware over the network you can use the Allen Bradley ControlFLASH software tool the built in update capability of DriveExplorer Lite or Full software or the built in update capability of DriveExecutive software When updating firmware through a direct serial connection from a computer to a drive you can use the same Allen Bradley software tools described above or you can use HyperTerminal software set to the X modem protocol To obtain a firmware update for this adapter go to http www ab com support abdrives webupdate This website contains all firmware update files and associated Release Notes that describe the following items e Firmware update enhancements and anomalies How to determine the existing firmware revision How to update firmware using ControlFLA
238. meters on the network Important When an explicit message is performed by default no connection is made because it is an unconnected message When timing of the message transaction is important you can create a dedicated message connection between the controller and drive by checking the Connected box on the Communications tab message configuration screen during message setup These message connections are in addition to the I O connection However the trade off for more message connections is decreased network performance If your application cannot tolerate this we recommend to not check the Connected box Important PowerFlex 7 Class and PowerFlex 750 Series drives have explicit messaging limitations Table 6 A shows the DeviceNet Object Class code compatibilities for these drives Table 6 A Explicit Messaging Class Code Compatibility with Drives DeviceNet Object PowerFlex PowerFlex Class Code 7 Class Drives 750 Series Drives Explicit Messaging Function Parameter Object Yes No Single parameter reads writes Ox0F DPI Parameter Yes Yes Single and scattered parameter Object 0x93 with limitations reads writes Host DPI Parameter No No Single and scattered parameter Object 0x9F reads writes 1 Enables access to drive parameters Port 0 DPI device parameters Ports 1 6 only For example DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 can access a 20 COMM D adapter in Port 6 However Class code 0x93
239. n 20COMM UM002G EN P Configuring the I O 4 29 Table 4 6 Drives with 32 bit Reference Feedback and 32 bit Datalinks These products include the following PowerFlex 7005 drives with Phase or Phase Il control PowerFlex 753 drives e PowerFlex 700L drives with 7005 control e PowerFlex 755 drives Logic Ref Fdbk Datalinks 32 bit User Configured Settings 82 00 a p c 13 Par 25 Par 26 Input Output DPI I O Cfg M S Input M S Output 8 8 0 0001 0 0001 0 0001 16 16 0 0011 0 0011 0 0011 v v vv 24 24 00111 00111 00111 v v 32 32 0 1111 01111 01111 v v 40 40 144 11111 11111 g Set the scan rate for the selected data exchange method Data Exchange Method Rate Field to Set Polled Poll Rate Change of State Heartbeat Rate Cyclic Send Rate For more information about scan rates see RSNetWorx for DeviceNet online help h Click OK If a Scanner Configuration Applet appears click Yes to continue The Edit I O Parameters screen closes and then the 1771 SDN Scanlist tab screen reappears 12 Click the Input tab to display the input registers for the 1771 SDN scanner Important If your RSLogix 5 project requires a different memory selection than the default setting for the drive input image set the Memory field
240. nd the path or type in the name of the device listed in the I O Configuration folder for this example My_DeviceNet_Bridge Then always type in 2 which is the DeviceNet scanner port followed by a comma and then the node of the drive for this example Ph 9 n this example we are writing to five parameters Each parameter being written to requires an array of three INT registers Therefore a controller tag was created with its Data Type field set to INT 15 Also the Source Length field on the Message Configuration screen must correspond to the selected Data Type in bytes for this example 31 bytes total 30 bytes for an INT 15 array plus one extra required byte that is always set to zero Scattered write messages always assume that every parameter being written to is a 32 bit integer regardless of its actual data type Maximum length is 133 bytes 132 bytes or 66 words which equates to 22 parameters plus one extra required byte 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 6 18 Using Explicit Messaging 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P ControlLogix Controller Example Scattered Write Request Data In this message example we use the data structure in Figure 6 18 in the source tag Scattered_Write_Request to write new values to these parameters PowerFlex 7 Class Drive Parameter Write Value 141 Accel Time 143 Decel Time 2
241. ndard control and vector control Series A drives and PowerFlex 700 vector control Series B drives PowerFlex 700H Installation Instructions publication PFLEX IN006 PowerFlex 700H Programming Manual publication 20C PM001 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P Information on installing and programming PowerFlex 700H drives Resou PowerF PowerF PowerF rce 7005 w Phase Control Installation Manual Frames 1 6 publication 20D IN024 ex 7005 w Phase Control Installation Manual Frames 9 and 10 publication PFLEX INO06 7005 w Phase Control User Manual All Frame Sizes publication 20D UM001 PowerFlex 7005 w Phase Control Reference Manual publication PFLEX RM002 PowerF PowerF PowerF PowerF 7005 w Phase II Control Installation Manual Frames 1 6 publication 20D IN024 7005 w Phase II Control Installation Manual Frames 9 14 publication PFLEX INO06 7005 w Phase II Control Programming Manual All Frame Sizes publication 200 001 7005 w Phase II Control Reference Manual publication PFLEX RM003 About This Manual P 3 Description Information on installing and programming PowerFlex 7005 drives PowerF 700L User Manual publication 20L UM001 Information on installing and programming PowerFlex 700L Liquid Cooled AC drives PowerF PowerF PowerF 20 750 publi ex 750 Series Drive Installation Instructions public
242. nformation on using DeviceNet modules with the Logix 5000 controller and communicating with various devices on the DeviceNet network DeviceNet Scanner Module Installation Instructions publication 1771 13014 Information on installing the 1771 SDN C Scanner Module PLC 5 DeviceNet Scanner Module User Manual publication 1771 UM118 Information on configuring a DeviceNet network using RSLinx and RSNetWorx for DeviceNet software 1747 SDN DeviceNet Scanner Module Installation Instructions publication 1747 13058 Information on installing the 1747 SDN DeviceNet Scanner Module 1747 SDN DeviceNet Scanner Module User Manual publication 1747 UM655 The online help is installed with the software Information on configuring a DeviceNet network by using RSLinx and RSNetWorx for DeviceNet software Documentation can obtained online at http literature rockwellautomation com To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local Rockwell Automation distributor or sales representative To find your local Rockwell Automation distributor or sales representative visit http www rockwellautomation com locations For information such as firmware updates or answers to drive related questions go to the Drives Service amp Support web site at http www ab com support abdrives and click on the Downloads or Knowledgebase link 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM0
243. ng device must also use a 16 bit Reference Datalinks if used must also be the same size 1 Verify that Parameter 37 Peer Inp Enable is set to 0 Off This parameter must be Off while you configure the peer input parameters Port 5 Device Value Setting 20 COMM D 0 Off Default Parameter 37 1 On Peer Inp Enable Off 2 Set Parameter 35 Peer Node to Inp to the address of the node from which you want to receive data Valid nodes must have 20 COMM D adapters connected to drives with compatible Logic Command Status words Default 0 Port 5 Device 20 COMM D Parameter 35 Peer Node to Inp 0 lt gt 63 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 3 8 Configuring the Adapter 3 Set Parameter 30 Peer A Input to select the destination of the data that is input to the drive as Peer A Port 5 Device Value Description 20 COMM D 0 Off Default Parameter 30 1 Logic Command Reference Peer A Input 1 2 5 Datalink A B C or D Input Cmd Ref Important When receiving a 32 bit Reference or 32 bit Datalink only Peer A Input will be available Peer B Input cannot be used 4 If desired set Parameter 31 Peer B Input to select the destination of the data to input to the drive as Peer B Port 5 Device Value Description 20 COMM D 0 Off Default Parameter 31 1 Logic Command Reference
244. ng how to perform explicit messaging using this type of instruction 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 6 28 Using Explicit Messaging SLC 500 Controller Explicit Messaging Using the Read Write Parameter Service SLC 500 Controller Example Ladder Logic Program to Read a Single Parameter A Read Parameter message is used to read a single parameter This read message example reads the value of parameter 003 Output Current in a PowerFlex 7 Class drive Important Parameter Object Class code is not supported in PowerFlex 750 Series drives To do a single parameter read follow the Generic Get Set Attribute Service single read example on page 6 32 Figure 6 29 Example Ladder Logic to Read a Single Parameter SingeReadMessage B3 0 DEM 4 E DeviceNet Explicit Message 0 Control Block N13 0 CDN gt Control Block Length 70 ER 5 Setup Screen SLC 500 Controller Formatting a Message to Read a Single Parameter Using Read Write Parameter Service Figure 6 30 Read Parameter Message Configuration Screen i DEM N13 0 70 Elements J Send Data Receive Data This Controller 1747 SDN Slot Size of Send Data Bytet 0 Message Control Bits Abort Error ERE p Done DN 1 Enabled EN p Waiting for Slot WS 0 Target Device Message Timeout x1 sec E J DeviceNet Addr dec 1 Scanner Status Service Read
245. nnection 4 Change of State Cyclic Connection 6 10 Explicit Message Connection Instance Attributes See the DeviceNet specification for more information Attribute ID Access Rule Data Type Description 1 Get State USINT 0 Nonexistent 1 Configuring 2 Waiting for connection ID 3 Established 4 Timed out 2 Get Instance Type USINT 0 Explicit message 1 I O message 3 Get Transport USINT The Transport Class Trigger for this instance 4 Get Produced Cnxn ID USINT CAN identifier to transmit on 5 Get Consumed Cnxn ID USINT CAN identifier to receive on 6 Get Initial Comm Char USINT Defines the DeviceNet message groups that the Tx Rx Cnxn s apply 7 Get Produced Cnxn Size UINT Max bytes to transmit across this connection 8 Get Consumed Cnxn Size UINT Max bytes to receive across this connection 9 Get Set EPR UINT Expected Packet Rate timer resolution 2 msec 12 Get Set Watchdog Action USINT 0 Transition to timed out 1 Auto delete 2 Auto reset 13 Get Produced Path Length UINT Number of bytes of data in the produced connection path 14 Get Produced Connection Path ARRAY of Byte stream which defines Application objects whose data UINT is to be produced by this Connection object 15 Get Consumed Path Length UNIT Number of bytes of data in the consumed connection path 16 Get Consumed Connection Path ARRAY of Byte stream which defines Application objects whose data U
246. ns Used in This Manual P 1 This manual provides information about the adapter and using it with PowerFlex 7 Class Architecture Class drives The adapter can be used with other products that support a DPI adapter such as the DPI External Comms Kit 20 XCOMM DC BASE See the documentation for your product for specific information about how it works with the adapter The following conventions are used throughout this manual Parameter names are shown in the format Parameter xx The xx represents the parameter number The represents the parameter name for example Parameter 01 DPI Port Menu commands are shown in bold type face and follow the format Menu gt Command For example if you read Select File gt Open you should click the File menu and then click the Open command The firmware revision number FRN is displayed as FRN X xxx where X is the major revision number and xxx is the minor revision number The screen images in this manual resulted from using the following software RSLinx Classic software version 2 51 RSNetWorx for DeviceNet software version 7 00 RSLogix 5 software version 7 20 RSLogix 500 software version 7 20 RSLogix 5000 software version 16 00 Different versions of the software may have screens that vary in appearance and differences in procedures 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P P 2 About This Manual Roc
247. nstalling the Adapter Connecting the Adapter to the Drive 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P ATTENTION Risk of injury or death exists PowerFlex drive may contain high voltages that can cause injury or death Remove power from the drive and then verify power has been discharged before installing or removing the adapter Remove power from the drive Use static control precautions Remove or open the drive cover Connect the Internal Interface cable to the DPI port on the drive and then to the DPI connector on the adapter see Figure 2 3 Secure and ground the adapter to the drive see Figure 2 4 by doing the following Ona PowerFlex 70 drive fold the Internal Interface cable behind the adapter and mount the adapter on the drive using the four captive Screws Ona PowerFlex 700 PowerFlex 700H or PowerFlex 7005 drive mount the adapter on the drive using the four captive screws Important Tighten all screws to properly ground the adapter Recommended torque is 0 9 Nem 8 0 Ibin Installing the Adapter 2 5 Figure 2 3 DPI Ports and Internal Interface Cables 20 COMM D Adapter A 299000000000 oJ 9 556 9 99 9 0 5 Linn nt L PowerFlex 70 All Frames 0000000000000 o acm c PowerFlex 700 Frames 0 and 1 Power
248. nt When performing a Write Parameter message the data will always be written to the drive s Nonvolatile Storage NVS Continuous NVS writes may damage the drive s EEPROM If continuous writes are necessary use the Generic Set Attribute Single Service and attribute A 10 decimal see page 6 33 e Generic Get Set Attribute Service requires more setup data to be entered in message configuration screens but can be used to perform single parameter read or write explicit messages or multiple parameter read or write explicit messages Also the Generic Set Attribute Service offers the choice of writing the data to the drive s Nonvolatile Storage NVS or the drive s Random Access Memory RAM for Generic Set Attribute Single service only see page 6 33 Note that when selecting the data to be written to RAM the data will be lost if the drive loses power For supported classes instances and attributes see Appendix C DeviceNet Objects DEM DeviceNet Explicit Message or COP Copy instructions can be used to perform explicit messaging Important RSLogix 500 software version 7 10 or later and a SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 or SLC 5 05 Series C controller with firmware version 10 00 or later are required to use DEM instructions However DEM instructions cannot perform multiple scattered read or write messages Therefore an example ladder logic program with COP instructions is provided along with example configuration screens showi
249. ntifies the data that is required in each box to configure a message to write multiple parameters Configuration Tab Message Type Service Type 7 Service Code Class Instance Attribute Source Element Source Length Destination Example Value CIP Generic Custom 4c Hex 93 0 Dec 0 Hex Scattered Write Request Internal Use Only o 9 31 9 Scattered Write Response 0 Description Used to access Parameter Object in the adapter Required for scattered messages Code for the requested service Class ID for the DPI Parameter Object Required for scattered messages Required for scattered messages Name of the tag for any service data to be sent from scanner or bridge to the adapter drive Number of bytes of service data to be sent in the message The tag where the data that is read is stored Communication Tab Example Value Description Path 2 My DeviceNet Bridge The path is the route that the message will follow Tag Tab Example Value Description Name Scattered Write Message The name for the message 1 The default setting for Service Type is Custom enabling entry of a Service Code not available from the Service Type pull down menu When choosing a Service Type other than Custom from the pull down menu an appropriate Hex value is automatically assigned to the Service Code box which is dimmed unavailable 2 Click Browse to fi
250. ntrol Reference Manual publication PFLEX RM003 Figure 6 37 Example Response Data File for DEM Read Single Message 3 Data File N13 dec DER 3585 147 0 0 4 0 0 0 I E N13 41 Radix Decimal 52 Columns 10 v SLC 500 Controller Example DEM Instruction Ladder Logic Program to Write a Single Parameter A Generic Set Attribute Single message is used to write to a single parameter This write message example writes a value to parameter 140 Accel Time 1 in a PowerFlex 7 Class drive Figure 6 38 Example DEM Instruction Ladder Logic to Write a Single Parameter Single WriteMessage B3 0 DEM 4 E DeviceNet Explicit Message EN 1 Control Block N14 0 CDN Control Block Length 70 ER 5 Setup Screen lt 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 6 34 Using Explicit Messaging SLC 500 Controller Formatting a DEM Instruction Message to Write a Single Parameter Figure 6 39 Generic Set Attribute Single DEM Message Configuration Screen r4 DEM N14 0 70 Elements Send Data Receive Data This Controller 1747 SDN Slot 1 Size of Send Data Bytes Target Device Message Timeout x1 sec E DeviceNet Addr Service Generic Set Attibute Single Service Code Class hex Instance hex Attribute hex 8 Enor Description No errors Message Control Bits Abort Error
251. o a parameter in another port see DPI Parameter Object on page C 13 Class code 0x93 to determine the instance number For example to write to parameter 4 of a peripheral in Port 5 of a PowerFlex 750 Series drive the instance number would be 21504 4 21508 9 Setting the Attribute value to 9 will write the parameter value to the drive s Nonvolatile Storage EEPROM memory which retains the parameter value even after the drive is power cycled Important When set to 9 the EEPROM may quickly exceed its life cycle and cause the drive to malfunction Setting the Attribute value to A 10 decimal will write the parameter value to temporary memory which deletes the parameter value after the drive is power cycled When frequent write messages are required we recommend using the A 10 decimal setting 4 Click Browse to find the path or type in the name of the device listed in the I O Configuration folder 5 In this example Accel Time 1 is a 16 bit integer parameter requiring the tag Data Type field to be set to INT when creating the controller tag If the parameter being written to is a 32 bit integer the tag Data Type field must be set to DINT Also the Source Length field on the Message Configuration screen must correspond to the selected Data Type in bytes for example 4 bytes for a DINT or a REAL When using a PowerFlex 700S or PowerFlex 750 Series drive Accel Time 1 is a floating point number req
252. o configure the adapter to accept the I O and the drive to point to the appropriate Datalinks 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 4 32 Configuring the I O 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 1 Set adapter Parameters 13 DPI I O Cfg 25 M S Input and 26 M S Output to values that meet your application requirements For this example the adapter I O parameters are set to these values Adapter Parameter No Setting 13 DPI I O Cfg XXXX XXXX 1 1111 25 M S Input XXXX xxxx xxx 1111 26 M S Output XXXX XXXX XXX1 1111 2 Reset the adapter see Resetting the Adapter on page 3 12 or power cycle the drive The drive speed reference and Datalink parameter values and the adapter setup parameters for this example are shown below Drive Parameter No Setting 9 90 Speed Ref A Sel 22 DPI Port 5 300 Data In A1 140 Accel Time 1 301 Data In A2 142 Decel Time 1 302 Data In B1 100 Jog Speed 303 Data In B2 155 Stop Mode A 304 Data In C1 101 Preset Speed 1 305 Data In C2 102 Preset Speed 2 306 Data In D1 103 Preset Speed 3 307 Data In D2 104 Preset Speed 4 310 Data Out A1 140 Accel Time 1 311 Data Out A2 142 Decel Time 1 312 Data Out B1 100 Jog Speed 313 Data Out B2 155 Stop Mode A 314 Data
253. ocal 3 0 CommandRegister Run Important This rung must always be included in the ladder logic program Example Datalink Data The Datalink data used in the example program is shown in Figure 5 8 Note that to describe the parameters to which the Datalinks are assigned you may want to add descriptions to the automatically created generic controller tags or create a User Defined Data Types UDDT 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 5 16 Using the I O Figure 5 8 ControlLogix Example Datalinks for Ladder Logic Program with Non descriptive Controller Tags Name amp Value Data Type Description Drive Input Image 1 INT 10 Input Image Drive Input Image 0 o INT Logic Status Drive Input Image 1 0 INT Speed Feedback Drive Input Image 2 50 INT Datalink Dut A1 _ Drive_Input_Image 3 50 INT Datalink Out A2 Drive Input Image 4 100 Datalink Qut B1 Drive Input Image 5 1 INT Datalink Qut B2 Drive Input Image 6 200 INT Datalink Qut C1 Drive Input Image 7 INT Datalink Qut C2 Drive Input Image 8 400 INT Datalink Qut D1 Drive Input 9 500 INT Datalink Qut D2 Drive Output Image 1 INT 10 Dutput Image Drive Output Image U 0 INT Logic Command Drive Output Image 1 INT Speed Reference Drive Output Image 2 50 INT Datalink In A1 Drive Output Image 3 50 INT Datalink In A2 Drive Output Image 4 100 INT
254. ode Implemented for Service Name Class Instance Ox0E Yes Get Attribute Single Instances The number of instances depends on the number of groups in the device A group of adapter parameters is appended to the list of groups in the device The total number of groups can be read in Instance 0 Attribute 2 Number Description 0 Class Attributes 1 Drive Group 1 Attributes n Last Drive Group Attributes 1 Adapter Group Attributes Class Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Data Type Description 1 Get Parameter Group Version UINT 1 2 Get Max Instance UINT Total number of groups 8 Set Native Language USINT 0 English 1 French 2 Spanish 3 Italian 4 German 5 Japanese 6 Portuguese 7 Mandarin Chinese 8 Russian 9 Dutch Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Data Type Description 1 Get Group Name String SHORT STRING Group name 2 Get Number of Members in Group UINT Number of parameters in group 3 Get 1st Parameter Number in Group UINT 0 4 Get 2nd Parameter Number in Group UINT 0 n Get UINT o 1 Value varies based on group instance 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P C 8 DeviceNet Objects PCCC Object Class Code Hexadecimal Decimal 0x67 103 Services Service Code Implemented for Service Name Class Instance 0x4B No Yes Execute_PCCC Ox4D No Yes Execute Local P
255. older for this example My_DeviceNet_Bridge Then always type in 2 which is the DeviceNet scanner port followed by a comma and then the node of the drive for this example 1 9 In this example we are reading five parameters Each parameter being read requires an array of three INT registers Therefore a controller tag was created with its Data Type field set to INT 15 Also the Source Length field on the Message Configuration screen must correspond to the selected Data Type in bytes for this example 31 bytes total 30 bytes for an INT 15 array plus one extra required byte that is always set to zero Scattered read messages always assume that every parameter being read is a 32 bit integer regardless of its actual data type Maximum length is 133 bytes 132 bytes or 66 words which equates to 22 parameters plus one extra required byte 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P Using Explicit Messaging 6 15 ControlLogix Controller Example Scattered Read Request Data In this message example we use the data structure in Figure 6 14 in the source tag named Scattered Read Request to read these five parameters in a PowerFlex 7 Class drive Parameter 001 Output Freq Parameter 003 Output Current Parameter 006 Output Voltage Parameter 012 DC Bus Voltage Parameter 017 Analog In1 Value Figure 6 14 Example Scattered Read Request Data Scattered Request
256. on 8000 4 5 2 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 2 2 Installing the Adapter Setting the Node Address Set the adapter Node Address switches Figure 2 1 by rotating the switches Switches to the desired value for each digit Important Each node on the DeviceNet network must have a unique address Set the node address before power is applied because the adapter uses the node address it detects when it first receives power To change a node address you must set the new value and then remove and reapply power to or reset the adapter Figure 2 1 Setting Adapter Node Address Switches o o Setting Description 0 63 The node address used by the adapter if the Node Address switches are enabled The default switch setting is 63 Node address 63 is also the default address used by all uncommissioned devices We recommend that you do not use this address as the final adapter address Important If the Data Rate switch is set to Program the adapter uses the value stored in Parameter 03 DN Addr Cfg for the node address See Setting the Node Address on page 3 3 64 99 Do not use The adapter will not recognize these addresses The Node Address switch settings can be verified by viewing Parameter 04 DN Addr Act or Diagnostic Device Item number 30 page 7 5 with any of the following drive configuration tools
257. on for the drive for this example PowerFlex 70 EC on the network appears as Unrecognized Device either use RSNetWorx for DeviceNet software to create the appropriate drive EDS file or download the EDS file from the Rockwell Automation website Creating the EDS File from Online DeviceNet Network a Right click the Unrecognized Device icon and choose Register Device The EDS Wizard appears Rockwell Software s EDS Wizard Welcome to Rockwell Software s EDS Wizard The EDS Wizard allows you to register EDS based devices unregister a device change the graphic images associated with a device create an EDS file from an unknown device EDS fil jin a de To continue click Next b Click Next to start creating the EDS file c Select Create an EDS file d Click Next If the EDS file is already downloaded and resides on your computer select the Register an EDS file option and click Next Then follow the screen prompts and disregard the remaining steps in this procedure 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P Configuring the I O 4 35 Type a description if desired and click Next Check the Polled box type 4 in the Input Size and Output Size boxes which accounts for just the basic I O and click Next RSNetWorx for DeviceNet software will upload the EDS file from the drive Click Next to display the icon options for the node We recommend using the icon for t
258. ondition is occurring drive running Check drive Parameter 211 Drive Alarm 1 Steady A continuous type 1 alarm condition exists Check drive running drive Parameter 211 Drive Alarm 1 Red Flashing A fault has occurred Steady A non resettable fault has occurred Adapter Status Indicators PORT Green Flashing Normal operation The adapter is establishing an I O connection to the drive It will turn steady green or red Steady Normal operation The adapter is properly connected and communicating with the drive MOD Green Flashing Normal operation The adapter is operating but is not transferring I O data to a controller Steady Normal operation The adapter is operating and transferring data to a controller Green Flashing Normal operation The adapter is properly connected but does not have an I O connection Steady Normal operation The adapter is properly connected and communicating on the network NETB Not used by DeviceNet adapter For more details on status indicator operation see page 7 2 and page 7 3 Configuring and Verifying Key Drive Parameters The PowerFlex 7 Class drive can be separately configured for the control and Reference functions in various combinations For example you could set the drive to have its control come from a peripheral or terminal block with the Reference coming from the network Or you could set the drive to have its control come from the network wit
259. onfiguring Allen Bradley products and network communication adapters It can be used on computers running various Microsoft Windows operating systems DriveExplorer software version 3 xx or later can be used to configure this adapter and PowerFlex drives This software tool has been discontinued and is now available as freeware at http www ab com support abdrives webupdate software html There are no plans to provide future updates to this tool and the download is being provided as is for users that lost their DriveExplorer CD or need to configure legacy products not supported by Connected Components Workbench software 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P G 4 Glossary 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P DriveTools SP Software A software suite designed for running on various Microsoft Windows operating systems This software suite provides a family of tools including DriveExecutive software version 3 01 or later that you can use to program monitor control troubleshoot and maintain Allen Bradley products DriveTools SP software can be used with PowerFlex 7 Class and PowerFlex 4 Class drives and legacy drives that implement the SCANport communication interface Information about DriveTools SP software can be accessed at http www ab com drives drivetools EDS Electronic Data Sheet Files Simple text files that are used by network configuration tool
260. only create correct tag names if the EDS file being used is downloaded from the website see Downloading the EDS File from Rockwell Automation Website on page 4 8 not created from the network Also the DeviceNet Tag Generator is not supported on PowerFlex 700S and PowerFlex 750 Series drives To use the DeviceNet Tag Generator the following compatible software is required Software Required Version RSNetWorx for DeviceNet 7 00 or later RSLinx Classic 2 51 or later RSLogix 5000 13 00 or later The DeviceNet Tag Generator is only recommended when e A new DeviceNet system and or new drive is being installed e Migration to required software is acceptable for an existing system or application The free DeviceNet Tag Generator software is available for download on the Rockwell Automation website http www rockwellautomation com support webupdates 1 Close the RSNetWorx for DeviceNet software if it is running 2 Verify that the controller is in Rem Prog or Program Mode and that the RSLogix 5000 project is offline with the controller Configuring the I O 4 17 3 In RSLogix 5000 software select Tools gt DeviceNet Tag Generator to display the RSLogix 5000 DeviceNet Tag Generator Step 1 window 1 RSLogix 5000 DeviceNet Tag Generator Select RSLogix 5000 Project Step 1 s Select the project containing the DeviceNet scanner for which you want to 5000 generate tag
261. onnect the adapter to the drive using the Internal Interface ribbon cable and to the network using a DeviceNet cable e Correctly connect the DeviceNet cable to the DeviceNet linear plug shipped with the adapter Apply power to the drive or adapter if mounted in a DPI External Comms Kit and network Steady Red The adapter failed the duplicate node address e Configure the adapter to use a unique node address on the DeviceNet detection test or a bus off condition exists network e Configure the adapter to use the correct network data rate e Verify that the network has the correct media installed Flashing Red An DeviceNet connection has timed out e Place the scanner in RUN mode or apply power to the peer device that will send I O Check the amount of traffic on the network Flashing The adapter has received an Identity Comm Wait for the faulted node recovery to complete Red Green Fault request Flashing Green The adapter is properly connected but is not communicating with any devices on the network e Place the controller in RUN mode or apply power to the peer device that will send I O e Program the controller or peer device to recognize and transmit I O or make a messaging connection to the adapter Configure the adapter for the program in the controller or the I O from the peer device Steady Green The adapter is properly connected and communicating on the network No action required
262. or later DriveExecutive software version 1 01 or later The event queue can contain up to 32 entries Eventually the event queue will become full since its contents are retained through adapter resets At that point a new entry replaces the oldest entry Only an event queue clear operation or adapter power cycle will clear the event queue contents Resetting the adapter to defaults has no effect on the event queue Using the HIM to View and Clear Events Step Example Screen Viewing Events 1 Access parameters in the adapter See Using the PowerFlex 7 Class HIM to Access Parameters on Main Menu page 32 2 Press the or GD key to scroll to Diagnostics Parameter Device Select 3 Press the Enter key to display the Diagnostics menu in the adapter Event Q E3 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to enter the Events option and then View Ping Time Event Queue option 5 Press the or GD key to scroll through the events The most recent event is Event 1 Clearing Events 1 Access parameters in the adapter See Using the PowerFlex 7 Class HIM to Access Parameters on page 3 2 2 Press or GD key to scroll to Diagnostics 3 Press the Enter key to display the Diagnostics menu the Events adapter View Event Queue Clear Event 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to enter the Events option and then the Clear Event option or Clr Event Queue option A message will pop up to confirm
263. ort 5 3 3 Press the Enter key to enter your selection A parameter database is constructed and then the first parameter is displayed 4 Edit the parameters using the same techniques that you use to edit drive parameters Using an LCD HIM Step Example Screens 1 In the main menu press the or GD key to scroll to Device Select F gt Stopped Auto 2 Press the Enter key to enter your selection Main Menu 3 Press the the or G key to scroll to the adapter Diagnostics 20 COMM D Parameter 4 Press the Enter key to select the adapter Device Select A parameter database is constructed and then the main menu for the adapter is displayed Port 5 Device 20 COMM D 5 Edit the parameters using the same techniques that you use Main Menu to edit drive parameters Diagnostics Device Select NOTE All configuration procedures throughout this chapter use the PowerFlex 7 Class LCD HIM to access parameters in the adapter and show example LCD HIM screens p TIP When using PowerFlex 20 HIM A6 or 20 HIM C6S HIM see its User Manual publication 20 HIM UMOOI 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P Setting the Node Address Setting the Data Rate Configuring the Adapter 3 3 If the adapter Data Rate switch Figure 2 2 is set to PGM Program the value of Parameter 03 DN Addr C
264. ot number in which the scanner resides For example if the 1747 SDN scanner is in slot 3 then the M1 address becomes M1 3 0 and the MO address becomes M0 3 0 After the conversion Figure 5 19 shows the entire data file address structure for this example 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 5 36 Using the I O Figure 5 19 Data File Tables for Example Ladder Logic Program i Data File N9 dec N30 Radix Decimal x Columns 10 v Radix Decimal Columns 10 Properties Usage Help Depending on the drive Table 5 0 Table 5 P Table 5 Q Table 5 R Table 5 S or Table 5 T shows the I O definitions as they relate to the N9 0 and N10 0 data table addresses Figure 5 19 being used in this example PowerFlex 70 PowerFlex 700 with Standard Control and PowerFlex 700H Drives When using any of these products which contain INT 16 bit format data types you will read from and write to a single data table address in the controller Table 5 0 SLC 500 Data Table Addresses for PowerFlex 70 Drives with Standard or Enhanced Control PowerFlex 700 Drives with Standard Control PowerFlex 700H Drives Data Table Address Description N9 0 Logic Status see Appendix D N9 1 Speed Feedback N9 2 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 310 Data Out A1 N9 3 Value of parameter assigned to Pa
265. owerFlex 7 Class drives Functions of the Example Programs The example programs enable you to do the following Receive Logic Status information from the drive Send a Logic Command to control the drive for example start stop Send a Reference to the drive and receive Feedback from the drive e e e e Send receive Datalink data to from the drive Logic Command Status Words These examples use the Logic Command word and Logic Status word for PowerFlex 70 700 drives See Appendix D to view details The definition of the bits in these words may vary if you are using a different DPI drive See the documentation for your drive 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 5 12 Using the I O ControlLogix Controller Example Drive and Adapter Parameter Settings The following drive and adapter settings were used for the example ladder logic program in this section Device PowerFlex 70 EC Drive 20 COMM D Adapter Creating Ladder Logic with Non descriptive Tags Using RSLogix 5000 Software All Versions Parameter Value Description 90 Speed Ref A Sel 22 DPI Port 5 Assigns 20 COMM D to be used for the Reference 300 Data In A1 140 Points to Par 140 Accel Time 1 301 Data In A2 142 Points to Par 142 Decel Time 1 302 Data In B1 100 Points to Par 100 Jog Speed 303 Data In B2 155 Points to Par 1
266. page 3 2 e Configuration of I O Parameter 13 DPI I O Cfg If all I O is not enabled the image is truncated The image always uses consecutive words starting at word 0 ControlLogix Controller Image Controller tag names for the I O image may vary based on the drive being used and whether the DeviceNet Tag Generator software tool was used to replace the generic non descriptive names with descriptive names The ControlLogix controller I O image changes depending on the size of the drive s Reference Feedback and Datalinks and the number of Datalinks used Table 5 A Table 5 B and Table 5 C show the I O image when using various PowerFlex 7 Class drives and all Datalinks enabled TIP The ControlLogix controller s 1756 DNB scanner is a DWORD double word device The following tables show the I O as 32 bit words For example if 4 bytes 2 words or one DWORD is consumed then the lower 16 bits of the output Least Significant Word is the Logic Command word and the upper 16 bits Most Significant Word is the speed Reference For the input the lower 16 bits LSW is the Logic Status word and the upper 16 bits MSW is the speed Feedback Using the 5 3 Table 5 ControlLogix Controller I O Image for Drives with 16 bit Reference Feedback and 16 bit Datalinks These products include the following e PowerFlex 70 drives with standard or enhanced control e PowerFlex 700 drives with stand
267. port abdrives webupdate software html and online help Information on the Connected Components Workbench software tool and includes a link for free software download DriveExplorer website http www ab com drives driveexplorer and online help Information on using the DriveExplorer software tool DriveExecutive website http www ab com drives drivetools and online help Information on using the DriveExecutive software tool PowerFlex 20 HIM A3 A5 C3S C5S HIM Quick Reference publication 20HIM QRO01 Information on using the PowerFlex 20 HIM A3 20 HIM A5 20 HIM C3S and 20 HIM C5S HIMs PowerFlex 20 HIM A6 C6S HIM Human Interface Module User Manual publication 20HIM UMO01 Information on installing and using PowerFlex 20 HIM A6 and 20 HIM C6S HIMs PowerFlex 70 User Manual publication 20 0 001 PowerFlex 70 700 Reference Manual publication PFLEX RM001 PowerFlex 70 Enhanced Control 700 Vector Control Reference Manual publication PFLEX RIM004 Information on installing and programming PowerFlex 70 standard control and enhanced control drives PowerFlex 700 Series A User Manual publication 208 0 001 PowerFlex 700 Series B User Manual publication 20B UM002 PowerFlex 70 700 Reference Manual publication PFLEX RM001 PowerFlex 70 Enhanced Control and 700 Vector Control Reference Manual publication PFLEX RM004 Information on installing and programming PowerFlex 700 sta
268. put Freq N30 7 0000 0 Pad Word 0 always zero N30 8 0000 0 Pad Word 0 always zero N30 9 0003 3 Parameter Number Read 3 Output Current N30 10 0000 0 Pad Word 0 always zero N30 11 0000 0 Pad Word 0 always zero N30 12 0006 6 Parameter Number Read 6 Output Voltage N30 13 0000 0 Pad Word 0 always zero N30 14 0000 0 Pad Word 0 always zero N30 15 000C 12 Parameter Number Read 12 DC Bus Current N30 16 0000 0 Pad Word 0 always zero N30 17 0000 Pad Word 0 always zero N30 18 0011 17 Parameter Number Read 17 Analog In2 Value N30 19 0000 0 Pad Word 0 always zero N30 20 0000 0 Pad Word 0 always zero 0 In RSLogix 5 software leading zeros are not displayed in data file addresses For example 0024 in address N30 1 is shown as 24 The maximum number of bytes that can be entered is 120 78 Hex which represents 19 parameters The number of required bytes always includes 2 for the Class 2 for the Instance 2 for the Attribute 2 for each parameter being read and 4 for each parameter value 2 bytes for the Least Slgnificant Word and 2 bytes for the Most Significant Word For this example where 5 parameters are being read a value of 36 bytes is required Figure 6 46 Example Scattered Read COP Request Data File Data File N30 hex 6 7 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 N30 0 Radix Hex BCD x sma 0 Desc Request Data for Exp
269. quipment damage exists If the adapter is transmitting I O that controls the drive the drive may fault when you reset the adapter Determine how your drive will respond before resetting a connected Default 0 Fault Values 0 Fault 1 Stop 2 Zero Data 3 Hold Last 4 Send Fit Cfg Type Read Write Reset Required No Comm Action lets you determine the action of the adapter and connected drive if I O communication is disrupted By default this parameter faults the drive You can set this parameter so that the drive continues to run however precautions should be taken to verify that the setting of this parameter does not create a risk of injury or equipment damage When commissioning the drive verify that your system responds correctly to various situations for example a ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists Parameter 10 Parameter No Name and Description 11 12 13 14 Idle Fit Action Sets the action that the adapter and drive will take if the adapter detects that the controller is in program mode or faulted This setting is effective only if I O that controls the drive is transmitted through the adapter When the controller is put back in Run mode the drive will automatically receive commands over the network again Adapter Parameters B 3 Details Default 0 Fault Values 0 Fault 1 Stop 2 Zero Data 3 Hold Last 4 Send FIt Cfg Type Read Write Re
270. r Attribute 9 Hex Attribute number for the Parameter Value attribute Destination Output Current 4 The tag where the data that is read is stored Communication Tab Example Value Description Path 9 My DeviceNet Bridge The path is the route that the message will follow Tag Tab Example Value Description Name Single Read Message The name for the message 1 The default setting for Service Type is Custom enabling entry of a Service Code not available from the Service Type pull down menu When choosing a Service Type other than Custom from the pull down menu an appropriate Hex value is automatically assigned to the Service Code box which is dimmed unavailable 2 The instance is the parameter number in the drive Port 0 To read a parameter in another port see DPI Parameter Object on page C 13 Class code 0x93 to determine the instance number For example to read parameter 4 of a peripheral in Port 5 of a PowerFlex 750 Series drive the instance number would be 21504 4 21508 3 4 Click Browse to find the path or type in the name of the device listed in the I O Configuration folder In this example Output Current is a 32 bit integer parameter requiring the Data Type field to be set to DINT when creating the controller tag If the parameter being read is a 16 bit integer the tag Data Type field must be set to INT When using a PowerFlex 7008 or PowerFlex 750 Series d
271. r details If you enabled one or more Datalinks configure parameters in the drive to determine the source and destination of data in the Datalinks When using Datalinks up to 8 drive Data In xx parameters 300 307 and or up to 8 Data Out xx parameters 310 317 must be assigned to point to the appropriate drive parameters for your application See Chapter 4 for an example Reset the adapter see Resetting the Adapter on page 3 12 The adapter is ready to receive I O You must now configure the adapter to receive I O from a master or peer device See Selecting Master Slave or Peer to Peer Hierarchy on page 3 5 If you select a Master Slave hierarchy you must also configure the master to communicate with the adapter See Chapter 4 Configuring the I O Selecting Master Slave or Peer to Peer Hierarchy Configuring the Adapter 3 5 A hierarchy determines the type of device with which the adapter exchanges data In a Master Slave hierarchy the adapter exchanges data with a master such as a scanner 1756 DNB 1771 SDN 1747 SDN and so forth In a Peer to Peer hierarchy the adapter exchanges data with one or more DeviceNet adapters connected to other drives The drives must have compatible Logic Command Status words Setting a Master Slave Hierarchy Scanner to Drive Communication 1 Enable the desired I O in Parameter 13 DPI I O Cfg See Setting the I O Configuration on page 3 4 Set the bits in P
272. r Object 0x93 147 C 13 Register Object 0x07 7 4 DPI Fault Object 0x97 151 17 Parameter Object 15 C 5 DPI Alarm Object 0x98 152 C 19 Parameter Group Object 0x10 16 C 7 DPI Diagnostic Object 0x99 153 C 21 PCCC Object 0x67 103 C 8 DPI Time Object Ox9B 155 C22 These objects are not supported when the adapter is used with a PowerFlex 750 Series drive gt TIP See the DeviceNet specification for more information about DeviceNet objects Information about the DeviceNet specification is available on the ODVA website http www odva org Supported Data Types Data Type Description BOOL 8 bit value low bit is true or false BOOL n Array of n bits BYTE 8 bit unsigned integer CONTAINER 32 bit parameter value sign extended if necessary DINT 32 bit signed integer DWORD 32 bit unsigned integer INT 16 bit signed integer LWORD 64 bit unsigned integer REAL 32 bit floating point SHORT STRING 1 byte length indicator that many characters SINT 8 bit signed integer STRING n Array of n characters STRUCT Structure name only no size in addition to elements TCHAR 8 or 16 bit character UDINT 32 bit unsigned integer UINT 16 bit unsigned integer USINT 8 bit unsigned integer WORD 16 bit unsigned integer 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P C 2 DeviceNet Objects Identity Objec
273. r Object N30 4 0003 3 Instance Parameter 3 N30 5 0009 9 Attribute 9 Parameter Value 1 n RSLogix 5 software leading zeros are not displayed in data file addresses For example 0008 in address N30 1 is shown as 8 Figure 6 42 Example Single Read COP Request Data File Data File N30 hex DEK 0 0 0 0 Radix Hex BCD z Symbol Columns 10 v Desc Request Data for Explicit Message N30 Properties Usage 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 6 38 Using Explicit Messaging Table 6 Q Example Single Read COP Response Data Value Address Hex Dec Description N30 70 0101 257 TXID 01 Status 01 successful N30 71 0004 4 Port 00 Size 04 bytes N30 72 8 01 29183 Service 8E successful Address 01 Node N30 73 0009 9 2 Parameter Value Read LSW 0 09 amps N30 74 0000 02 Parameter Value Read MSW 0 1 n RSLogix 5 software leading zeros are not displayed in data file addresses For example 0004 in address N30 71 is shown as 4 2 n this example Output Current is a 32 bit integer parameter For PowerFlex 7005 or PowerFlex 750 Series drives Output Current is a floating point number To manipulate REAL data into a proper Float tag see the Communications section in Chapter 1 of the PowerFlex 7005 AC Drives Phase II Control Reference Manual publication PFLE
274. r Revision BYTE Minor Revision 5 Get Component Hardware Change Number BYTE 0 Not available 8 Get Component Serial Number DWORD Value between 0x00 and OxFFFFFFFF DeviceNet Objects C 13 DPI Parameter Object Class Code Hexadecimal Decimal 0x93 147 Instances The number of instances depends on the number of parameters in the device The total number of parameters can be read in Instance 0 Attribute 0 Instances Dec Device Example Description 0x0000 0x3FFF 0 16383 Host 0 Class Attributes Drive 0x4000 0x43FF 16384 17407 Adapter 1 Drive Parameter 1 Attributes 0x4400 0x47FF 17408 18431 DPI Port 1 2 Drive Parameter 2 Attributes 0x4800 0x4BFF 18432 19455 DPI Port 2 Ox4C00 0x4FFF 19456 20479 DPI Port 3 16384 Class Attributes Adapter 0x5000 0x53FF 20480 21503 DPI Port 4 16385 Adapter Parameter 1 Attributes 0x5400 0x57FF 21504 22527 DPI Port 5 0x5800 0x5BFF 22528 23551 Port 6 Class Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Data Type Description 0 Get Number of Instances WORD Number of parameters in the device 1 Set Write Protect Password WORD 0 Password disabled n Password 2 Set NVS Command Write BYTE 0 No Operation 1 Store values in active memory to NVS 2 Load values in NVS to active memory 3 Load default values to active memory 3 Get NVS Parameter Value Checksum WORD Checksum of all paramet
275. r and connected PowerFlex 7 Class drive or PowerFlex 750 Series drive Topic Page About Explicit Messaging 6 2 Performing Explicit Messaging 6 3 ControlLogix Controller Examples 6 4 PLC 5 Controller Examples 6 19 SLC 500 Controller Examples 6 27 AN AN ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists The examples in this publication are intended solely for purposes of example There are many variables and requirements with any application Rockwell Automation does not assume responsibility or liability to include intellectual property liability for actual use of the examples shown in this publication ATTENTION Risk of equipment damage exists If Explicit Messages are programmed to write parameter data to Nonvolatile Storage NVS frequently the NVS will quickly exceed its life cycle and cause the drive to malfunction Do not create a program that frequently uses Explicit Messages to write parameter data to NVS Datalinks do not write to NVS and should be used for frequently changed parameters See Chapter 5 for information about the I O Image using Logic Command Status Reference Feedback and Datalinks 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 6 2 Using Explicit Messaging About Explicit Messaging Explicit Messaging is used to transfer data that does not require continuous updates With Explicit Messaging you can configure and monitor a slave device s para
276. r is a 16 bit platform and is used with the 32 bit 20 COMM D adapter the data will be transposed from the least significant word LSW to the most significant word MSW in the controller When the I O was configured Chapter 4 two available data table addresses N9 0 for input data and N10 0 for output data were used Figure 5 15 shows the entire data file address structure for this example Figure 5 15 Data File Table for Example Ladder Logic Program ics File dec 2E z Columns 10 v HE Columns 10 Desc Write data block 24 5 N10 Properties Usage Help Depending on the drive Table 5 G Table 5 H Table 5 1 Table 5 J Table 5 K or Table 5 L show the I O definitions as they relate to the N9 0 and N10 0 data table addresses Figure 5 15 being used in this example 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 5 24 Using the I O 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P PowerFlex 70 PowerFlex 700 with Standard Control and PowerFlex 700H Drives When using any of these products which all contain INT 16 bit format data types you will read from and write to a single data table address in the controller Table 5 6 PLC 5 Data Table Addresses for PowerFlex 70 Drives with Standard or Enhanced Control PowerFlex 700 Drives with Standard Control PowerFlex 700H Drives
277. r settings for the data rate and node address instead of switch settings e Access to any PowerFlex drive and its connected peripherals on the network to which the adapter is connected At the time of publication the adapter is compatible with the following products PowerFlex 70 drives with standard or enhanced control e PowerFlex 750 Series drives 1 e PowerFlex 700 drives with standard or vector control PowerFlex Digital DC drives PowerFlex 700H drives DPI External Comms Kit PowerFlex 7005 drives with Phase or Phase II control e SMC Flex smart motor controllers e PowerFlex 700L drives with 700 vector control or 7005 control e SMC 50 smart motor controllers 1 The 20 COMM D adapter can be used with PowerFlex 750 Series drives but with the following limitations differences Only drive Ports 0 6 are supported Only the first 16 bits of the Logic Command and Logic Status words are used Speed Reference Feedback scaling are Hz or RPM x 1000 depending on the setting of drive parameter 300 Speed Units For explicit messaging only Device parameters Class code 0x93 can be accessed drive Ports 0 6 only Host parameters Class code Ox9F and Parameter Object Class code OxOF cannot be accessed Instead of using the 20 COMM D adapter with the PowerFlex 750 Series drive the 20 750 DNET DeviceNet option module should be used whenever possible Please see the PowerFlex 750 Series AC Drives Pro
278. rFlex 700S AC Drives Phase Control Reference Manual publication PFLEX RM003 Figure 6 23 Example Single Write Request Data File File N30 hex N30 0 Radix Hex BCD gt E Columns 10 v 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 6 22 Using Explicit Messaging 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P Table 6 K Example Single Write Response Data Value Address Hex Dec Description N30 70 0101 257 TXID 01 Status 01 successful N30 71 0000 0 Port 00 Size 00 bytes N30 72 9001 28671 Service 90 successful Address 01 Node 1 n RSLogix 5 software leading zeros are not displayed in data file addresses For example 0000 in address N30 71 is shown as 0 Figure 6 24 Example Single Write Response Data File File N30 hex Radx He amp BCD v Sma 24 27 1 Columns 10 x Desc no H Properties PLC 5 Controller Example to Read Multiple Parameters A scattered read message is used to read the values of multiple parameters Up to 19 parameters can be read This read message example reads the values of these five parameters in a PowerFlex 7 Class drive Parameter 001 Output Freq Parameter 003 Output Current Parameter 006 Output Voltage Parameter 012 DC Bus Voltage Parameter 017 Analog In2 Value Table 6 L Example Scattered Read Request Data
279. rameter 13 DPI I O Cfg See Setting a Master Slave Hierarchy Scanner to Drive Communication on page 3 5 for details Table 4 A Table 4 B or Table 4 C list the number of bytes required for the Input Size and Output Size boxes for specific I O configurations and only the Polled data exchange method For Input Sizes and Output Sizes for other data exchange methods and specific I O configurations see the tables in Appendix E 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 4 12 Configuring the I O Table 4 A Drives with 16 bit Reference Feedback and 16 bit Datalinks These products include the following e PowerFlex 70 drives with standard or enhanced control e PowerFlex 700 drives with standard control e PowerFlex 700H drives e SMC Flex smart motor controllers e SMC 50 smart motor controllers Logic Ref Fdbk Datalinks 16 bit User Configured Settings oe 16 bit ela Size in Bytes Par 13 Par 25 Par 26 Input Output DPI I O Cfg M S Input M S Output 4 4 0 0001 0 0001 0 0001 v v v 8 8 0 0011 0 0011 0 0011 v v vv 12 12 00111 00111 00111 v v 16 16 0 1111 01111 0 1111 v v 20 20 11111 11111 11111 Table 4 B Drives with 16 bit Reference Feedback and 32 bit Datalinks These products include the fo
280. rameter 311 Data Out A2 N9 4 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 312 Data Out B1 N9 5 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 313 Data Out B2 N9 6 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 314 Data Out C1 N9 7 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 315 Data Out C2 N9 8 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 316 Data Out D1 N9 9 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 317 Data Out D2 N10 0 Logic Command see Appendix D N10 1 Speed Reference N10 2 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 300 Data In A1 N10 3 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 301 Data In A2 N10 4 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 302 Data In B1 N10 5 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 303 Data In B2 N10 6 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 304 Data In C1 N10 7 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 305 Data In C2 N10 8 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 306 Data In D1 N10 9 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 307 Data In D2 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P Using the 5 37 PowerFlex 700 Drives with Vector Control and PowerFlex 700L Drives with 700 Control When using any of these drives which contain DINT 32 bit format data types you will read from and write to the LSW data table address in the controller Table 5 P SLC 500 Data Table Addresses for PowerFlex 700 Drives with Vector Control PowerFlex 700L Drives with 700 Control
281. rameter assigned to Parameter 612 Data In B1 LSW N10 8 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 612 Data In B1 MSW N10 9 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 613 Data In B2 LSW N10 10 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 613 Data In B2 MSW N10 11 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 614 Data In C1 LSW N10 12 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 614 Data In C1 MSW N10 13 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 615 Data In C2 LSW N10 14 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 615 Data In C2 MSW N10 15 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 616 Data In D1 LSW N10 16 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 616 Data In D1 MSW N10 17 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 617 Data In D2 LSW N10 18 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 617 Data In D2 MSW 5 41 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 5 42 Using the I O 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P To operate any drive and view its status using the data table addresses Human Machine Interface devices Panel View and so forth or a ladder logic program you will need to create descriptive controller data table addresses Table 5 U and Table 5 V and a ladder logic program that will pass the controller address data to the program data table addresses Table 5 0 SLC 500 and Program Data Table Address Descriptions for Example Logic Status Feedback Ladder Logic Program
282. re 5 21 Using the I O 5 43 Figure 5 20 SLC 500 Example Ladder Logic Program for Logic Status Feedback Drive Ready Status Ready N9 0 B3 1 E C E 0 0 Drive Active Status Active 9 0 B3 1 EM P ry 1 1 Actual Direction Status Forward N9 0 B3 1 et s foy dt 3 3 Actual Direction Status Reverse N9 0 B3 1 EP a i X a 3 4 Status Faulted N9 0 B3 1 JE C JE z 7 7 Drive At Speed Status At Speed N9 0 B3 1 3E C gt 8 8 Speed Feedback MOV Move Source N9 1 0 lt Dest N20 1 0 lt Figure 5 21 SLC 500 Example Ladder Logic Program for Logic Command Reference Command Stop Drive Stop B3 20 N10 0 cy Dr 0 Command Start Drive Start B3 20 N10 0 1 E y IND 1 Command Jog DriveJog B3 20 N10 0 ai C 2 2 Command Clear Faults Drive Clear Faults N10 0 3 Drive Forward N10 0 cy 4 _ Drive Reverse N10 0 CS 5 Speed Reference MOV Move L 3 Source N30 1 0 lt Dest N10 1 0 lt 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 5 44 Using the I O Notes 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 6 Using Explicit Messaging This chapter provides information and examples that explain how to use Explicit Messaging to configure and monitor the adapte
283. red write must be written continuously then use a separate explicit message single write for each parameter using DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 and attribute A 10 decimal see page 6 11 Attribute A writes to RAM not NVS EEPROM memory This example scattered write message using attribute 0 writes to NVS Over time continuous writes will exceed the EEPROM life cycle and cause the drive to malfunction Using Explicit Messaging 6 17 ControlLogix Controller Formatting a Message to Write Multiple Parameters Using RSLogix 5000 Software Any Version Figure 6 17 Scattered Write Multiple Message Configuration Screens Enable Enable Waiting Message Configuration Scattered_Write_Message Configuration Communication Tag Name Configuration Communication Tag Scattered_Write_Message Message Configuration Scattered_Write_Message Path My DeviceNet Bridge 2 1 Message Configuration Scattered_Write_Message Configuration Communication Tag Message Type CIP Generic Service Type Custom Service Code Instance 0 Hex Class Attribute Stat Eror Code Extended Error Code Eror Path Eror Text Source Element Source Length 31 Destination Done Scattered Write Req iv Bytes Scattered_Write_Res v New Tag Done Length 0 Timed Out The following table ide
284. replaced by a drive icon for this example the icon for a PowerFlex 70 EC drive Configuring the I O 4 9 8 In the graph view window right click the 1756 DNB icon and choose Properties to display its properties screen tx 1756 DNB General Module Scanlist Input Output ADR Summary 8 1756 DNB Name 1 756 DNB Description Address 0 i Device Identity Primary Vendor Rockwell Automation Allen Bradley 1 Type Communication Adapter 12 Device 1756 DNB 14 Catalog 1756 0 Revisions 9 Click the Module tab to display the Scanner Configuration Applet screen 10 Click Upload to upload the 1756 DNB configuration to the RSNetWorx for DeviceNet project The 1756 DNB Module Tab screen appears 25 1756 DNB General Module Scaniist Input Output ADR Summary Interscan Delay 10 E Upload from Scanner Foreground to Background Pol Rato Downloadto Scanner Module Defaults Advanced 1756 DNB Slot 3 E a Editthe following Box Setting Interscan Delay Sets the scanner time delay between consecutive I O scans on the network For this example we recommend using the default setting of 10 milliseconds Foreground to Sets the ratio of foreground to background polls For this example we recommend using the default setting of 2 Slot Sets the slot location in which the scanner is installed For this example
285. ress Hex Dec Description N30 0 0101 257 TXID 01 Command 01 execute N30 1 0008 8 Port 00 Size 08 bytes N30 2 1001 4097 Service 10 Set_Attribute_Single Address 01 Node N30 3 0093 147 Class 93 Parameter Object N30 4 008C 140 Instance Parameter 140 N30 5 0009 9 Attribute 9 Parameter Value N30 6 0064 9 100 Parameter Value Written LSW 10 0 seconds N30 7 0000 9 0 Parameter Value Written MSW 0 1 n RSLogix 5 software leading zeros are not displayed in data file addresses For example 0008 in address N30 1 is shown as 8 Setting the data file address value to 9 will write the parameter value to the drive s Nonvolatile Storage EEPROM memory which retains the parameter value even after the drive is power cycled Important When set to 9 the EEPROM may quickly exceed its life cycle and cause the drive to malfunction Setting the data file address value to A Hex will write the parameter value to temporary memory which deletes the parameter value after the drive is power cycled When frequent write messages are required we recommend using the A setting 9 n this example Accel Time 1 is a 16 bit integer parameter The most significant word MSW is not used For PowerFlex 700S or PowerFlex 750 Series drives Accel Time 1 is a floating point number To manipulate REAL data into two 16 bit registers see the Communications section in Chapter 1 of the Powe
286. ri ei asen eee eects SLC 500 Controller Examples lseeeeeeee III Troubleshooting Understanding the Status Indicators 0 eee eee eens PORT Stattis Indicator bee ile bee ae MOD Status Indicator deesset Ree ET Ed dea ade dead IE NET A Status Indicator se osten Rd e awe ae bea beets Viewing Adapter Diagnostic Items 0 0 0 0 eee eee nee Viewing and Clearing Events 20 0 cece eee een eee eee Using the Adapter in a DPI External Comms Kit 20 XCOMM DC BASE Installing the Adapter ore pu TIR E ae deest Board Option 20 XCOMM IO OPT1 Understanding the I O Image Drive Option Configuring the Adapter to Use the Optional I O Viewing Optional I O Diagnostic Items 0 0 cece eee eee nee Specifications COMMUNICATIONS et D RICH ele teed Sty ven Shed Sind SE BR ees edes aus obese Adapter Parameters About Parameter Numbers 0 0 clle es Parameter Eist rarna i aa ed eed ot nete 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P Appendix C Appendix D Appendix E Glossary Index Table of Contents iii DeviceNet Objects Identity Object 52e eh le nd ett Ga br ben bob dah bag ss C 2 Connection Object i ide buo De CARES LoT et pate cute
287. rive Output Current is a floating point number requiring the Data Type field to be set to REAL when creating the controller tag See the drive documentation to determine the size of the parameter and its data type 16 bit or 32 bit integer or REAL 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 6 8 Using Explicit Messaging 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P Write a Single Parameter ControlLogix Controller Example Ladder Logic Program to Write a Single Parameter Using RSLogix 5000 Software Version 15 00 or Later A Parameter Write message is used to write to a single parameter This write message example writes a value to parameter 140 Accel Time 1 in a PowerFlex 7 Class drive Important Parameter Object Class code OxOF is not supported in PowerFlex 750 Series drives To do a single parameter write follow the RSLogix 5000 any version single write example on page 6 11 Table 6 D Example Controller Tags to Write a Single Parameter Operand Controller Tags for Single Write Message Data Type XIC Execute Single Write Message BOOL MSG Single Write Message MESSAGE Figure 6 6 Example Ladder Logic to Write a Single Parameter Execute_Single_Write_Message MSG J Message LCEN Message Control Single Write Message CDN gt FCER Important If the explicit message single write must be written continuously use DPI Parameter O
288. rompts to add the EDS file for use with your project 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 4 36 Configuring the I O j Reboot the computer and repeat steps 1 through 7 at the beginning of this subsection The Unrecognized Device icon in the RSNetWorx for DeviceNet graph view window in step 7 should have been replaced by a drive icon for this example the icon for a PowerFlex 70 EC drive 8 Inthe graph view window right click the 1747 SDN icon and choose Properties to display its properties screen 25 1747 SDN Scanner Module General Module Scaniist Input Output ADR Summary g 1747 SDN Scanner Module Name fi 747 50 Scanner Module Address 0 i Device Identity Primary Vendor Rockwell Automation Allen Bradley 1 Type Communication Adapter 12 Device 1747 SDN Scanner Module 19 Catalog 1747 SDN B Revision 7008 9 Click the Module tab to display the Scanner Configuration Applet screen 10 Click Upload to upload the 1747 SDN configuration to the RSNetWorx for DeviceNet project The 1747 SDN Module Tab screen appears 25 1747 SDN Scanner Module General Module Scans Input Output ADR Summary Interscan Delay 10 4 Upload from Scanner Foreground to Background Poll Ratio Download Scanner Module Defaults Advanced 1747 SDN Slt 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Pub
289. ror Code N30 75 0000 0 Pad Word 0 always zero N30 76 008F 143 Parameter Number verification N30 77 0000 0 Pad Word 0 successful or Error Code N30 78 0000 0 Pad Word 0 always zero N30 79 0069 105 Parameter Number verification N30 80 0000 0 Pad Word 0 successful or Error Code N30 81 0000 0 Pad Word 0 always zero N30 82 006A 106 Parameter Number verification N30 83 0000 0 Pad Word 0 successful or Error Code N30 84 0000 0 Pad Word 0 always zero N30 85 006B 107 Parameter Number verification N30 86 0000 0 Pad Word 0 successful or Error Code N30 87 0000 0 Pad Word 0 always zero 1 n RSLogix 5 software leading zeros are not displayed in data file addresses For example 0024 in address N30 71 is shown as 24 Figure 6 28 Example Scattered Write Response Data File 4 File N30 hex N30 H Properties Rada Hex BCD vi Symbot __ 5 5 Colunns 10 Desc Using Explicit Messaging 6 27 SLC 500 Controller The CIP messaging method provides two ways to perform explicit Examples messaging e Read Write Parameter Service simplifies setup by requiring less data to be entered in message configuration screens However the Read Write Parameter Service can only be used to perform single parameter read or single parameter write explicit messages Multiple parameter reads or writes must be performed using the Generic Get Set Attribute Service described below Importa
290. rs in the DPI drive The adapter parameters are appended to the list of drive parameters The total number of parameters can be read in Instance 0 Attribute 2 Instance Description 0 Class Attributes 1 Drive Parameter 1 Attributes n Last Drive Parameter n Attributes 7 1 Adapter Parameter 1 Attributes n m Last Adapter Parameter m Attributes 2 1 n represents the number of parameters in the drive 2 m represents the number of parameters in the adapter Class Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Data Type Description 1 Get Revision UINT 1 2 Get Max Instance UINT Number of parameters 8 Get Parameter Class WORD 0 False 1 True Descriptor Bit 0 Supports parameter instances Bit 1 Supports full attributes Bit 2 Must do NVS save command Bit 3 Parameters are stored in NVS 9 Get Configuration UINT 0 Assembly Instance 10 Set Native Language USINT 0 English 1 French 2 Spanish 3 Italian 4 German 5 Japanese 6 Portuguese 7 Mandarin Chinese 8 Russian 9 Dutch 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P C 6 DeviceNet Objects Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Data Type Description 1 Parameter Value 2 Get Link Path Size USINT 0 No link specified n The size of Attribute 3 in bytes 3 Get Link Path 4 4 Get Descriptor WORD 0
291. s This project is also where the tags will be saved Lookin Projects am Kv 16_Example_using_20comvD AcD 4 Select the appropriate RSLogix 5000 project ACD file and click Step 2 in the left pane to display the Step 2 window 1 RSLogix 5000 DeviceNet Tag Generator help Select Scanner md Select the scanner for which you want to generate tags Scanners listed below 5000 those that were found in the selected RSLogix 5000 project Step 2 RSLogix 5000 Project 16 Exemple using 20 8 select Scanner Module Name Parent Name Module Address Type DeviceNet Scanner Local 3 1756 DNB 5 Select the appropriate scanner for this example DeviceNet Scanner and click Step 3 in the left pane to display the Step 3 window 1 RSLogix 5000 DeviceNet Tag Generator eo help Select RSNetWorx Project Step 1 Select the RSNetWorx project containing the network configuration for the Select RSLogix 5000 selected scanner The project is selected for you if it is specified in the Project selected RSLogix 5000 project Step 2 Scanner My_DeviceNet_Scanner in RSLogix 5000 Project v16 Example using 20COMMD Select Scanner Lookin Networks E3 Step 3 tf DeviceNet dnt Select RSNetWorx Bl Project 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 4 18 Configuring the I O 6 Browse
292. s Level Bit 2 24 Access Level Bit 3 25 Writable ENUM ENUM text 0 Read Only 1 Read Write 26 Not a Link Source 0 Parameter can be a source for a link 1 Parameter cannot be a source for a link 27 Enhanced Bit ENUM Parameter supports enhanced bit ENUMs 28 Enhanced ENUM Parameter supports enhanced ENUMs 29 Not Used Reserved 30 Not Used Reserved 31 Not Used Reserved 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P C 16 DeviceNet Objects Formulas for Converting Display Value Internal Value Offset x Multiplier x Base Divisor x 10 Decimal Places Internal Value Display Value x Divisor x 10 Decima Places Multiplier x Base Offset Common Services Service Code Implemented for Service Name Class Instance Ox0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 Yes Yes Set_Attribute_Single Object Specific Services Service Code Implemented for Service Name Class Instance 0x4B Yes No Get_Attributes_Scattered 0x4C Yes No Set Attributes Scattered The table below lists the parameters for the Get Attributes Scattered and Set Attributes Scattered object specific service Name Data Type Description Scattered Parameters STRUCT of Parameter Number WORD Parameter to read or write Parameter Value LSW WORD Low word of Parameter value to read or write zero when reading Parameter Value MSW WORD High word of Parameter value to read or wr
293. s such as RSNetWorx for DeviceNet software to describe products so that you can easily commission them on a network EDS files describe a product device type and revision EDS files for many Allen Bradley products can be found at http www ab com networks eds Explicit Messaging Explicit Messages are used to transfer data that does not require continuous updates They are typically used to configure monitor and diagnose devices over the network Fault Action A fault action determines how the adapter and connected drive act when a communication fault for example a disconnected cable occurs or when the controller is switched out of run mode The former uses a communication fault action and the latter uses an idle fault action Fault Configuration When communication is disrupted for example a cable is disconnected the adapter and PowerFlex drive can respond with a user defined fault configuration The user sets the data that is sent to the drive using specific fault configuration parameters in the adapter When a fault action parameter is set to use the fault configuration data and a fault occurs the data from these parameters is sent as the Logic Command Reference and or Datalinks Faulted Node Recovery This DeviceNet feature lets you change a configuration of a device that is faulted on the network For example if you add a device to a network and it does not have a unique address it will fault If you have a configurat
294. screen a Click Who Active and select the communication path to the processor b Click OK c Click Read IO Config to list the 1747 SDN DeviceNet Scanner Module Note that the column shows the slot number that the scanner occupies d Close the Read IO Configuration from Online Processor screen 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 5 34 Using the I O Drive and Adapter Parameter Settings The following drive and adapter settings were used for the example ladder logic program in this section 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P Device Parameter Value Description PowerFlex 90 Speed Ref A Sel 22 DPI Port 5 Assigns 20 COMM D to be used for the Reference 70 EC Drive 300 Data In A1 140 Points to Par 140 Accel Time 1 301 Data In A2 142 Points to Par 142 Decel Time 1 302 Data In B1 100 Points to Par 100 Jog Speed 303 Data In B2 155 Points to Par 155 Stop Mode A 304 Data In C1 101 Points to Par 101 Preset Speed 1 305 Data In C2 102 Points to Par 102 Preset Speed 2 306 Data In D1 103 Points to Par 103 Preset Speed 3 307 Data In D2 104 Points to Par 104 Preset Speed 4 310 Data Out A1 140 Points to Par 140 Accel Time 1 311 Data Out A2 142 Points to Par 142 Decel Time 1 312 Dat
295. set Required No Action lets you determine the action of the adapter and connected drive ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists Parameter 11 Idle when the controller is idle By default this parameter faults the drive You can set this parameter so that the drive continues to run however precautions should be taken to verify that the setting of this parameter does not create a risk of injury or equipment damage When commissioning the drive verify that your system responds correctly to various situations for example a faulted controller DN Active Cfg Displays the source from which the adapter node address and data rate are taken This will either be 1 Switches or 0 EEPROM in which the address from Parameter 03 DN Addr Cfg and the data rate from Parameter 05 DN Rate Cfg is stored The source is determined by the settings of the adapter switches DPI I O Cfg Sets the I O that is transferred through the adapter DPI 1 0 Act Displays the I O that the adapter is actively transmitting The value of this parameter will usually be equal to the value of Parameter 13 DPI I O Cfg Values 0 EEPROM 1 Switches Type Read Only Default xxx0 0001 Bit Values 0 I O Disabled 1 Enabled Read Write Reset Required Yes ink C ink B Bit Definition Used Used Used ata ata Default Bit N x No x No e
296. sful Address 01 Node 1 n RSLogix 5 software leading zeros are not displayed in data file addresses For example 0000 in address N30 71 is shown as 0 Figure 6 45 Example Single Write COP Response Data File Data File N30 hex 69 6B 0 0 4144 DDFS N30 90 FFEF 1000 1910 210 FFFF FFFF 0 100 7FFF 0 gt N30 70 Radix Hex BCD X Symbol Columns 10 Desc N30 E Properties Usage SLC 500 Controller Example COP Message to Read Multiple Parameters A scattered read message is used to read the values of multiple parameters Up to 8 parameters can be read This read message example reads the values of these five parameters in a PowerFlex 7 Class drive Parameter 001 Output Freq Parameter 003 Output Current Parameter 006 Output Voltage Parameter 012 DC Bus Voltage Parameter 017 Analog In2 Value Using Explicit Messaging 6 41 Table 6 T Example Scattered Read COP Request Data Value Address Hex Dec Description N30 0 0101 257 TXID 01 Command 01 execute N30 1 0024 136 Port 00 Size 36 bytes 2 N30 2 4B01 19201 Service 4B Get_Attribute_Single Address 01 Node N30 3 0093 147 Class 93 Parameter Object N30 4 0000 0 Instance Class Attributes drive N30 5 0000 0 Attribute 0 Parameter Value N30 6 0001 1 Parameter Number Read 1 Out
297. ster Device The EDS Wizard appears Rockwell Software s EDS Wizard x _ Welcome to Rockwell Software s EDS Wizard The EDS Wizard allows you to register EDS based devices unregister a device change the graphic images associated with a device create an EDS file from an unknown device j l e b Click Next to start creating the EDS file Select Create an EDS file d Click Next If the EDS file is already downloaded and resides on your computer select the Register an EDS file option and click Next Then follow the screen prompts and disregard the remaining steps in this procedure 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 4 24 Configuring the I O 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P Type a description if desired and click Next Check the Polled box type 4 in the Input Size and Output Size boxes which accounts for just the basic I O and click Next RSNetWorx for DeviceNet software will upload the EDS file from the drive Click Next to display the icon options for the node We recommend using the icon for the PowerFlex 7 Class drive being used You can change icons by clicking Change icon Click Next to view a summary Click Next again to accept it Click Finish to finish creating the EDS file A new icon represents the PowerFlex 7 Class drive and communication adapter in the RSNetWorx for DeviceNet graph view window
298. t e Clear faults in the adapter The adapter firmware is being updated e Cycle power to the drive or adapter if mounted in a DPI External The node address switch setting is not valid VOTIS RU f cycling power does not correct the problem the adapter parameter settings may have been corrupted Reset defaults and reconfigure the adapter e f resetting defaults does not correct the problem update the adapter with the latest firmware revision e Verify that the node address switch setting is valid 0 63 Steady Red The adapter has failed the hardware test e Cycle power to the drive or adapter if mounted in a DPI External Comms Kit e Replace the adapter Flashing Green The adapter is operational but is not transferring Place the scanner in RUN mode I O data to a controller e Program the controller to recognize and transmit I O to the adapter e Configure the adapter for the program in the controller e Normal behavior if no DPI I O is enabled Steady Green The adapter is operational and transferring O No action required data to a controller 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P Troubleshooting 7 3 This red green bicolor LED indicates the status of the network connection Corrective Actions NET A Status Indicator as shown in the table below Status Cause Off The adapter or network is not powered or the adapter is not properly connected to the network e Securely c
299. t Class Code Hexadecimal Decimal 0x01 1 Services Implemented for Service Code Class Instance Service Name 0x05 Yes Yes Reset Ox0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single Instances The number of instances depends on the number of components in the device connected to the adapter This number of components can be read in Instance 0 Attribute 2 Instance Description 0 Class 1 Entire device DPI host 2 7 DPI Peripherals on ports 1 6 Class Attributes Attribute ID_ Access Rule Name Data Type Description 2 UINT Total number of instances Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Data Type Description 1 Get Vendor ID UINT 1 Allen Bradley 2 Get Device Type UINT 121 3 Get Product Code Number identifying product name and rating 4 Get Revision STRUCT of Major USINT Value varies Minor USINT Value varies 5 Get Status UINT Bit 0 Owned Bit 8 Minor recoverable fault Bit 10 Major recoverable fault 6 Get Serial Number UDINT Unique 32 bit number 7 Get Product Name SHORT STRING Product name and rating 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P Connection Object DeviceNet Objects C 3 Class Code Hexadecimal Decimal 0x05 5 Services Implemented for Service Code Class Instance Service Name Ox0E Yes Get Attribute Single Instances Instance Description 1 Master Slave Explicit Message Connection 2 Polled Co
300. t software to automatically map the drive I O into the scanner in the next available registers The mapping is based on the minimum I O requirements 4 bytes for input and 4 bytes for output that the scanner obtains from the drive EDS file a Forthis example uncheck the Automap on Add box b Select the PowerFlex 70 EC drive in the Available Devices box c d e Configuring the I O 4 27 Click gt to move the PowerFlex 70 EC drive to the Scanlist box 25 1771 SDN Scanner Module General Module Scanlist Output Summary Available Devices Scanlist 01 70 24 gt Box Setting Node Active Activates deactivates the scanlist in the 1771 SDN scanner for the selected device For this example keep the box checked Device Type These Electronic Key category check boxes select how specific the device in the scanlist must be for the 1771 SDN scanner to match its compatibility for I O operation The more boxes that Product Code are checked the more specific the device must be to operate For this example keep the default boxes Device Type Vendor and Product Code checked Vendor Major Revision only 1771 SDN Series C version 6 xxx or later Click Edit I O Parameters to display the Edit I O Parameters screen for the PowerFlex 70 EC drive used in this example Edit 1 0 Parameters A01 PowerFlex 70 EC 240V 4 24 2X
301. ter 26 M S Output Bits and Corresponding I O Datalink B Datalink C Datalink A Datalink va 0 Peer or other output xxx0 0000 1 Master Slave output When you enable Cmd Ref or Datalink in the adapter you must set the corresponding bit in Parameter 26 M S Output if you want the output data to be sent to the scanner or master device Table E C and Table E D list possible configurations for Parameter 26 M S Output and the possible data size allocation associated with each value depending on the method of data transfer Table E C Host Products with 16 bit Reference Feedback and Datalinks Allocation Number of Bytes Data Size sent from the Adapter to the Controller M S Input M S Output Poll Only COSOnly Cyclic Only Poll amp COS amp Cyclic XXXXX 00000 0 XXXXX 00010 4 XXXXX 00100 4 XXXXX 00110 8 XXXXX 01000 4 XXXXX 01010 8 XXXXX 01100 8 XXXXX 11100 12 XXXXX 10000 4 XXXXX 10010 8 XXXXX 10100 8 XXXXX 10110 12 Master Slave I O Configuration E 5 Table E C Host Products with 16 bit Reference Feedback and Datalinks Continued Allocation Number of Bytes Data Size sent from the Adapter to the Controller M S Input M S Output PollOnly COS Only Cyclic Only Poll amp COS amp Cyclic XXXXX 11000 8 XXXXX 11010 12 XXXXX 11100 12 XXXXX 11110 16 X
302. ter 738 739 Data Out D2 MSW N10 0 Logic Command see Appendix D N10 1 Not Used N10 2 Speed Reference LSW N10 3 Speed Reference MSW N10 4 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 707 708 Data In A1 LSW N10 5 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 707 708 Data In A1 MSW N10 6 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 709 710 Data In A2 LSW N10 7 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 709 710 Data In A2 MSW N10 8 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 711 712 Data In B1 LSW N10 9 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 711 712 Data In B1 MSW N10 10 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 713 714 Data In B2 LSW N10 11 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 713 714 Data In B2 MSW N10 12 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 715 716 Data In C1 LSW N10 13 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 715 716 Data In C1 MSW N10 14 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 717 718 Data In C2 LSW N10 15 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 717 718 Data In C2 MSW N10 16 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 719 720 Data In D1 LSW N10 17 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 719 720 Data In D1 MSW N10 18 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 721 722 Data In D2 LSW N10 19 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 721 722 Data In D2 MSW 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P Using the Table 5 R SLC 500 Data Table Addresses for PowerFlex 7005 Drives with Phase I
303. ter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 8 2 Using the Adapter in DPI External Comms Kit 20 XCOMM DC BASE I O Board Option 20 XCOMM IO OPT1 Understanding the I O Image Drive Option 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P The I O Board option when installed in the DPI External Comms Kit can be used with only a Series B adapter firmware revision 3 xxx or later The I O Board provides six DC inputs and two Relay outputs for use by a controller on the network Figure 8 2 Connector Function Descriptions PLI 9 10 11 pil Es n dm IN2 1 01 COM L 01 NO i INPUT COM For more information see the I O Board Option Installation Instructions publication 20COMM INO02 The data for the optional I O Board is sent over the I O connection using Datalink D When the optional I O Board is installed in the DPI External Comms Kit Datalink D is dedicated only for this function and is not available for other uses When the adapter detects the presence of the optional I O Board the I O image is modified as shown in Figure 8 3 Figure 8 3 Example 1 0 Image Datalink D Dedicated to I O Board and All I O Enabled DeviceNet DPI Controller Scanner Adapter Word and I O PowerFlex Drive Output 0 Logic Command
304. teways Ethernet l ControlNet ControlNet Bs DeviceNet DeviceNet gy Ethernet Ethernet EtherNet IP Ethernet 9 35 Serial Data Highway Plus l USB Data Highway Plus 6 Expand the communication path from your computer to the DeviceNet scanner 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 4 6 Configuring the I O 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P The following screen shows our example navigating to devices that are on a DeviceNet network Depending on the communication link you are using the navigation path may be different Browse for network Select a communications path to the desired network Maes EE as EtherNet IP Ethernet a Cj 10 91 100 69 Unrecognized Device PowerFlex 7 10 91 100 70 Unrecognized Device Port 0 Powe 10 91 100 71 Unrecognized Device PowerFlex 7 5 10 91 100 76 1756 ENZT A 1756 ENZT A 10 91 100 77 MicroLogix1100 1763 168WA 8 4 W 10 91 100 79 PowerFlex 70 EC PowerFlex 70 EC 10 91 100 80 1756 ENBT A 1756 ENET A Ef 10 91 100 83 1756 EN2T A 1756 EN2T A 9 Backplane 1756 A7 A 00 1756 163 LOGIX5563 v16 Example ur E 01 1756 163 LOGIX5563 v16 Example 02 1756 63 LOGIX5563 1756 163 A L6x 03 1756 DNB 1756 DNB DeviceNet Scann 00 1756 DNB 01 PowerFlex 70 EC 240V 4 24 04 1756 CNBR D 1756 CNBR D 5 051 Bui V gt Cancel Help 7 After selectin
305. that you want to clear the message or queue 5 Press the Enter key to confirm your request If Clr Event Queue was selected all event queue entries will then display No Event 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P Table 7 B Adapter Events Troubleshooting 7 7 Events Many events in the event queue occur under normal operation If you encounter unexpected communications problems the events may help you or Allen Bradley personnel troubleshoot the problem The following events may appear in the event queue Code Event Description 1 No Event Empty event queue entry 2 DPI Bus Off Fit A bus off condition was detected on DPI This event may be caused by loose or broken cables or by noise 3 Ping Time A ping message was not received on DPI within the specified time 4 Port ID Fit The adapter is not connected to a correct port on a DPI product 5 Port Change Fit The DPI port changed after start up 6 Host Sent Reset The drive sent a reset event message 7 EEPROM Sum Fit The EEPROM in the adapter is corrupt 8 Online 125kbps The adapter detected that the drive is communicating at 125 kbps 9 Online 500kbps The adapter detected that the drive is communicating at 500 kbps 10 Bad Host Fit The adapter was connected to an incompatible product 11 Dup Port
306. the dialog box appears asking to continue click Yes If there are any errors listed in the Results pane correct them before continuing 9 Close the DeviceNet Tag Generator software by clicking the close button in the upper right corner of the window 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P Configuring the I O 4 19 Downloading the Project to the Controller and Going Online After adding the scanner and drive adapter to the I O configuration you must download the configuration to the controller You should also save the configuration as a file on your computer 1 4 In the RSLogix 5000 window select Communications gt Download The Download dialog box appears Download Download offline project v16 Example using 20COMMD to the controller Connected Controller Name My Controller Type 1756 L63 A ControlLogix5563 Controller Path EtherNet P410 91 100 83 Backplane O Serial Number 00270274 Security No Protection amp DANGER Unexpected hazardous motion of machinery may occur Some devices maintain independent configuration settings that are not loaded to the device during the download of the controller Verify these devices drives network devices 3rd party products have been properly loaded before placing the controller into run mode Failure to load proper configuration could result in misaligned data and unexpected equipment operation Cancel Help T
307. tion 1 Clear all timers Does not clear the real time clock or read only timers 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Data Type Description 0 Get Read Full STRUCT of STRING 16 of the timer LWORD or Elapsed time in milliseconds unless timer STRUCT is a real time clock see attribute 2 BOOL 16 See Attribute 3 1 Get Timer Text STRING 16 Name of the timer 2 Get Set Timer Value LWORD Elapsed time in milliseconds unless the Or timer is a real time clock STRUCT of Real Time Clock Data WORD Milliseconds 0 999 BYTE Seconds 0 59 BYTE Minutes 0 59 BYTE Hours 0 23 BYTE Days 1 31 BYTE Months 1 January 12 December BYTE Years since 1972 3 Get Timer Descriptor BOOL 16 0 invalid data 1 valid data BOOL 1 0 elapsed time 1 real time BOOL 2 15 Not used Appendix D PowerFlex 70 700 700H and 700L with 700 Control Drives Logic Command Status Words This appendix presents the definitions of the Logic Command and Logic Status words that are used for some products that can be connected to the adapter If the Logic Command Logic Status for the product that you are using is not listed refer to your product s documentation Logic Command Word Logic Bits 15 14 13 12 111 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Command Descript
308. tion is set to 4 Send Cfg and peer communication is disrupted Fit Cfg A1 In Fit Cfg A2 In Fit Cfg B1 In Fit Cfg B2 In Fit Cfg C1 In Fit Cfg C2 In Fit Cfg D1 In Fit Cfg D2 In Sets the data that is sent to the Datalink in the drive if any of the following is true e Parameter 10 Comm Action is set to 4 Send Fit Cfg and communication is disrupted e Parameter 11 Idle Action is set to 4 Send Fit Cfg and the controller is idle e Parameter 34 Peer Action is set to 4 Send Fit Cfg and peer I O communication is disrupted M S Input Sets the Master Slave input data This data is produced by the scanner and consumed by the adapter Details Default 0000 0000 0000 0000 Minimum 0000 0000 0000 0000 Maximum 1111 1111 1111 1111 Type Read Write Reset Required No Default 0 Minimum 0 Maximum 4294967295 Type Read Write Reset Required No Important If the drive uses a 16 bit Reference the most significant word of this value must be set to zero 0 ora fault will occur Default Default Default Default Default Default Default Default Minimum Maximum 4294967295 Type Read Write Reset Required No Important If the drive uses 16 bit Datalinks the most significant word of this value must be set to zero 0 ora fault will occur Default xxx0 0001 Bit Values 0 I O Disa
309. to and select the appropriate RSNetWorx for DeviceNet project dnt file and click Step 4 in the left pane to display the Step 4 window 1 RSLogix 5000 DeviceNet Tag Generator Step 1 Select RSLogix 5000 Project Step 2 Select Scanner Step 3 inu Select RSNetWorx Project Step 4 E select Scanner Node Eo r Select Scanner Node Select the node that corresponds to the scanner for which you want to generate tags The node is selected for you if it is specified in the selected RSLogix 5000 project Nodes listed below are those that were found in the selected RSNetWorx project Scanner My DeviceNet Scanner in RSNetWor Project DeviceNet Node RSNetWor Device Name 00 1756 DNB Show all compatible scanners found in the selected RSNetWorx project 7 Select the appropriate scanner node for this example node 00 and click Step 5 in the left pane to display the Step 5 window 3 RSLogix 5000 DeviceNet Tag Generator Ee Step 1 Select RSLogix 5000 Project Step 2 Select Scanner Step 3 M Select RSNetWorx Project Step 4 Select Scanner Node Step 5 s Generate Tags help Generate Tags Press the button below to generate and save the scanner tags in the RSLogix 5000 project Scanner My DeviceNet Scanner at Node 00 in RSLogix 5000 Project v16 Example using 20C0MMD Generate Tags Results 8 In the right pane click Generate Tags When
310. trademark used under license by ODVA Windows and Microsoft are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Summary of Changes The information below summarizes the changes made to this manual since its last release May 2012 Description of Changes Added information about Connected Components Workbench software configuration Throughout tool for drives and connected peripherals manual Added information for use with PowerFlex Digital DC drives 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P soc ii Summary of Changes Notes 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P Preface Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 4 About This Manual Conventions Used in This Manual Rockwell Automation Support Additional Resources Getting Started Components 0 00 e eee ee ee eee Features ra piste tne aee n Compatible Required Safety Quick Start ha dae Pad Installing the Adapter Preparing for an Installation Commissioning the Adapter Configuring the Adapter Configuration Using the PowerFlex 7 Class HIM to Access Parameters Setting the Node Address Setting the Data Setting the I O Configuration Selecting Master Sl
311. tus Feedback Copy File Source Local 3 l Data 0 Dest Drive Input Image 0 Length 10 Drive Input Image 0 O Status Ready Drive Input Image 0 1 Status Active Drive Input Image 0 3 Status Forward Drive Input Image 0 3 Status Reverse Drive Input Image 0 7 Status Faulted Drive Input Image 0 8 Status At Speed MOV Move Source Drive Input Image 1 O Dest Speed_Feedback O 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P Using the 5 15 Figure 5 6 ControlLogix Example Ladder Logic Program with Non descriptive Controller Tags for Logic Command Reference COP Copy File Source Drive Output Image 0 Dest Local 3 0 Data 0 Length 5 Command_Stop Drive_Output_Image 0 0 jJ Command Start Drive Output Image 0 1 dE Command Drive Output Image 0 2 dub Command Clear Faults Drive Output Image 0 3 JE C Command Forward Reverse Drive Output Image 0 4 iE Command Forward Reverse Drive Output Image 0 5 MOV Move Source Speed Reference 32767 Dest Drive Output Image 1 32767 Enabling the DeviceNet Scanner A rung in the ladder logic must be created and assigned to the 1756 DNB scanner Command Register Run bit This rung Figure 5 7 enables the scanner to transfer I O on the network Figure 5 7 Ladder Logic Rung for Command Register Run Bit L
312. ual publication PFLEX RMO003 in the Chapter 1 Communications section Then go to the PLC 5 SLC System subsection and see the Reference Feedback Programming sub subsection PowerFlex 753 755 Drives The Reference Feedback value is Hz x 1000 or RPM x 1000 Drive parameter 300 Speed Units determines whether the scaling is Hz or RPM The default scaling is Hz where 0 60 000 equates to 0 60 000 Hz When parameter 300 is set to RPM then 0 1 765 000 equates to 0 1765 000 RPM For 16 bit processors such as PLC 5 and SLC 500 controllers the data requires manipulation to set a speed Reference above 32767 or below 32767 Please see the PowerFlex 700S AC Drives Phase II Control Reference Manual publication PFLEX RMO003 in the Chapter 1 Communications section Then go to the PLC 5 SLC System subsection and see the Reference Feedback Programming sub subsection Using Datalinks Using the I O 5 9 PowerFlex Digital DC Drives The Reference Feedback value is 25000 Maximum Reference Speed The maximum reference speed is set using drive parameter 45 Max Ref Speed A Datalink is a mechanism used by PowerFlex drives to transfer data to and from the controller Datalinks allow a drive parameter value to be read or written without using an Explicit Message When enabled each Datalink occupies two 16 bit or 32 bit words in both the input and output image Use adapter Parameter 08 Datalink Size
313. ue MSW 6 Parameter Number 6 Parameter Number 7 Pad Word 7 Parameter Value LSW 8 Pad Word 8 Parameter Value MSW 9 Parameter Number 9 Parameter Number 10 Pad Word 10 Parameter Value LSW 11 Pad Word 11 Parameter Value MSW 12 Parameter Number 12 Parameter Number 13 Pad Word 13 Parameter Value LSW 14 Pad Word 14 Parameter Value MSW 63 Parameter Number 63 Parameter Number 64 Pad Word 64 Parameter Value LSW 65 Pad Word 65 Parameter Value MSW Figure 6 11 Data Structures for Scattered Write Messages Request Source Data Response Destination Data Word 0 Parameter Number Word 0 Parameter Number 1 Parameter Value LSW 1 Pad Word 2 Parameter Value MSW 2 Pad Word 3 Parameter Number 3 Parameter Number 4 Parameter Value LSW 4 Pad Word 5 Parameter Value MSW 5 Pad Word 6 Parameter Number 6 Parameter Number 7 Parameter Value LSW 7 Pad Word 8 Parameter Value MSW 8 Pad Word 9 Parameter Number 9 Parameter Number 10 Parameter Value LSW 10 Pad Word 11 Parameter Value MSW 11 Pad Word 12 Parameter Number 12 Parameter Number 13 Parameter Value LSW 13 Pad Word 14 Parameter Value MSW 14 Pad Word 63 Parameter Number 63 Parameter Number 64 Parameter Value LSW 64 Pad Word 65 Parameter Value MSW 65 Pad Word Using Explicit Messa
314. uiring the Data Type field to be set to REAL when creating the controller tag See the drive documentation to determine the size of the parameter and its data type 16 bit or 32 bit integer or REAL 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 6 12 Using Explicit Messaging 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P ControlLogix Controller Explanation of Request and Response Data for Read Write Multiple Messaging Using RSLogix 5000 Software Any Version The data structures in Figure 6 10 and Figure 6 11 use 16 bit words and can accommodate up to 22 parameters in a single message In the Response Message a parameter number with the high bit set indicates that the associated parameter value field contains an error code parameter number in response data will be negative Important See Table 6 A on page 6 2 for limitations of PowerFlex 7 Class and PowerFlex 750 Series drives when using Class code 0x93 for explicit messaging Figure 6 10 Data Structures for Scattered Read Messages Request Source Data Response Destination Data Word 0 Parameter Number Word 0 Parameter Number 1 Pad Word 1 Parameter Value LSW 2 Pad Word 2 Parameter Value MSW 3 Parameter Number 3 Parameter Number 4 Pad Word 4 Parameter Value LSW 5 Pad Word 5 Parameter Val
315. ult setting for Service is Custom enabling entry of a Service Code not available from the Service pull down menu When choosing a Service other than Custom from the pull down menu an appropriate Hex value is automatically assigned to the Service Code box which is dimmed unavailable 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P Using Explicit Messaging 6 31 SLC 500 Controller Example Write Single Request Data In this message example we use the data table address in Figure 6 34 to store the request value 10 0 sec that was written to drive parameter 140 Accel Time 1 In this example Accel Time 1 is a 16 bit parameter The most significant word MSW is not used For PowerFlex 7005 drives Accel Time 1 is a floating point number To manipulate REAL data into two 16 bit registers see the Communications section in Chapter 1 of the PowerFlex 7005 AC Drives Phase II Control Reference Manual publication Figure 6 34 Example Write Single Request Data File 3 Data File N14 dec 28671 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Radix Decimal Symbol Columns 10 v Desc N14 Properties Usage Help 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 6 32 Using Explicit Messaging SLC 500 Controller Explicit Messaging Using the Generic Get Set Attribute Service SLC 500 Controller Example DEM Instruction Ladder Logic Pro
316. ultiple parameters Configuration Tab Message Type Service Type 7 Service Code 1 Class Instance Attribute Source Element Source Length Destination Example Value CIP Generic Custom 4b Hex 93 Hex 0 Dec 0 Hex Scattered Read Request Internal Use Only 0 31 9 Scattered Read Response 0 Description Used to access Parameter Object in the adapter Required for scattered messages Code for the requested service Class ID for the DPI Parameter Object Required for scattered messages Required for scattered messages Name of the tag for any service data to be sent from scanner or bridge to the adapter drive Number of bytes of service data to be sent in the message The tag where the data that is read is stored Communication Tab Example Value Description Path 2 My_DeviceNet_Bridge The path is the route that the message will follow Tag Tab Example Value Description Name Scattered_Read_Message The name for the message 1 The default setting for Service Type is Custom enabling entry of a Service Code not available from the Service Type pull down menu When choosing a Service Type other than Custom from the pull down menu an appropriate Hex value is automatically assigned to the Service Code box which is dimmed unavailable Click Browse to find the path or type in the name of the device listed in the I O Configuration f
317. ut Time multiplied by value of Master Parameter 43 Peer Out Skip Default 0 Minimum 0 Maximum 63 Type Read Write Reset Required No Default 10 00 Seconds Minimum 0 01 Seconds Maximum 180 00 Seconds Type Read Write Reset Required No Parameter No Name and Description 37 38 39 40 4 42 43 Peer Inp Enable Sets peer I O input to be on or off Peer Inp Status Displays the status of the consumed peer I O input connection Peer A Output Peer B Output Selects the source of the peer I O output data The adapter transmits this data to the network Important Changes to these parameters are ignored when Parameter 41 Peer Out Enable is 1 On Important Parameter 40 Peer B Output cannot be used when a 32 bit Datalink or Reference is used in Parameter 39 Peer A Output Peer Out Enable Sets peer I O output to be on or off Peer Out Time Sets the minimum time that an adapter will wait when transmitting data to a peer Important A change to this parameter is ignored when Parameter 41 Peer Out Enable is 1 On Peer Out Skip Sets the maximum time that an adapter will wait when transmitting data to a peer The value of Parameter 42 Peer Out Time is multiplied by the value of this parameter to set the time Important A change to this parameter is ignored when Parameter 41 Peer Out Enable is 1 On Adapter Par
318. ves Producer Consumer Network On producer consumer networks packets are identified by content rather than an explicit destination If a node needs the packet it will accept the identifier and consume the packet The source therefore sends a packet once and all the nodes consume the same packet if they need it Data is produced once regardless of the number of consumers Also better synchronization than Master Slave networks is possible because data arrives at each node at the same time Reference Feedback The Reference is used to send a setpoint for example speed frequency and torque to the drive It consists of one word of output to the adapter from the network The size of the word either a 16 bit word or 32 bit word is determined by the drive Feedback is used to monitor the speed of the drive It consists of one word of input from the adapter to the network The size of the word either a 16 bit word or 32 bit word is determined by the drive RSLogix 5 500 5000 Software RSLogix software is a tool for configuring and monitoring controllers to communicate with connected devices It is a 32 bit application that runs on various Windows operating systems Information about RSLogix software can be found at http www software rockwell com rslogix RSNetWorx for DeviceNet Software A software tool for configuring and monitoring DeviceNet networks and connected devices It is a 32 bit application that can be used on computers
319. viceNet Bridge NO1 POL O Decell BOOL My _DeviceNet_Bridge_NO1_POL_O Decel2 BOOL My DeviceNet Bridge POL O SpdReflDO BOOL My DeviceNet Bridge N01 POL O SpdReflD1 BOOL My_DeviceNet_Bridge_NO1_POL_O SpdReflD2 BOOL My_DeviceNet_Bridge_NO1_POL_O MOPDec BOOL My DeviceNet Bridge N01 POL O Reference INT My DeviceNet Bridge POL D AccelTimel INT My DeviceNet Bridge POL O DecelTimel INT My DeviceNet Bridge POL O JogSpeedl INT My DeviceNet Bridge POL O StopBrkModeA INT My DeviceNet POL O PresetSpeedl INT My DeviceNet Bridge POL O PresetSpeed2 INT My DeviceNet Bridge POL O PresetSpeed3 INT My DeviceNet Bridge POL O PresetSpeed4 INT Data Type Description AB 0079 03 PowerFlex 70 BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL INT INT INT 55 my olaja PLC 5 Controller Example Using the I O 5 19 Creating an RSLogix 5 Project Version 7 20 or Later To transmit read and write data between the controller and drive you must create discrete I O instructions in the controller for Logic Command Status Reference Feedback and Datalinks 1 Start RSLogix 5 software The RSLogix 5 window appears 2 Select File gt New to display the Select Processor Type screen Select Processor Type Processor Nam
320. with 32 bit Reference Feedback and 32 bit Datalinks These products include the following PowerFlex 7005 drives with Phase or Phase II control e PowerFlex 700L drives with 700S control e PowerFlex 753 drives e PowerFlex 755 drives Word Output I O Word Input I O 0 Logic Command 0 Logic Status 1 Not Used 1 Not Used 2 Reference LSW 2 Feedback LSW 3 Reference MSW 3 Feedback MSW 4 Datalink In A1 LSW 4 Datalink Out A1 LSW 5 Datalink In A1 MSW 5 Datalink Out A1 MSW 6 Datalink In A2 LSW 6 Datalink Out A2 LSW 7 Datalink In A2 MSW 7 Datalink Out A2 MSW 8 Datalink In B1 LSW 8 Datalink Out B1 LSW 9 Datalink In B1 MSW 9 Datalink Out B1 MSW 10 Datalink In B2 LSW 10 Datalink Out B2 LSW 11 Datalink In B2 MSW 11 Datalink Out B2 MSW 12 Datalink In C1 LSW 12 Datalink Out C1 LSW 13 Datalink In C1 MSW 13 Datalink Out C1 MSW 14 Datalink In C2 LSW 14 Datalink Out C2 LSW 15 Datalink In C2 MSW 15 Datalink Out C2 MSW 16 Datalink In D1 LSW 16 Datalink Out D1 LSW 17 Datalink In D1 MSW 17 Datalink Out D1 MSW 18 Datalink In D2 LSW 18 Datalink Out D2 LSW 19 Datalink In D2 MSW 19 Datalink Out D2 MSW Using Logic Command Status The Logic Command is a 16 bit word of control data produced by the controller and consumed by the adapter The Logic Status is a 16 bit word
321. x BCD X Columns 10 Table 61 Example Single Read Response Data Value Address Hex Dec Description N30 70 0101 257 TXID 01 Status 01 successful N30 71 0004 4 Port 00 Size 04 bytes N30 72 8E01 29183 Service 8E successful Address 01 Node N30 73 0009 9 2 Parameter Value Read LSW 0 09 amps N30 74 0000 02 Parameter Value Read MSW 0 1 In RSLogix 5 software leading zeros are not displayed in data file addresses For example 0004 in address N30 71 is shown as 4 2 n this example Output Current is 32 bit integer parameter For PowerFlex 7005 or PowerFlex 750 Series drives Output Current is a floating point number To manipulate REAL data into a proper Float tag see the Communications section in Chapter 1 of the PowerFlex 7005 AC Drives Phase II Control Reference Manual publication PFLEX RM003 Figure 6 22 Example Single Read Response Data File File N30 hex 8E01 0 N30 70 Radx HewBCD v Sma 10 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P Using Explicit Messaging 6 21 PLC 5 Controller Example to Write a Single Parameter A write message is used to write to a single parameter This write message example writes a value of 10 0 seconds to parameter 140 Accel Time 1 in a PowerFlex 7 Class drive Table 6 J Example Single Write Request Data Value Add
322. yclic Send Rate For more information about scan rates see RSNetWorx for DeviceNet online help h Click OK If a Scanner Configuration Applet appears click Yes to continue The Edit I O Parameters screen closes and then the 1756 DNB Scanlist tab screen reappears 12 Click the Input tab to display the input registers for the 1756 DNB scanner 13 Click AutoMap to map the drive input image to the 1756 DNB scanner as shown in this example below 5 1756 DNB General Module Scankst et ADR Summary T Sze Map Poled 2 310020010 gt ESSE ome Advanced Ones Memory Assembly Osta v Stat DWord 0 ES gt TIP If your RSLogix 5000 project requires a different starting DWord double word 32 bit than the default value of 0 for the drive input image set the Start DWord field to the appropriate value 14 Click the Output tab to display the output registers for the 1756 DNB scanner 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 4 14 Configuring the I O 20 COMM D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM002G EN P 15 Click AutoMap to map the drive output image to the 1756 DNB scanner as shown in this example below 1756 DNB General Module Scankst Output ADR Summary Type Sze Node Woi Po Poked 20 30 Dataioj0 lt TIP If your RSLogix 5000 project requ

PowerFlex 20-COMM-D DeviceNet Adapter User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents